En MultiBlockProgApplFW C

ACS 600 ACS800
Firmware Manual
Multi Block Programming Application 7.x
Multi Block Programming Application 7.x
Firmware Manual
ACS 600/ACS800 Code: 3AFE64773984 Rev C EFFECTIVE: 23.08.2006
2006 ABB Oy. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents................................................................................................................................................v Chapter 1 Introduction to This Manual .......................................................................................................1-1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................1-1 Compatibility.............................................................................................................................................1-1 Safety Instructions ...................................................................................................................................1-1 Before You Start ......................................................................................................................................1-1 What This Manual Contains.....................................................................................................................1-1 Related Publications ................................................................................................................................1-2 Chapter 2 Start-up.........................................................................................................................................2-1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................2-1 General Start-up Instructions ...................................................................................................................2-1 POWER-UP .............................................................................................................................................2-2 START-UP DATA ....................................................................................................................................2-3 Entering and Checking Data..........................................................................................................2-3 Activating the Optional Modules ....................................................................................................2-4 Checking the I/O ............................................................................................................................2-4 Checking the Prevention of Unexpected Start-up and Emergency Stop Circuit............................2-5 Checking the Inverter Fan Speed Control .....................................................................................2-5 Checking the Motor Fan Circuit (if exists)......................................................................................2-5 Checking the DC switch option in multidrive..................................................................................2-5 Checking the Auxiliary Power Supply for control board (RMIO). ...................................................2-5 MOTOR ID RUN = MOTOR IDENTIFICATION RUN ..............................................................................2-6 Checking the Speed Measurement and Rotation Direction...........................................................2-6 Selecting the Motor ID Run Mode..................................................................................................2-8 Multi-Motor Drives..........................................................................................................................2-9 Settings of Second Pulse Encoder on DDCS Channel CH2 .........................................................2-9 OPTIMISING THE STARTING TIME AND TORQUE ...........................................................................2-10 MOTOR PROTECTIONS ......................................................................................................................2-11 Motor Thermal Model Protection .................................................................................................2-11 Motor Protection with Temperature Measurement (if implemented in application) ....................2-12 TUNING THE SPEED CONTROLLER ..................................................................................................2-13 Step Response Test ....................................................................................................................2-13 Low Speed Fine Tuning...............................................................................................................2-15 Suppression of Oscillations .........................................................................................................2-15 SCALAR CONTROL ..............................................................................................................................2-16 Selecting the Scalar Control ........................................................................................................2-16 IR Compensation .........................................................................................................................2-16 CONTROLLING THE DRIVE USING AN ABB OVERRIDING SYSTEM ..............................................2-17 PC Tool interface ...................................................................................................................................2-18 CONTROLLING THE DRIVE USING THE I/O SIGNALS......................................................................2-18 FIELDBUS ADAPTERS .........................................................................................................................2-18 CHECKING THE MASTER/FOLLOWER COMMUNICATION ..............................................................2-19 Checking the Mode and Signals ..................................................................................................2-19 Checking the Point-To-Point Communication on CH2 ................................................................2-20 SPECIAL TUNING .................................................................................................................................2-20 Flying start function and flux correction .......................................................................................2-20 Chapter 3 Control Panel ...............................................................................................................................3-1
ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x
Table of Contents Overview ..................................................................................................................................................3-1 Panel Link ......................................................................................................................................3-1 Display ..............................................................................................................................3-2 Keys ..................................................................................................................................3-2 Panel Operation .......................................................................................................................................3-3 Keypad Modes ...............................................................................................................................3-3 Identification Display .........................................................................................................3-3 Actual Signal Display Mode ..............................................................................................3-3 Parameter Mode ...............................................................................................................3-7 Operational Commands...............................................................................................................3-12 Start, Stop, Direction and Reference ..............................................................................3-12 Chapter 4 Software Description...................................................................................................................4-1 Drive Functions ........................................................................................................................................4-1 General ..........................................................................................................................................4-1 Application Program Identification ....................................................................................4-2 Program Boot....................................................................................................................4-2 Control Diagrams ....................................................................................................................................4-2 Control Block Diagrams ...........................................................................................................................4-3 Control Modes .............................................................................................................................4-12 REMOTE Mode...............................................................................................................4-12 LOCAL Mode ..................................................................................................................4-12 Emergency Stop ..........................................................................................................................4-12 Emergency Stop Hardware.............................................................................................4-12 Emergency Stop Modes..................................................................................................4-13 Action if the Motor Is Running.........................................................................................4-13 Prevention of Unexpected Start...................................................................................................4-13 Drive is Stopped..............................................................................................................4-14 Drive is Running..............................................................................................................4-14 Charging Logic of Inverter ...........................................................................................................4-14 Communication ......................................................................................................................................4-16 DDCS Channels in RMIO Controllers..........................................................................................4-16 N-type Fieldbus Communication Adapter Modules .....................................................................4-17 R-type Fieldbus Communication Adapter Modules .....................................................................4-17 Fieldbus Adapter Selections and Signals .......................................................................4-19 Register Addresses with Modbus Link............................................................................4-19 Register Read and Write ................................................................................................4-19 Register Mapping............................................................................................................4-20 Other Rxxx type of Fieldbus Modules .............................................................................4-20 Block Programming with Profibus Signals ......................................................................4-20 Using Templates in DriveAP Programming ....................................................................4-20 Addressing of Data Using Data Sets 1017..................................................................4-21 Integer Scaling on the DDCS Link ..................................................................................4-22 Received Data Set Table ................................................................................................4-22 Transmitted Data Set Table............................................................................................4-23 I/O Extension Devices on Channel CH1......................................................................................4-23 Master/Follower Link on Channel CH2 ........................................................................................4-23 FAST AI and Encoder 2 on Channel CH2 ...................................................................................4-23 Commissioning and Programming Tools on Channel CH3.........................................................4-23 Ethernet Adapter Module.............................................................................................................4-24 Modbus Panel Link ......................................................................................................................4-24 Application Control Word CW......................................................................................................4-24 ABB Drive States .........................................................................................................................4-24 Main Control Word (MCW) ..........................................................................................................4-26 I/O Configurations ..................................................................................................................................4-31 Basic and Extension I/O ..............................................................................................................4-31
vi
Table of Contents Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................................4-33 Digital Outputs .............................................................................................................................4-33 Analogue I/O................................................................................................................................4-34 Basic I/O of RMIO board.................................................................................................4-34 RAIO Analogue I/O Extension Module............................................................................4-34 Pulse Encoder 1 Interface RTAC ................................................................................................4-36 The Master / Follower Link.....................................................................................................................4-37 General ........................................................................................................................................4-37 Link Configuration........................................................................................................................4-37 Broadcasting messages from the Master Drive..............................................................4-38 Follower Drive(s).............................................................................................................4-41 Star Configuration ...........................................................................................................4-41 Ring Configuration ..........................................................................................................4-42 On-the-fly switching between Speed and Torque Control ..............................................4-42 Follower Diagnostics.......................................................................................................4-43 Master/Follower Link Specification .................................................................................4-43 Point to point Communication between the Master and two Follower drives..................4-43 Speed controlled Follower with load share .....................................................................4-44 Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................4-44 General ........................................................................................................................................4-44 Alarm and Fault Logger ...............................................................................................................4-44 AMC Time Format and Counting ....................................................................................4-45 Data Loggers 1 and 2 ..................................................................................................................4-45 Positioning Counter with Pulse Encoder 1 .............................................................................................4-46 Positioning Counting Function .....................................................................................................4-46 Back-Up of Parameters or Software ......................................................................................................4-47 Spare RMIO Boards ....................................................................................................................4-47 DriveWindow Back-Up Function .....................................................................................4-47 Version Update Back-Up Function .................................................................................4-47 Restoring of Parameters in Version Update ...................................................................4-47 Reduced Run Function ..........................................................................................................................4-48 Removing a broken Inverter Module ...........................................................................................4-48 Settings ...........................................................................................................................4-49 Diagnostics .....................................................................................................................4-49 Chapter 5 Signals...........................................................................................................................................5-1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................5-1 How to Read the Signal Table .......................................................................................................5-1 AMC Table Signals ..................................................................................................................................5-3 Group 1 Actual Signal....................................................................................................................5-3 Group 2 Actual Signals ..................................................................................................................5-4 Group 3 Actual Signals ..................................................................................................................5-6 Group 4 Information.......................................................................................................................5-7 Group 5 Analogue Inputs...............................................................................................................5-9 Group 6 Analogue Outputs ..........................................................................................................5-10 Group 7 Control Words................................................................................................................5-11 Group 8 Status Words .................................................................................................................5-13 Group 9 Fault Words ...................................................................................................................5-19 Error! No filename specified in document reference on page 2 Chapter 6 Parameters ...................................................................................................................................6-1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................6-1 Parameter Groups ...................................................................................................................................6-1 Group + Index ................................................................................................................................6-1 Description.....................................................................................................................................6-1 How to Read the Parameter Table ..........................................................................................................6-2
vii
Table of Contents Group 13 Analogue Inputs.............................................................................................................6-3 Group 14 Fast Inputs .....................................................................................................................6-7 Group 15 Analogue Outputs ..........................................................................................................6-8 Group 16 System Control Inputs .................................................................................................6-10 Group 18 LED Panel Control .......................................................................................................6-11 Group 19 Data Storage................................................................................................................6-12 Group 20 Limits ...........................................................................................................................6-13 Group 21 Start/Stop Functions ....................................................................................................6-15 Group 22 Ramp Functions ..........................................................................................................6-16 Group 23 Speed Reference.........................................................................................................6-17 Group 24 Speed Control..............................................................................................................6-22 The Adaptive Speed Control as a Function of the Torque Reference ............................6-22 Integration Time Parameters of the Speed Controller ....................................................6-23 Derivation Parameters of the Speed Controller ..............................................................6-23 Acceleration Compensation Parameters ........................................................................6-23 Group 25 Torque Reference........................................................................................................6-24 Group 26 Torque Reference Handling ........................................................................................6-25 Group 27 Flux Control .................................................................................................................6-25 Group 28 Motor Model.................................................................................................................6-26 Group 29 Scalar Control ..............................................................................................................6-27 Group 30 Fault Functions ............................................................................................................6-28 Motor Thermal Model User Mode ...................................................................................6-28 Stall Protection................................................................................................................6-30 Underload Protection ......................................................................................................6-31 Motor Thermal Model User Mode Alarm and Fault Limits ..............................................6-33 Motor Temperature Feedback to the Motor Model .........................................................6-34 Group 31 Fault Functions ............................................................................................................6-34 Group 34 Brake Chopper ............................................................................................................6-34 Group 37 Function Generator......................................................................................................6-35 Group 50 Speed Measurement ...................................................................................................6-36 Group 51 Master Adapter (Field Bus Adapter) ............................................................................6-38 Group 52 Standard Modbus ........................................................................................................6-39 Group 53 User Parameters .........................................................................................................6-39 Group 55 Appl Prog1 ...................................................................................................................6-42 Group 56 Appl Task 1 Cntr..........................................................................................................6-43 Group 57 Appl Prog2 ...................................................................................................................6-44 Group 58 Appl Task 2 Cntr..........................................................................................................6-45 Group 59 Appl Prog3 ...................................................................................................................6-47 Group 60 Appl Task3 Ctrl ............................................................................................................6-48 Group 66 Applic Connect.............................................................................................................6-49 Group 70 DDCS Control ..............................................................................................................6-53 Group 71 DriveBus Communication ............................................................................................6-57 Group 90 Data Set Receive Addresses.......................................................................................6-58 Group 92 Data Set Transmit Addresses......................................................................................6-59 Group 94 Point to Point Communication .....................................................................................6-60 Group 95 LCU..............................................................................................................................6-61 Group 97 Drive ............................................................................................................................6-62 Group 98 Option Modules............................................................................................................6-62 Group 99 Start Up Data ...............................................................................................................6-67 Chapter 7 - Application Blocks .......................................................................................................................7-1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................7-1 Safety Instruction with Function Blocks ...................................................................................................7-1 General Rules ..........................................................................................................................................7-1 Block Inputs .............................................................................................................................................7-1 Function Blocks........................................................................................................................................7-2
viii
Table of Contents ABS ..........................................................................................................................................................7-2 ADD .........................................................................................................................................................7-2 AND .........................................................................................................................................................7-3 BSET........................................................................................................................................................7-3 COMPARE...............................................................................................................................................7-4 COUNT ....................................................................................................................................................7-5 DPOT .......................................................................................................................................................7-5 EVENT .....................................................................................................................................................7-6 FILTER.....................................................................................................................................................7-6 MAX .........................................................................................................................................................7-7 MIN ..........................................................................................................................................................7-7 MULDIV ...................................................................................................................................................7-7 OR............................................................................................................................................................7-8 PI..............................................................................................................................................................7-9 PI-BAL......................................................................................................................................................7-9 RAMP.....................................................................................................................................................7-10 SR ..........................................................................................................................................................7-10 SWITCH-B .............................................................................................................................................7-11 SWITCH-I ..............................................................................................................................................7-11 TOFF......................................................................................................................................................7-12 TON .......................................................................................................................................................7-13 TRIGG....................................................................................................................................................7-14 WR-I.......................................................................................................................................................7-15 WR-PB...................................................................................................................................................7-16 XOR .......................................................................................................................................................7-17 I/O and Communication Blocks .............................................................................................................7-18 A/F WORD.............................................................................................................................................7-18 AI1..........................................................................................................................................................7-18 AI2..........................................................................................................................................................7-19 AI3..........................................................................................................................................................7-19 AO1........................................................................................................................................................7-20 AO2........................................................................................................................................................7-20 CW .........................................................................................................................................................7-21 DI1DI6, DI IL.......................................................................................................................................7-23 DC SWITCH ..........................................................................................................................................7-23 DO1........................................................................................................................................................7-24 DO2........................................................................................................................................................7-24 DO3........................................................................................................................................................7-24 EXT1 DIDI3 ........................................................................................................................................7-25 EXT2 DIDI3 ........................................................................................................................................7-25 EXT3 DIDI3 ........................................................................................................................................7-26 EXT4 DIDI3 ........................................................................................................................................7-26 EXT5 DIDI3 ........................................................................................................................................7-27 EXT DO..................................................................................................................................................7-27 EXT15 AI1AI2 .................................................................................................................................7-28 EXT15 AO1AO2 .............................................................................................................................7-29 FUNG IN ................................................................................................................................................7-29 FUNG OUT ............................................................................................................................................7-30 I/O N REF ..............................................................................................................................................7-30 I/O T REF...............................................................................................................................................7-31 PZD3 OUT .............................................................................................................................................7-31 PZD4 OUT .............................................................................................................................................7-32 PZD5 OUT .............................................................................................................................................7-32 PZD6 OUT .............................................................................................................................................7-33 PZD7 OUT .............................................................................................................................................7-33 PZD8 OUT .............................................................................................................................................7-34
ix
Table of Contents PZD9 OUT .............................................................................................................................................7-34 PZD10 OUT ...........................................................................................................................................7-35 PZD3 IN .................................................................................................................................................7-35 PZD4 IN .................................................................................................................................................7-36 PZD5 IN .................................................................................................................................................7-36 PZD6 IN .................................................................................................................................................7-37 PZD7 IN .................................................................................................................................................7-37 PZD8 IN .................................................................................................................................................7-38 PZD9 IN .................................................................................................................................................7-38 PZD10 IN ...............................................................................................................................................7-39 REC1 M/F1 ............................................................................................................................................7-39 REC2 M/F1 ............................................................................................................................................7-40 REC3 M/F1 ............................................................................................................................................7-40 REC1 M/F2 ............................................................................................................................................7-41 REC2 M/F2 ............................................................................................................................................7-41 REC3 M/F2 ............................................................................................................................................7-42 RUN ENA...............................................................................................................................................7-42 SPEED 1 ................................................................................................................................................7-43 SPEED 2 ................................................................................................................................................7-43 SUB........................................................................................................................................................7-44 TRA M/F1...............................................................................................................................................7-44 TRA M/F2...............................................................................................................................................7-45 Factory Connections of Blocks ..............................................................................................................7-45 Chapter 8 Fault Tracing ................................................................................................................................8-1 Protections ...............................................................................................................................................8-1 I/O- Monitoring ...............................................................................................................................8-1 Communication Monitoring............................................................................................................8-1 ACS 600/ACS800 Inverter.............................................................................................................8-1 Overtemperature Fault ..................................................................................................................8-1 Ambient Temperature....................................................................................................................8-1 ACS 600/ ACS800 Overcurrent .....................................................................................................8-1 DC Overvoltage .............................................................................................................................8-2 DC Undervoltage ...........................................................................................................................8-2 PPCC Link Diagnostics..................................................................................................................8-3 Panel loss Function .......................................................................................................................8-3 Short Circuit ...................................................................................................................................8-3 Intermediate DC Link Current Ripple Fault....................................................................................8-3 Overspeed Fault ............................................................................................................................8-3 Earth Fault .....................................................................................................................................8-3 ACS 600 Earth Fault level set........................................................................................................8-4 ACS 600 Earth/ Fault Logics .........................................................................................................8-4 ACS 600 Indicator LEDs in the NINT Board ............................................................................................8-5 Interpretation of the LEDs in ACS 600...........................................................................................8-6 Speed Measurement Fault of Encoder 1.......................................................................................8-7 Speed Measurement Fault of Encoder 2.......................................................................................8-7 Switching from Measured Speed to Estimated Speed ..................................................................8-8 Overswitching Frequency Fault .....................................................................................................8-8 System Fault..................................................................................................................................8-8 ACS800 Short Time Overloading ..................................................................................................8-8 ACS 600 Short Time Overloading .................................................................................................8-8 Overloading between I AC_Nominal and I AC_1/5 min..................................................................8-8 Overloading between the I AC_1/5 min and Maximum Current ..............................................8-9 Motor Protections...................................................................................................................................8-10 Motor Thermal Protection Functions ...........................................................................................8-10 Motor Thermal Model......................................................................................................8-10
Table of Contents Usage of PT100, PTC or KTY84-1xx Temperature Sensors ......................................................8-11 Stall Function ...............................................................................................................................8-12 Underload Function .....................................................................................................................8-12 Motor Phase Loss Function .........................................................................................................8-12 Fault Message Table ...................................................................................................................8-14 Alarm Message Table..................................................................................................................8-22 Other Messages ..........................................................................................................................8-27 Alarm messages generated by the control panel ........................................................................8-27 Chapter 9 - Terms.............................................................................................................................................9-1
xi
Table of Contents
xii
Edited by Foxit Reader Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008 For Evaluation Only.
Chapter 1 Introduction to This Manual

Overview
This chapter describes the contents of the manual. In addition it contains information about the compatibility, safety and intended ( Khan gia ) audience. The manual is compatible with ACS 600 / ACS800 Multi Block Programming Application 7.1x. Follow all safety instructions delivered with the drive. Read the complete safety instructions before you install, commission, or use the drive. For single drive the complete safety instructions are given at the beginning of the hardware manual. For multidrive safety instructions, see ACS600 Multidrive Safety and Product Information [3AFE63982229 (English)]. Read the software function specific warnings and notes before changing the default settings of the function. For each function, the warnings and notes are given in this manual in the section describing the related user-adjustable parameters.
( phat hanh )
Compatibility Safety Instructions
Before You Start
The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the information necessary to control and program the drive. Read through this manual before commencing start-up. The installation and commissioning instructions given in the Hardware Manual (the appropriate manual is delivered with the unit) must also be read before proceeding. Study carefully the Safety Instructions before attempting any work on, or with, the unit.
( trien khai )
( Bat dau )
What This Manual Contains
Chapter 1 Introduction to This Manual, the chapter you are reading now, introduces you to this manual. Chapter 2 Start-Up, explains the Start-up procedure. Chapter 3 Control Panel, describes the operation of the CDP 312 control panel used for controlling and programming. Chapter 4 Software Description, explains the operation of the System Application Program. Chapter 5 Signals, introduces you to the measured or calculated signals.
9 giang giai )
1-1
Chapter 1 Introduction to This Manual
Chapter 6 Parameters, lists the System Application Program parameters and explains their functions. Chapter 7 Application Blocks, describes the function blocks. Chapter 8 Fault Tracing, lists the warning and fault messages with the possible causes and remedies. Chapter 9 Terms, gives complete listing of the terms used in this manual.
Related Publications
AIMA-01 I/O Module Adapter Users Manual (3AFE 64661442, English.) RAIO-01 Analogue I/O Extension Users Manual (3AFE 64484567, English.) RDIO-01 Digital I/O Extension Users Manual (3AFE 64485733, English.) RTAC-01 Pulse Encoder Interface Users Manual (3AFE 64486853, English.) NTAC-XX Installation and Start-up Guide (3AFE 58919730, English.) Fieldbus Adapters, I/O Extension Modules Users Manuals etc. DriveAP Users Manual (3AFE 64540998, English.) DriveWindow 2.x Users Manual (CD-ROM includes extensive Users Manual.)
1-2
Chapter 2 Start-up
Overview
This chapter describes the basic start-up procedure of the drive. The instructions are given as a step-by-step table. A more detailed description of the parameters involved in the procedure is presented in the Chapter 6 Parameters. The drive can be operated: locally from its Control Panel or the DriveWindow PC tool. externally via the I/O connections on the RMIO board or fieldbus connection to the RMIO board.
General Start-up Instructions
The start-up procedure presented uses the DriveWindow program. Drive references can be monitored with DriveWindow with data loggers or with an oscilloscope (connect analogue output signals to an oscilloscope and check the scaling of the signals). For instruction on how to use the DriveWindow PC tool, see DriveWindow Online Help. The start-up procedure includes actions which need to be performed only when the drive is powered up for the first time (e.g. entering the motor data). After the first start-up, the drive can be powered up without using these start-up functions again. The start-up procedure can be repeated later if the start-up data needs to be changed. If an alarm or a fault is generated during the start-up, see Chapter 8 Fault Tracing for the possible causes and remedies. If problems continue, disconnect the main power and wait for 5 minutes before attempting any work on the unit, the motor, or the motor cable.
ACS 600/ACS 800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x
2-1
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
Follow the safety instructions during the start-up procedure. The start-up procedure should only be carried out by a qualified electrician. Check the mechanical and electrical installation and the commissioning of the drive section from the ACS 600 XXX Hardware Manual (Code 3AFY63700118). Connect optical cables temporarily between the RMIO board channel CH3 and the DDCS communication (NISA) card or PCMCIA card in the PC. When using a PCMCIA card, follow the instructions included in the DriveWindow kit. Disconnect the overriding system link from channel CH0 of the RDCO-0x module or from the fieldbus adapter module type Rxxx connected to Slot1 of the RMIO board. 1.
POWER-UP
Apply mains power. Start the DriveWindow program. Select the DDCS protocol. Switch the DriveWindow program into Local control mode.
2-2
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
2.
2.1
START-UP DATA
Entering and Checking Data
Upload the parameter and signal list. Select the language (if available). Reload the parameter and signal list from the Drive menu. Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate into the following parameters (parameter group 99):
Set all motor data exactly as indicated on the motor nameplate. (For example, if the motor nominal speed is given as 1440 rpm on the nameplate, setting the value of parameter 99.05 MOTOR NOM SPEED to 1500 rpm would result in the wrong operation of the drive.)
99.01 LANGUAGE _____________ 99.02 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE _____________ 99.03 MOTOR NOM CURRENT _____________ 99.04 MOTOR NOM FREQ _____________ 99.05 MOTOR NOM SPEED _____________ 99.06 MOTOR NOM POWER _____________ 99.12 MOTOR NOM COSFII _____________
If the nominal COS of the motor is unknown, set parameter 99.13 POWER IS GIVEN to POWER.
ABB Motors
3 ~ motor M2AA 200 MLA 4 IEC 200 M/L 55 No Ins.cl. F V 690 Y 400 D 660 Y 380 D 415 D 440 D Hz 50 50 50 50 50 60 kW 30 30 30 30 30 35 r/min 1475 1475 1470 1470 1475 1770 A 32.5 56 34 59 54 59 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83
CE
IP 55 t E/s
cos IA/IN
Cat. no. 6312/C3
3GAA 202 001 - ADA 6210/C3 180 kg IEC 34-1
ABB Motors CE
3 ~ motor HXR 500 LH6 IEC No Ins.cl. F 0 0 0 0 0 0 379 615 26.1 528 520 0.70 379 660 28.0 507 558 0.68 379 660 75.3 404 1499 0.86 kW V/ Y Hz A rpm cos IP 55
Field Weakening Point Values!
Cat. no.
Check that the motors have the same relative slip, nominal voltage and number of poles. If the manufacturer motor data is insufficient, use the following formulas to calculate the slip and the number of poles:
2-3
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
* f N 60 *Round to the nearest integer value. p = Int n N
nS = f N 60 p
s=
nS n N 100% nS
Where p = number of pole pairs (= motor pole number / 2)

f N
= motor nominal frequency [Hz] = motor nominal speed [rpm]
n N
s = motor slip [%]

n S
= motor synchronous speed [rpm]. The Alarm Message "ID MAGN REQ" is displayed.
Download the parameters.
2.2
Activating the Optional Modules

Activate all installed optional modules connected to Slot1, Slot2, DDCS channel CH1 and CH2 of the RDCO-0x DDCS Option Module. Check the location, node addresses and HW mode for the modules. After the fault reset no I/O COMM ERR. All I/O modules have been identified and activated. Parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES Parameter groups 1315 Parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES
2.3
Checking the I/O

Check the I/O signal connection between the HW and SW.
Signal groups 5, 6 and 8
2-4
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
2.4. Checking the Prevention of Unexpected Start-up and Emergency Stop Circuit.
Check that the prevention of unexpected start-up circuit works. 1= 0= Active (AGPS /NGPS power supply 230/115 VAC circuit is open) Normal State (circuit is closed)
Signal 8.02 AUX STATUS AUX STATUS WORD bit B8 START_INHIBITION. 8.21 START INHIBI WORD 31.02 START INHIBIT ALM
Set the mask for Prevention of Unexpected Start-up alarm for ALARM /FAULT logger, if the AGPS / NGPS power supply is often de-energised. Otherwise the alarm / fault logger will be filled with START INHIBIT alarms. Check that the emergency stop circuit is functioning correctly (DI and DO), if programmed to application.
Signal 8.01 MAIN STATUS WORD bits B5 OFF_3_STA and bit B4 OFF_2_STA
2.5.
Checking the Inverter Fan Speed Control

With ACS800 R8i module equipped with speed controlled fan, check the fan speed control mode setting. 16.08 FAN SPD CTRL MODE
2.5.
Checking the Motor Fan Circuit (if exists).

Check the possible fan control circuit, if programmed to application.
2.6.
Checking the DC switch option in multidrive.

If ACS800 multidrive HW includes DC switch at the input of R7i and R8i inverter unit, activate fuse switch control. If ACS800 multidrive HW includes R2iR5i modules, check following: HW: Feedback signal from auxiliary contact of DC switch to selected digital input. SW: Check the connection from selected digital input to DC SWITCH block with DriveAP 2. 98.14 FUSE SWITCH CNTR
2.7.
Checking the Auxiliary Power Supply for control board (RMIO).

Check the source of auxiliary power supply.
16.07 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY
2-5
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
3.
3.1
MOTOR ID RUN = MOTOR IDENTIFICATION RUN

Checking the Speed Measurement and Rotation Direction
With a pulse encoder (Encoder 1)
Without a pulse encoder
Check the rated speed value of the motor (e.g. 1485 rpm). Set parameter 50.03 SPEED FB SEL to INTERNAL (default value). Set the number of pulses per revolution for the encoder. Check the other Encoder 1 parameter settings in parameter group 50. Reset and start the motor.
50.01 SPEED SCALING 50.03 SPEED FB SEL 50.04 ENCODER PULSE NR. Parameters 50.0150.14 SPEED MEASUREMENT DriveWindow Drives Panel
The stator resistance and other electrical losses are identified and stored into FPROM memory. The motor shaft is not rotating during the FIRST START. The motor stops after the FIRST START has been performed. Start the motor again. Enter a small (e.g. 50 rpm) value for the speed reference. Check that the motor shaft actually turns to the correct direction and the polarity of the speed measurement is correct.
The Alarm Message "ID MAGN REQ" is displayed.
The Alarm Message "ID DONE" is displayed.

DriveWindow Drives Panel DriveWindow Drives Panel
2-6
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
When the motor is rotating in the correct direction and the speed reference is positive, then the actual speed in Signal 1.03 SPEED MEASURED 1 must be positive as well and equal to Signal 1.02 SPEED ESTIMATED. If this is not the case, the incorrect connection can be located as follows:
If the direction of rotation is correct and signal 1.03 SPEED MEASURED 1 is negative, the phasing of the pulse encoder channel wires is reversed. If the direction of rotation is incorrect and signal 1.03 SPEED MEASURED 1 is negative, the motor cables are connected incorrectly. If the direction of rotation is incorrect and signal 1.03 SPEED MEASURED 1 is positive, both the motor and the pulse encoder are connected incorrectly.
Changing the direction:

Disconnect mains power from the drive, and wait about 5 minutes for the intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge! Do the necessary changes and verify by applying mains power and starting the motor again. Check that the speed actual value is positive.
+V2 1k
CH_+ 22k 22k -
220pF
0V
22k
+V2 1k
CH_220pF 22k
22k 15k
0V
An input channel connection of the NTAC-02.
Stop the motor. Set parameter 50.03 SPEED FB SEL to 2 = ENCODER. Start the motor. Check that the signals SPEED ESTIMATED and SPEED MEASURED 1 are the same. Stop the motor.
1.02 SPEED ESTIMATED 1.03 SPEED MEASURED 1
50.03 SPEED FB SEL
2-7
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
3.2 Selecting the Motor ID Run Mode
Warning! The motor will run at up to approximately 50%80% of nominal speed during the Motor ID Run. BE SURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE MOTOR ID RUN!
Select the Motor ID Run.

During the Motor ID Run, the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. The ID Run may take a few minutes, depending on motor size.
99.07 MOTOR ID RUN

1= NO (ID MAGN) The Motor ID Run is not performed. If the start command has been given, the motor model is calculated by the drive by magnetising the motor for 20 to 60 s at zero speed. 2 = STANDARD Performing the Standard Motor ID Run guarantees the best possible control accuracy. The motor and the driven equipment must be uncoupled for the Standard ID Run. 3 = REDUCED The Reduced ID Run should be selected (instead of Standard) if mechanical losses are higher than 20% (i.e. the motor cannot be uncoupled from the driven equipment), or flux reduction is not allowed when the motor is running (e.g. a braking motor in which the brake switches on when the flux falls below a certain level).
Select the STANDARD OR REDUCED ID Run if - operation point is near zero speed, - maximum dynamic torque performance is required (motor model optimisation) and operation without a pulse encoder is required. Select the ID MAGN Run if - it is a pump or fan application, - there are drive sections in which more than one motor is connected to one inverter. See section 3.3 Multi-Motor Drives.
Note: The Motor ID Run cannot be performed if scalar control mode is selected for motor control (parameter 99.08 MOTOR CTRL MODE is set to SCALAR). The Standard Motor ID run can also be performed if the machinery is coupled and there is only inertia but no continuous load. In this case the ID Run may take much longer than without any load. WARNING! If the Standard ID run is to be performed with the machinery coupled to the motor, make sure the machinery is able to with stand the fast speed changes during the ID Run. Otherwise select the Reduced ID Run.
If you select the Standard ID Run, uncouple the driven equipment from the motor!
99.07 MOTOR ID RUN
Check that starting of the motor does not cause any danger!
Start the motor.

The motor stops after the ID Run has been performed.
When the ID Run has been successfully performed, AUX STATUS WORD signal 8.02 B7 IDENTIF_RUN_DONE is set to 1. Parameter 99.07 MOTOR ID RUN also changes back to NO.
2-8
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
Note: If the Motor ID Run has not been successfully performed (for example it does not finish), see Chapter 8 Fault Tracing. FAULT MESSAGE "ID RUN FLT"
3.3
Multi-Motor Drives
These are drive sections in which more than one motor is connected to one inverter. The motors must have the same relative slip, nominal voltage and number of poles. Note: If scalar control is used, then these limitations are not effective. Set the sum of motor nominal currents. Set the sum of motor nominal powers.
99.03 MOTOR NOM CURRENT 99.06 MOTOR NOM POWER
If the powers of the motors are close to each other or 99.05 MOTOR NOM SPEED the same, but nominal speeds vary a little, parameter 99.05 MOTOR NOM SPEED can be set to an average value of the motor speeds. If the powers of the motors vary a great deal, then use of scalar control is recommended. Note: If scalar control is used then these limitations are not effective. Set the frequency of the motors (must be same). The Motor ID Run can be performed with all the motors connected or without load.
99.04 MOTOR NOM FREQ 99.07 MOTOR ID RUN
3.4
Settings of Second Pulse Encoder on DDCS Channel CH2

Activate the second pulse encoder module. Select the channel for encoder 2. Note: The I/O configuration rules (see Chapter 4 Software Description section I/O Configurations). Set the number of pulses per revolution for the encoder. Set the speed measurement mode. Set the diagnostics, if communication break is detected between the encoder module 2 and RMIO board. Set the filter time. Speed signal polarity is correct for application. If not, change the cable connections between the channel A and B.
98.15 ENCODER 2 MODULE 50.19 ENC2 CHANNEL
50.15 ENCODER2 PULSE NR 50.16 SP MEAS MODE ENC2 50.17 ENCODER2 ALM/FLT
50.18 ENC2 FILT TIME 1.28 SPEED MEASURED 2
2-9
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
4. OPTIMISING THE STARTING TIME AND TORQUE
Select the start function.
The fastest starting is achieved when parameter 21.01 START FUNCTION is set to 1 (AUTO, flying start). The highest possible starting torque is achieved when parameter 21.01 START FUNCTION is set to 2 = DC magnetising or 3 = constant DC magnetising. Note: No support for flying start function. 21.01 START FUNCTION
Set the limit parameters according to process requirements.
Parameter group 20 LIMITS
2 - 10
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
5.
5.1
MOTOR PROTECTIONS
Motor Thermal Model Protection
Select the motor thermal model protection mode.
Note: DTC mode is used for ABB motors with IN up to 800 A. Above that USER MODE is the only valid selection. 30.01 MOTOR THERM PMODE
With USER MODE set according to motor manufacturer data.
With DTC mode
Select the protection function for the motor thermal model protection. FAULT / WARNING / NO. Set the time for 63% temperature rise Set the motor load curve current. Set the zero speed load. Especially with forced cooling of the motor. Set the break point value for motor load curve. Set the temperature alarm limit of the motor thermal model. Set the temperature trip limit of the motor thermal model. Set the motor nominal temperature rise. If ABB motor specifies MNTRC value on the rating plate, multiply value by 80 C and enter the result here. Set the typical ambient temperature of motor.
30.02 MOTOR THERM PROT
30.09 MOTOR THERM TIME 30.10 MOTOR LOAD CURVE 30.11 ZERO SPEED LOAD 30.12 BREAK POINT 30.28 THERM MOD ALM L 30.29 THERM MOD FLT L 30.30 MOT NOM TEMP RISE
30.31 AMBIENT TEMP
2 - 11
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
5.2 Motor Protection with Temperature Measurement (if implemented in application)
Unit / Symbol Celsius / C Ohm / Ohm / Normal 01,5 k Overtemperature 4 k 90C == 939 110C == 1063 130C == 1197 150C == 1340
Scaling
Sensor Type PT100 PTC KTY 84-1xx Silicon temperature sensor
Programme the motor temperature measurement function for MOTOR 1 with application blocks. Programme the temperature alarm limit for MOTOR 1 (EVENT block). Programme the temperature trip limit for MOTOR 1 (EVENT block). Test trip and alarm functions.
2 - 12
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
6. TUNING THE SPEED CONTROLLER
When tuning the drive, change one parameter at a time, then monitor the response to a speed reference step possible oscillations. To achieve the best possible result, the step response tests should be carried out at different speeds, from minimum speed up to maximum speed. The speed control values obtained depend mainly on: Flux reference 27.03 FLUX REF. The relationship between the motor power and the rotating mass. Backlashes in the drive's mechanical structure (filtering).
Note: The Thyristor Supply Unit TSU may have to be set to normal operation mode for step response tests (signal 10407=0). If the TSU is in the diode bridge mode, an overvoltage alarm may trip the drive section when a stepped change down is given. Extra "jumps" may also appear in the step when the DC voltage rises, because no braking occurs. 6.1.
Step Response Test

Manual Tuning
Select, for example, the following signals on the DriveWindow Monitoring Tool:
1.07 MOTOR TORQUE FILT2, actual torque 1.03 SPEED MEASURED 1, actual speed 2.03 SPEED ERROR NEG, filtered speed difference
Start the motor. Increase the speed slightly. Give a speed reference step and monitor the response. Repeat at a few test values across the whole speed range. Set step changes of 1% or 2% from the maximum speed of the drive for DriveWindow. Optimise the P part of the speed controller: Set integration time to the maximum value. This turns the PI controller into a P controller. Give a step change up, e.g. 20 rpm. When the speed is stabilised, give a step change down e.g. 20 rpm.
DriveWindow Drives Panel
23.10 SPEED STEP 24.09 TIS
23.10 SPEED STEP
2 - 13
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
Increase the relative gain until the response is sufficient.
Note: Parameter 24.16 KPS LOC/EMSTOP is used only with Local and emergency stop situation. After the tuning procedure, type same value to parameter 24.03 KPS. 24.16 KPS LOC/EMSTOP 24.03 KPS
See also limit parameters: 20.19 SPC TORQMAX LOC/EMS and 20.20 SPC TORQMIN LOC/EMS.
Reduce the integral time constant until overshoot is observed in the response. The integral time constant is then adjusted such that there is no overshoot or only a slight overshoot (depending on the drive application). The function of the integral part is to remove the difference caused by the proportional control between the reference and the actual value as quickly as possible.
24.09 TIS
If the drive is stable and allows a high proportional gain, the integral time constant can be set short and an overcompensated step response is obtained.
2 - 14
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
6.2
Low Speed Fine Tuning

In order to eliminate potentially harmful oscillations at low speeds (for example, during start), parameters 50.13 ZERO DETECT DELAY and 50.14 SPEED HOLD TIME should be adjusted at this point. The larger the mass of the driven equipment, the higher the value of 50.13 should be. As a rule of thumb, 50.14 should be set to approx. 60% of 50.13. For example, typical values for a drive rotating a dryer section of a paper machine would be 50 ms and 30 ms respectively.
50.13 ZERO DETECT DELAY 50.14 SPEED HOLD TIME
6.3
Suppression of Oscillations
The measured speed always has a small ripple because of gear play and flexible couplings. However, a small ripple is acceptable as long as it does not affect the control loops. Reduction of this ripple with filters may cause tuning problems later on. A long filter time constant and a fast acceleration time contradict each other. If the speed measurement shows rapid oscillation, filter it by means of speed error filter and setting the time constant of the first order actual speed filter. With the combination no gear box and pulse encoder feedback, decrease SP ACT FILT TIME to a minimum if fast oscillation is observed. If there is substantial backlash in the drive, and if the drive oscillates at low torque due to the mechanism, the situation can be remedied by means of the adaptive control parameters. If the adaptivity has to be made abrupt (24.03 KPS high and 24.04 KPS MIN low), the drive may start to oscillate as the load varies. Use a step to test the functioning of the adaptivity. The step can be higher than 20 rpm (e.g. 50 rpm).
23.06 SPEED ERROR FILT 50.06 SP ACT FILT TIME
24.04 KPSMIN 24.05 KPS WEAKPOINT 24.06 KPS WP FILT TIME
2 - 15
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
7.
7.1
SCALAR CONTROL
Selecting the Scalar Control
The scalar control mode is recommended for multimotor drives when the number of motors connected to drive is variable. Scalar control is also recommended when the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal current of the inverter, or the inverter is used for test purposes with no motor connected. Start the drive with DTC mode (FIRST START) before selecting the scalar control mode. Select the scalar control mode. Parameter group 29 becomes visible after selection of scalar control. Parameters 29.02 FREQUENCY MAX and 29.03 FREQUENCY MIN are updated by software according to parameters 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED and 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED.
99.07 MOTOR ID RUN 99.08 MOTOR CTRL MODE
7.2
IR Compensation
IR compensation, or boosting the inverter output voltage, is often necessary to obtain an optimal start torque, or when the motor must rotate slowly, i.e. at a low frequency. Due to the stator winding resistance an additional voltage will be needed when even a slight load torque exists. Set the operating range for the IR compensation. Starting voltage Ua (at zero frequency), can be set to 0% to 30% of motor nominal voltage. Select a combination at which the motor is able to start and run at a constant speed over the whole speed range.
U(%)
29.04 IR_COMPENSATION
Umax
Ua f(Hz)
Field weakening point Umax
U/F characteristic
2 - 16
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
Always supervise the temperature rise in motors running at low speeds with IR compensation, particularly if no separate fan or temperature monitoring is included. The adequacy of IR compensation must be checked under actual load conditions.
8.
CONTROLLING THE DRIVE USING AN ABB OVERRIDING SYSTEM

The drive can be controlled from an overriding system by using fieldbus modules (see section 11 FIELDBUS ADAPTERS) and ABB (DDCS, DriveBus) communication protocols. Select the control mode.
98.02 COMM MODULE
Connect the overriding system optic fibres to the channel CH0 of the RDCO-0x DDCS option module. Set the overriding node address for the fieldbus module, if connected to channel CH0.
Controller Node Addr. DDCS 1 Node Addresses DriveBus 1-12 17-125 17-125 Node Addresses ModuleBus 17-125 Par. 71.01 CH0 DRIVEBUS MODE NO NO YES NO NO APC2 AC70 AC80/AC800M DriveBus AC80 ModuleBus FCI (CI810A)
70.01 CH0 NODE ADDR
Select the communication mode for channel CH0. See the table above. Note: This parameter is valid after the next power-up. Check that the communication is working. Set the delay time before a communication break fault is indicated. Select the action upon a communication fault on channel CH0. Select RING, if the CH0 channels on the RMIO have been connected to ring. (Default is STAR that is typically used with the branching units NDBU-95 / 85).
71.01 CH0 DRIVEBUS MODE
70.04 CH0 TIMEOUT 70.05 CH0 COM LOSS CTRL 70.19 CH0 HW CONNECTION
2 - 17
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
9. PC TOOL INTERFACE
Set the node address for channel CH3. This are used for DriveWindow and DriveAP. Use addresses 175 and 124254. Rest of the addresses have been reserved for branching units (NDBU-95 or NDBU-85). If the CH3 channels of several drives have been connected in a ring or star (using a branching unit configuration), each one must be given a unique node address. The new node address becomes valid only on the next RMIO power-on. Select RING, if the CH3 channels on the RMIO boards have been connected to ring. (Default is STAR that is typically used with the branching units NDBU95 or NDBU-85). Test the functions with received and transmitted data.
70.20 CH3 HW CONNECTION 70.15 CH3 NODE ADDR
10.
CONTROLLING THE DRIVE USING THE I/O SIGNALS

The drive can be controlled, instead of an overriding system, by using I/O signals. Select the I/O control mode (1=NO), if no fieldbus control required. Controlling of Control Word can also be mixed between the overriding system and I/O by using function blocks and mask word.
98.02 COMM MODULE 7.05 MAIN CONTROL W MASK 98.02 COMM MODULE
11.
FIELDBUS ADAPTERS
See the appropriate Installation and Start-up Guide. The fieldbus communication is set up with parameter group 51. Set the delay time before a communication break fault is indicated. 3rd data word of R-type of fieldbus module can be routed faster to the torque reference chain. Condition: M/F function is not activated.
98.02 COMM MODULE Parameter group 51 70.04 CH0 TIMEOUT 51.0x (assignment of 3rd data word) = 3
2 - 18
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
13. CHECKING THE MASTER/FOLLOWER COMMUNICATION
Required only if the application includes master/follower drives. Select the Master/Follower mode. In the Master: A packed Boolean word can be sent to followers (e.g. start/stop control with application blocks). In the follower: See parameter 70.09 MASTER SIGNAL 1 description. In the Master: A speed reference is sent from the master drive to the follower drive. Select a signal to be sent as a speed reference (from the master drive to the follower). In the follower: See parameter 70.10 MASTER SIGNAL 2 description. In the Master: A torque reference is sent from the master drive to the follower drive. Select a signal to be sent as a torque reference (from the master drive to the follower). In the follower: See parameter 70.11 MASTER SIGNAL 3 description. The MASTER SIGNAL 3 can be scaled before sent to CH2 by parameter 70.30 MASTER SGN3 SCALE in the master drive and rescaled back by parameter 70.31 FOLL SGN3 SCALE. Enter the node address for used Follower channel CH2 or CH0. In the Follower: If the speed reference is read from the master drive, set parameter 70.17 SPEED REF SEL to 1 = SPEED REF 1 in the follower. Speed Follower with load share. A follower drive load can be shared also with speed control mode. Activate this function by parameter 23.18 FOLL SPD CTRL COR. Typical value is 13%. 70.11 MASTER SIGNAL 3 70.10 MASTER SIGNAL 2
70.08 M/F MODE
13.1 Checking the Mode and Signals
70.09 MASTER SIGNAL 1
70.30 MASTER SGN3 SCALE 70.31 MASTER SGN3 SCALE
70.01 CH0 NODE ADDR or 70.07 CH2 NODE ADDR

70.17 SPEED REF SEL
23.18 FOLL SPD CTRL COR
2 - 19
Chapter 2 Start-up
START-UP PROCEDURE
Note: With this function, parameter. 24.02 DROOP RATE must be set to zero.
In the Follower: If the torque reference is read from the master drive, set parameter 70.18 TORQ REF SEL to 1 = DS TORQ REF A in the follower.
70.18 TORQ REF SEL
Test the load sharing in practice. Also test the function 25.03 LOAD SHARE with an emergency stop.
13.2 Checking the Point-To-Point Communication on CH2

Activate the M/F link. Define the master and the followers if not already done in section 13.1. Activate the communication between the node 1 (Master) and node 2 (Follower 1) in both drives Activate the communication between the node 1 (Master) and node 3 (Follower 2) in both drives No other special options connected in CH2. 70.08 M/F MODE or blocks REC1 M/F 1,REC1 M/F 2
94.01 ENABLE FOLLOWER 1 94.05 ENABLE FOLLOWER 2 98.15 ENCODER 2 MODULE 94.16 FAST AI
14
SPECIAL TUNING
If flying start fails (21.01 START FUNCTION = AUTO), adjust the flying start tuning parameters. If required start torque is not achieved, i.e. motor will not start to rotate, decrease the stator resistance of the motor model.
28.12 FLYSTART CUR REF % 28.13 FLYSTART INIT DLY 28.15 RS20 [mOhm]
14.1 Flying start function and flux correction
2 - 20
Chapter 3 Control Panel

Overview
This chapter describes how to use the control panel CDP 312R. The user can change the configuration of the drive to meet the needs of the requirements by programming. The drive is programmable through a set of parameters. This chapter describes the operation of the CDP 312R control panel and how to use it to modify the parameters, to measure the actual values and to control the drive(s).
Panel Link
The CDP 312R control panel is connected to the drive through a Modbus-protocol communication bus. Modbus is a common bus protocol for ABB Drives products. The communication speed of the bus is 9600 bit/s. 31 drives and one panel can be connected to the bus. Each station must have a unique ID number.
1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 LED PANE 0 % MOTOR SP 0.0 rpm MOTOR TO 0.00 %
ACT PAR FUNC DRIVE
ENTER
LOC REM
RESET
REF
0
CDP 312
Figure 3 - 1 CDP 312R control panel
ACS 600/ACS 800 Firmware Manual Block Programming Application Program 7.x
3-1
Display
The LCD type display has 4 lines of 20 characters. The language is selected at start-up (parameter 99.01 LANGUAGE). Depending on the customers selection, a set of four languages is loaded into the memory of the drive at the factory.
Keys
The control panel keys are flat, labelled, push-button keys that allow you to monitor drive functions, select drive parameters, and change settings.
1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 LED PANE 0 % MOTOR SP 0.0 rpm MOTOR TO 0.00 % 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 99 START-UP DATA 01 LANGUAGE ENGLISH 0
Actual Signal Display Mode
Display/group selection
ACT
Status Row Actual Signals Names and Values
Row/parameter selection
ENTER Parameter Mode

PAR
Enter selection mode Accept new parameter Group selection Fast value change Parameter selection Slow value change
Status Row Group number and name Index number and name Parameter value Status Row Selectable functions
ENTER
1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 UPLOAD <= <= DOWNLOAD => => CONTRAST 4 ACS 800 0005_3 DRYER SECTION 1 AMAM15D3 980605 ID-NUMBER 1
Enter selection mode Accept new value
Function Mode
FUNC
Row selection
ENTER Drive Selection Mode

DRIVE
Function start
Device type Drive name Application sw name + version. *) ID-number of drive in the Modbus link
Drive/ID selection Enter change mode Accept new value
ENTER
*) Name of the downloaded FCB (Function Chart Builder) application.
Figure 3 - 2 Control Panel Display Indications and Functions of the Control Panel Keys
LOC REM RESET
Keypad / External Control Fault Reset Reference Setting Function
Forward
Start
Reverse
Stop
REF
Figure 3 - 3 Operational Commands of the Control Panel Keys
3-2
Panel Operation
Keypad Modes
The following is a description of the operation of the CDP 312R control panel. The CDP 312R control panel has four different keypad modes: Actual Signal Display Mode, Parameter Mode, Function Mode, and Drive Selection Mode. In addition, there is a special Identification Display, which is displayed after connecting the panel to the link. The Identification Display and the keypad modes are described briefly below. When the panel is connected for the first time, or the power is applied to the drive, the Identification Display appears, showing the panel type and the number of drives connected to the Panel Link. Note: The panel can be connected to the drive while power is applied to the drive.
ACS 800 0005_3
Identification Display
ID NUMBER 1
After two seconds, the display will clear, and the Actual Signals of the drive will appear. Actual Signal Display Mode This mode includes two displays, the Actual Signal Display and the Fault History Display. The Actual Signal Display is displayed first when the Actual Signal Display mode is entered. If the drive is in a fault condition, the Fault Display will be shown first. The panel will automatically return to Actual Signal Display Mode from other modes if no keys are pressed within one minute (exceptions: Status Display in Drive Selection Mode and Fault Display Mode). In the Actual Signal Display Mode you can monitor three Actual Signals at a time. The Fault History includes information on the 16 most recent faults that have occurred in your drive. The name of the fault and the total power-on time are displayed. If the APC2 overriding system has been connected to the drive (DDCS channel 0), this time can be seen in the date format instead of power-on time.
3-3
The following table shows the events that are stored in the Fault History. For each event it is described what information is included.
Event
A fault is detected by Drive.
Information
Sequential number of the event. Name of the fault and a + sign in front of the name. Total power on time or date and time updated by overriding system. Sequential number of the event. -RESET FAULT text. Total power on time or date and time updated by the overriding system. Sequential number of the event. Name of the warning and a + sign in front of the name. Total power on time or date and time updated by the overriding system. Sequential number of the event. Name of the warning and a - sign in front of the name. Total power on time or date and time updated by the overriding system.
Display 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 2 LAST FAULT + OVERCURRENT 12 H 49 MIN 10 S 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 1 LAST FAULT -RESET FAULT 12 H 50 MIN 10 S 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 1 LAST WARNING +EMESTOP 12 H 50 MIN 10 S 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 1 LAST WARNING +EMESTOP 12 H 50 MIN 35 S
A fault is reset by user.
A warning is activated by Drive.
A warning is deactivated by Drive.
When a fault or warning occurs in the drive, the message will be displayed immediately, except in the Drive Selection Mode. From the fault display, it is possible to change to other displays without resetting the fault. If no keys are pressed the fault or warning text is displayed as long as the fault exists.
3-4
Table 3 - 1 How to Display the Full Name of the three Actual Signals
Step 1. Function
To display the full name of the three actual signals
Press key Hold

ACT
Display after key is pressed 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 LED PANEL OUTP MOTOR SPEED FILT MOTOR TORQUE FILT 1 L -> LED PANE MOTOR SP MOTOR TO 0.0 rpm 0 0 % 0.0 rpm 0.00 %
2.
To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode.
Release
ACT
Table 3 - 2 How to Select Actual Signals to the Display

Step 1. Function
To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode
Press key
ACT
Display after key is pressed 1 L -> LED PANE MOTOR SP MOTOR TO 1 L -> LED PANE MOTOR SP MOTOR TO 0.0 rpm 0 0 % 0.0 rpm 0.00 % 0.0 rpm 0 0 % 0.0 rpm 0.00 %
2.
To select the desired row.
3.
To enter the Actual Signal Selection Mode.
ENTER
1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 1 ACTUAL SIGNALS 01 MOTOR SPEED FILT 0.0 rpm 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 2 ACTUAL SIGNALS 01 SPEED REF 2 0 rpm 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 2 ACTUAL SIGNALS 02 SPEED REF 3 0 rpm 1 L -> LED PANE SPEED RE MOTOR TO 0.0 rpm 0 0 % 0.0 rpm 0.00 %
4.
To select a different group.
5.
To select a index.
6.
To accept the selection and to return to the Actual Signal Display Mode.
ENTER
3-5
Table 3 - 3 How to Display a Fault and Reset the Fault History

Step 1. Function
To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode
Press key
ACT
Display after key is pressed 1 L -> LED PANE MOTOR SP MOTOR TO 0.0 rpm 0 0 % 0.0 rpm 0.00 %
2.
To enter the Fault History Display. The time of occurrence can be seen either as total power-on time or in the date format if an overriding system (e.g. AC80) has been connected to control the drive.
1 L -> 0.0 rpm 2 LAST FAULT + PANEL LOST 20 H 49 MIN 56 S 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 1 LAST FAULT + PANEL LOST 980621 10:26:19.3043
s= r= fault or alarm logged into the fault logger fault or alarm reset
3.
To clear all the faults from the Fault History Buffer.
RESET
1 L -> 0.0 rpm 2 LAST FAULT + OVERCURRENT 12 H 49 MIN 10 S 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 2 LAST FAULT H MIN S 0.0 rpm 0 0 % 0.0 rpm 0.00 %
A view of cleared fault logger.
4.
To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode.
1 L -> LED PANE MOTOR SP MOTOR TO
Table 3 - 4 How to Display and Reset an Active Fault

Step 1. Function
To display an active fault..
Press key
ACT
Display after key is pressed 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 ACS 800 75 kW *** FAULT *** PANEL LOST 1 L -> LED PANE MOTOR SP MOTOR TO 0.0 rpm 0 0 % 0.0 rpm 0.00 %
2.
To reset the fault. The Reset button functions also in the REMOTE mode.
RESET
3-6
Parameter Mode
The Parameter Mode is used for making changes to the drive parameters. When this mode is entered for the first time after power up, the display will show the first parameter of the first group. The next time, the Parameter Mode is entered, the previously selected parameter is shown. Note: If you try to write to a write-protected parameter, the following warning will be displayed.
**WARNING** WRITE ACCESS DENIED PARAMETER SETTING NOT POSSIBLE
3-7
Table 3 - 5 How to Select a Parameter and Change the Value

Step 1. Function
To enter the Parameter Mode.
Press key
PAR
Display after key is pressed 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS 01 AI1 HIGH VALUE 10000 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 14 DIGITAL INPUTS 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS 01 DO1 CONTROL OFF
2.
To select another parameter group. When the arrow button is pressed down, only the parameter group name is displayed. When the button is released also the first parameter of the group is displayed.
3.
To select a parameter within a group. When the arrow button is pressed down, only the parameter name is displayed. When the button is released also the parameter value is displayed..
1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS 01 DO1 GROUP+INDEX 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS 02 DO1 GROUP+INDEX 801
4.
To enter the parameter setting function..
ENTER
1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS 02 DO1 GROUP+INDEX [801] 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS 02 DO1 GROUP+INDEX [901] 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS 02 DO1 GROUP+INDEX [901] 1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS 02 DO1 GROUP+INDEX 801
5.
To change the parameter value. (slow change for numbers and text) (fast change for numbers only) To send a new value to the drive.
6a.
ENTER
6b.
To cancel the new setting and keep the original value. The selected mode is entered.
ACT PAR
FUNC DRIVE
3-8
Function Table 3 - 6 How to Set the Contrast of the Panel Display.

Step 1. Function
To enter the Function Mode.
FUNC
Press key
Display after key is pressed 1 L -> UPLOAD DOWNLOAD CONTRAST 1 L -> UPLOAD DOWNLOAD CONTRAST 1 L -> CONTRAST 0.0 rpm 0 <= <= => => 0 0.0 rpm 0 <= <= => => 0 0.0 rpm 0 [0]
2.
To select a function.
3.
To enter the contrast setting function.
ENTER
4.
To enter the contrast setting function.
1 L -> CONTRAST
0.0 rpm 0 [7]
5a.
To accept the selected value. To cancel the new setting and keep the original value, press any of the mode selection keys. The selected mode is entered.
ENTER
ACT PAR
1 L -> UPLOAD DOWNLOAD CONTRAST 1 L -> UPLOAD DOWNLOAD CONTRAST
0.0 rpm 0 <= <= => => 7 0.0 rpm 0 <= <= => => 0
FUNC DRIVE
3-9
Table 3 - 7 How to Select a Drive

Step 1. Function
To enter the Drive Selection Mode.
Press key
DRIVE
Display after key is pressed ACS 800 0005_3 DRIVE NAME AMAM1050 980612 ID NUMBER 1 ACS 800 0005_3 DRIVE NAME AMAM1050 980612 ID NUMBER 1
1O-> 2I<- 3O<- 4I-> 5I-> 6O-> 7F 8I-> 9I-> 10I->
2.
To select the next drive/view. The drive connected to the panel is selected with the arrow buttons. Selected ID number is shown on the bottom row in the display. The Status Display of all devices connected to the Panel Link is shown after the last individual station. If all stations do not fit on the display at once, press to view the rest of them.
3.
To connect to the last displayed drive and to enter another mode, press one of the mode selection keys. The selected mode is entered.
ACT
PAR
FUNC
0.0 rpm 0 0 % 0.0 rpm 0.00 %
3 - 10
Table 3 - 8 How to Change ID Number of the Drive

Step 1. Function
To enter the Drive Selection Mode
Press key
DRIVE
Display after key is pressed ACS 800 0005_3 DRIVE NAME AMAM1050 980612 ID NUMBER 1 ACS 800 0005_3 DRIVE NAME AMAM1050 980612 ID NUMBER 1
1O-> 2I<- 3O<- 4I-> 5I-> 6O-> 7F 8I-> 9I-> 10I-> O = I = -> = <- = F Drive stopped Drive running Direction forward Direction reverse Drive has tripped on a fault
2.
To select the next drive/view. The ID number of the station is changed by first pressing ENTER (the brackets round the ID number appear) and then adjusting the value with arrow buttons. The new value is accepted with ENTER. The power of the drive must be switched off to validate its new ID number setting (the new value is not displayed until the power is switched off and on). The Status Display of all devices connected to the Panel Link is shown after the last individual station. If all stations do not fit on the display at once, press to view the rest of them.
3.
To connect to the last displayed drive and to enter another mode, press one of the Mode keys. The selected mode is entered.
ACT
PAR
FUNC
0.0 rpm 0 0 % 0.0 rpm 0.00 %
3 - 11
Operational Commands
Operational commands control the operation of the drive. They include starting and stopping the drive, changing the direction of rotation and adjusting the reference. The reference value is used for controlling motor speed (Local Reference 1), motor torque (Local Reference 2) or frequency in scalar control (Local Reference 3). Operational commands can be given from the CDP 312R control panel always when the status row is displayed and the control location is the panel. This is indicated by L (Local Control) on the display. See the following figure.
1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0
Remote Control (control from the overriding system or I/O is indicated by an empty field).
1 -> 0.0 rpm 0
Operational commands cannot be given from this panel when in Remote Control. Only monitoring actual signals, setting parameters, uploading and changing ID numbers is possible. The control is changed between Local and External control locations by pressing the LOC / REM key. Only one of the Local Control devices (CDP 312R or DriveWindow) can be used as the local control location at a time. Direction of actual rotation is indicated by an arrow.
Forward 1 -> 0.0 rpm 0 Reverse 1 <0.0 rpm 0
Start, Stop, Direction and Reference
Start, Stop and Direction commands are given from the panel by pressing the keys
Forward
Reverse
Start
Stop
3 - 12
Table 3 - 9 How to Set the Reference

Step 1. Function
To display enter a Keypad Mode displaying the status row. To enter the Reference Setting Mode
Press key
ACT PAR
Display after key is pressed 1 L -> LED PANE MOTOR SP MOTOR TO 1 L ->[ LED PANE MOTOR SP MOTOR TO 1 L ->[ LED PANE MOTOR SP MOTOR TO 1 L -> LED PANE MOTOR SP MOTOR TO 0.0 rpm 0 0 % 0.0 rpm 0.00 % 0.0 rpm]0 0 % 0.0 rpm 0.00 % 1030.0 rpm]0 0 % 0.0 rpm 0.00 % 0.0 rpm 0 0 % 0.0 rpm 0.00 %
FUNC
2.
REF
3.
To change the reference. (slow change) (fast change)
4.
To escape the Reference Setting Mode. The selected Keypad Mode is entered.
ACT
PAR
FUNC DRIVE
3 - 13
3 - 14
Chapter 4 Software Description

Drive Functions
General
This chapter describes the typical functions of the drive.
Figure 4 - 1 Block Diagram of the Direct Torque Control Method The motor control of the frequency converter is based on the direct control of motor torque (DTC) by means of the stator flux. The inverter power semiconductors (switch) are regulated to achieve the required stator flux and torque of the motor. The power module switching reference is changed only if the values of the actual torque and the stator flux differ from their reference values more than the allowed hysteresis. The reference value for the torque controller comes either from the speed controller or directly from an external source. The motor control requires measurements of the intermediate circuit voltage and two phase currents of the motor. The stator flux is calculated by integrating the motor voltage in vector space. The torque of the motor is calculated as a cross product of the stator flux and rotor current. By utilising the identified motor model, the stator flux estimate is improved. The measurement of the shaft speed is not needed for motor control. Good dynamic control performance is achieved providing the identification run is done during the commissioning. The main difference between traditional control and DTC is that the torque control is made at the same time level as the control of the power switches (25 s). There is no separate voltage and frequency controlled PWM modulator. All selections of the switches are based on the electromagnetic state of the motor. DTC can only be applied by using high speed signal processing technology. Digital signal processors (MOTOROLA 560xx) are used in ACS 600 and ACS800 products to achieve this performance.
4-1
Application Program Identification
Each drive SW product has a product specific loading package, which contains all necessary software files to be downloaded to the RMIO board. The loading packages define, for example the inverter ratings. A Multi Block Programming Application type information is ABXR7xxx and it can be identified from the signal 4.01 SW PACKAGE VER (xxx means SW revision number). The application program on the RMIO board is saved into FPROM memory. After switching on the auxiliary power, the program starts routines for initialisation and loading of all tasks, parameters and application program from FPROM to RAM memory. This takes about 6 seconds. A reset is given at the end of the boot procedure, and the control mode of the drive is changed to REMOTE. The speed control routine is executed once per millisecond in the fixed part of the program (speed ramp every 2 ms). The following Control Block diagram figures show the speed and torque control chains. Application blocks are executed at 20 ms (default) or 10 ms, 100 ms and 500 ms intervals.
Program Boot
Control Diagrams
4-2
Control Block Diagrams
Figure 4 - 2 Main control word control
4-3
Figure 4 - 3 Speed measurement chain
4-4
Figure 4 - 4 Speed reference chain
4-5
Figure 4 - 5 Speed reference ramp chain
4-6
Figure 4 - 6 Speed control
4-7
Figure 4 - 7 Torque reference chain
4-8
Figure 4 - 8 Torque reference chain
4-9
Figure 4 - 9 Flux and DTC control
4 - 10
Figure 4 - 10 Scalar control
4 - 11
Control Modes
REMOTE Mode
The Block Programming Application Program has two main control modes: REMOTE and LOCAL. The mode is selected by the LOC/REM key of the CDP312R control panel or the DriveWindow tool. The drive is controlled either through a fieldbus by an overriding system or by the drive I/O. The desired alternative is selected by parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE. A digital input or fieldbus signal can also be used for changing the control location with Multi Block Programming Application. The local control mode is mainly used during commissioning and servicing. Local control is selected with the LOC/REM key on either the CDP312R control panel or DriveWindow. The controls from the overriding system have no effect in this mode. Parameter values can always be monitored and changed regardless of the selected control mode.
LOCAL Mode
Emergency Stop
Emergency Stop Hardware An Emergency stop function can be built by using block programming. See Main Control Word (MCW) bits 1 and 2. The Emergency stop mode is activated by controlling application programmed digital input to state FALSE. This input must command either bit 1 (coast stop) or 2 (ramp stop) to FALSE. See MCW description.
OFF3 control BSET ENABLE 8.05.7 OUT X22:11 C2 C1151 BIT NR INPUT Control Word CW
Emergency Stop by ramp = FALSE DI IL
Figure 4 - 11 Programming principle of emergency stop OFF3. The emergency stop feedback signal can be programmed by using application blocks to be sent through a relay output. The purpose of the feedback signal is to acknowledge that the emergency stop function has been received and the drive program is running. If no feedback is received, the main AC supply will be switched off by hardware after the short delay defined by the ACU (Auxiliary Control Unit) adjustable relays (MultiDrive systems).
4 - 12

Emergency Stop by ramp DI IL 8.05.7 X22:11 OUT -8.05.7 IN Xxx DO x
Figure 4 - 12 Example Programming principle of emergency stop feedback signal Note: When an emergency stop signal is detected, the emergency stop cannot be cancelled even though the signal is cancelled (emergency stop push button is released). Emergency Stop Modes If the motor is already at zero speed when the drive receives an emergency stop signal (MCW bits 1 and 2) the following actions are taken: Running and magnetising of the motor is prevented Bit 5 of the MAIN STATUS WORD (MCW) is set to 0 Bit 1 of ALARM WORD 1 (9.04) is set to 1 An alarm EME STOP is indicated in the fault logger. Action if the Motor Is Running It the motor is running when the drive receives an emergency stop signal, the following actions are taken: The drive is stopped according to the application. The application program locks the emergency stop procedure until the motor has reached zero speed and the (MCW) MAIN CTRL WORD (7.01) bit 0 is set to 0 state An alarm EME STOP is indicated in the fault logger.
Prevention of The Prevention of Unexpected Start function disables the control voltage of Unexpected Start the power semiconductors, thus preventing the inverter from generating the
AC voltage required to rotate the motor. By using this function, short-time operations (like cleaning) and/or maintenance work on non-electrical parts of the machinery can be performed without switching off the AC power supply to the drive. The drive and machinery must be stopped using the appropriate stopping mode before using the Prevention of Unexpected Start function. The function must not be used for stopping the drive when the drive is running. WARNING! The Prevention of Unexpected Start function does not disconnect the voltage of the main and auxiliary circuits from the drive. Therefore maintenance work on electrical parts of the drive or the motor can only be carried out after isolating the drive system from the main supply.
4 - 13
The prevention of Unexpected function operates as follows: The operator activates the Prevention of Unexpected Start function by opening a switch on a control desk. The drive application program diagnostics routine receives an internal signal from the AINT/NINT board that a prevention of Unexpected Start input has been detected. Then the voltage supply of the AGPS/NGPS-0x board is disconnected. Drive is Stopped The program performs the following actions: Activates the alarm START INHIBI (start inhibition). Sets ALARM WORD_1 (9.04) bit 0 to 1. Sets AUXILIARY STATUS WORD (8.02) bit 8 to 1. Sets START INHIBI WORD (8.21). If a start command is given while the Prevention of the Unexpected Start function is active, the fault START INHIBI is activated (start inhibition). Drive is Running Drive is stopped by coasting, if the function has been activated during run. This is at first hardware-controlled; the program only provides diagnostics at this point. Activates a fault START INHIBI (start inhibition). Sets START INHIBI WORD (8.21).
Charging Logic of If the multidrive drive section includes optional DC switch with R2iR7i Inverter inverter modules, a position of the DC switch must be wired to charging logic
software via digital input. Then this signal must be programmed using function blocks with DriveAP 2 program. See next diagram.
STATUS OF DC SWITCH DI xx 8.0x.x X22:xx OUT 8.0x.x IN RUN ENA
4 - 14
DC Supply
DC switch
Three conditions must be fulfilled before the charging relay can be energised: DC voltage level or DC voltage, derivative = 0, feedback digital input = 1. When the DC switch is opened, control pulses of the inverter must be blocked by means of the digital input and DC SWITCH function block in Multi Block Programming Application software to open the charging relay. In case of undervoltage in the supply, the charging relay opens after the undervoltage trip.
To digital input STATUS OF DC SWITCH
Charging relay
4 - 15
Communication
DDCS Channels in In the following table it is described how the DDCS channels on the RMIO RMIO Controllers board are used by means of the RDCO option (DDCS Communication Option
module).
Figure 4 - 13 DDCS communication option module RDCO-01. The types of the optic components are also given (5 MBd or 10 MBd). Always use the same type at both ends of an optic fibre. Table 4 - 1 Usage and Type of DDCS Channels in RMIO Controller
CH
No
STANDARD USAGE
ACS 600/ACS800
RMIO
DDCS Communication Option Module RDCO-01 10 MBd DDCS/ DriveBus 5 MBd 10 MBd RDCO-02 5 MBd RDCO-03 5 MBd
CH0
CH1 CH2 CH3
- Applic.Controller - Fieldbus Interface - Follower - Optional I/O - Encoder 2 - Master / Follower - Encoder 2 - Fast AI - DriveWindow, DriveAp, NETA-01 (PC, 1 Mbit/s)
5 MBd 10 MBd
5 MBd 5 MBd
10 MBd
10 MBd
5 MBd
Several communication protocols are supported by Nxxx-type of fieldbus adapters connected to DDCS channel 0 (CH0) on the RMIO board. The communication protocol of channels CH0...CH3 is DDCS (Distributed Drives Communication System). The channel CH0 supports Drivebus and DDCS protocols. The Drivebus master can send one message that contains 1 data set for 10 s during a 1 ms. The DDCS link between the overriding system and the drive uses data sets for the information exchange. Each data set includes three 16-bit data words. The link sends the information of a transmitted data set to the data set table in the drive program and returns the content of the next data set to the overriding system as a return message. The data received from the overriding system affects only the RAM (not FPROM) memory on the RMIO board.
4 - 16
N-type Fieldbus (Type Nxxx) fieldbus communication adapters mainly use data sets 1 and 2 Communication between the fieldbus adapter module and the RMIO board. Some of the Adapter Modules adapters can transfer more data. For that purpose there is an offset
parameter for the first transmitted data set in parameter group 51. For example, with NPBA-12, by setting the parameter 51.06 DATA SET INDEX to FBA DSET 10, the first data set can be written to data set 10. In this case, select 98.02 COMM MODULE = ADVANT/N-FB. Set also parameter 71.01 CH0 DRIVEBUS MODE off and reconnect the auxiliary power to the RMIO board.
Figure 4 - 14 NCAN-02 fieldbus module installed on CH0 of RDCO-01C option.
R-type Fieldbus Communication Adapter Modules
Type Rxxx fieldbus modules are installed in Slot1 of RMIO board and activated by setting parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE to FIELDBUS (except with an RMBA-01 Modbus adapter).
Figure 4 - 15 RPBA-01 fieldbus module installed in Slot 1 on to the RMIO board.
4 - 17
*)
*) With RPBA-01 revision J
Figure 4 - 16 Timing diagram for sent and received messages between the fieldbus module and the RMIO board. The interval between the two messages is 2 ms. Sent (e.g. PZD3 OUT) and received message (PZD3 IN) have a 1 ms time difference.
4 - 18
Fieldbus Adapter Selections and Signals
The signal sources and targets have been fixed as shown in the table below. This mode is applied with selection FIELDBUS at parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE. 1 = NO I/O control 2 = FIELDBUS Type Rxxx and Nxxx fieldbus adapter 3 = ADVANT/N-FB for ABB controllers and type Nxxx fieldbus adapters with dataset offset function 4 = STD MODBUS Type RMBA-0x fieldbus adapter Table 4 - 2 Fixed fieldbus signals with selection FIELDBUS and Nxxx or RMBA-0x type of module.
Data Set Index
index 1 index 2 index 3
Signal MCW REF1 REF2 MSW ACT1 ACT2
Source or Target 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD 23.01 SPEED REF in DTC or 29.01 25.04 8.01 1.01 1.08 FREQ REF in Scalar control TORQUE REF B MAIN STATUS WORD MOTOR SPEED FILT MOTOR TORQUE
2 Register Addresses with Modbus Link
1 index 2
index index
With RMBA-01 Modbus module, the rest of signals and parameters are accessed by using the register read and write function in the Modbus master. See the RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter Users Manual (3AFE 64488851, English). Modbus is designed for integration with Modicon PLCs or other automation devices, and the services closely correspond to the PLC architecture. The drive looks like a Modicon PLC on the network. See parameter group 52 for configuration of the link.
Register Read and Write
The drive parameter and data set information is mapped into the 4xxxx register area. This holding register area can be read from an external device, which can modify the register values by writing to them. There are no setup parameters for mapping the data to the 4xxxx registers. The mapping is pre-defined and corresponds directly to the drive parameter grouping, which is being used by the local drive panel. All parameters are available for both reading and writing. The parameter writes are verified for correct value and for valid register addresses. Some parameters, such as actual values, never allow write access, some parameters, such as setup variables allow write access only when the drive is stopped, and some parameters, such as reference values, can be modified at any time.
4 - 19
Register Mapping
The drive parameters are mapped to the 4xxxx area so that: 4010140999 registers are reserved for the signal values 4100049999 registers are reserved for the parameter data In this mapping, the thousands and hundreds correspond to the group number, while the tens and ones correspond to the parameter number within a group.
Other Rxxx type of Fieldbus Modules
Table 4 - 3 Fixed fieldbus signals with selection FIELDBUS when type Rxxx modules are used (e.g. RPBA-0x, RDNA-0x)
Data Set Index
index 1 index 2
index index
Signal MCW REF1 MSW ACT1
Source or Target 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD 23.01 SPEED REF in DTC or 29.01 FREQ REF in Scalar control MAIN STATUS WORD MOTOR SPEED FILT 8.01 1.01
2 With type Rxxx modules, other signals in and out are accessed by assigning data words in parameter group 51. For details on the parameters, refer to the manual (chapter Programming) of the fieldbus module. Block Programming with Profibus Signals PZD3 INPZD10 IN and PZD3 OUTPZD10 OUT signals can be visualised with RPBA-01 by means of application blocks if signals are needed in the block programming application. However, if there is a need to assign process data (PZD) directly to the speed or torque control chain, it can be defined directly without function blocks by group 51 parameters.
Profibus signal PZD3 OUT PZD3 OUT 19.01 OUT xxxx xxxx yy.zz Application Block xxxx Profibus signal PZD3 IN PZD3 IN PZD3 IN IN
1 2
Figure 4 - 17 Profibus PZD3 OUT block is connected to the block programming application via parameter 19.01 DATA1. Output of the application block can be read directly for fieldbus. Using Templates in DriveAP Programming DriveAP 2.0 includes two templates; one with Profibus blocks, another without them. Select the right one before you start application programming in off-line mode. Note: Before downloading of the application to the drive with Profibus blocks, there must be an RPBA-01 module installed in Slot1 of the RMIO.
4 - 20
Figure 4 - 18 Example view of fieldbus parameters with an RPBA-XX Profibus module. Note: Parameter groups 9093 have no function with type Rxxx fieldbus modules and therefore are not visible. Addressing of Data Using Data Sets 1017 This mode is typically used when the overriding system is able to communicate by using the DDCS protocol and there is a need to transfer several control signals and actual values cyclically. The mode is selected by setting parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE to ADVANT/N-FB. Every data set has a specified read and write task interval in the drive program. See the sections Received Data Set Table and Transmitted Data Set Table. Addresses are assigned in the drive according to parameter groups 90...93, which are not sent through the link.
4 - 21
Integer Scaling on the DDCS Link
Due to the effectiveness of the communication method, the data is transferred as integer values through the link. Therefore the actual and reference values have to be scaled to 16-bit integers for the DDCS link. The integer scaling factor is mentioned in the AMC table parameter list in the column Integer scaling.
(161.3)
05
Index
CURRENT
Measured motor current absolute value. Min: 0 Max: Integer scaling: 10 == 1A
unit: A
Description: type: R
Each parameter has two different gateways to write the value: integer format or decimal. Finally, the result is exactly the same in the RMIO program. This relationship is always shown in the signal and parameter table as shown above. Received Data Set Table Data set target addresses are assigned, using the CDP 312R control panel or DriveWindow, in parameter group 90 and valid when par. 98.02 COMM MODULE is set to (=) ADVANT/N-FB.
Addresses for Data Received from the Overriding System

Data Set Number Data Set Index Interval RMIO Default Parameter Name Address (default values) Address Set Parameter
10 1)
12 1)
14
16
1)
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
2 ms 2 ms 2 ms 4 ms 4 ms 4 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms
701 2301 2501 702
MAIN CTRL WORD SPEED REF TORQ REF A AUX CTRL WORD
90.01 90.02 90.03 90.04 90.05 90.06 90.07 90.08 90.09 90.10 90.11 90.12
Boolean data type parameters are not supported. If boolean data type parameters need to be set from external control system, use data sets 1424.
4 - 22
Transmitted Data se source addresses are set by the CDP 312R control panel or Data Set DriveWindow, in parameter group 92 and valid when par. 98.02 COMM Table MODULE is set to (=) ADVANT/N-FB.
Signal Addresses for the Data Transmitted to the Overriding System

Data Set Number Data Set Index Interval RMIO Default Address Parameter Name (default values) Address Set Parameter
11 1)
13 1)
15
17
1)
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
2 ms 2 ms 2 ms 4 ms 4 ms 4 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms
801 102 209 802 101 108 901 902 906 904 905
MAIN STATUS WORD SPEED MEASURED 1 TORQUE REF 2 AUX STATUS WORD MOTOR SPEED TORQUE FAULT WORD 1 FAULT WORD 2 FAULT WORD 3 ALARM WORD 1 ALARM WORD 2
92.01 92.02 92.03 92.04 92.05 92.06 92.07 92.08 92.09 92.10 92.11 92.12
Boolean data type parameters are not supported. If boolean data type parameters need to be set to the external control system, use data sets 1525.
I/O Extension All of the drive I/O extension devices outside of the RMIO board are Devices on connected in a ring to channel 1 (CH1) on the RMIO board. The RMIO is the Channel CH1 master in the communication link. Each device has a unique address when
connected to CH1. The address is set with rotary switches on the device. Before use, each I/O device must be activated from parameter Group 98. A second encoder (Encoder 2) can also be connected to CH1 (selected by parameter 50.19 ENC2 CHANNEL).
Master/Follower A Master/Follower link can be formed by connecting the CH2 channels of two Link on Channel or more drives in a ring. CH0 can be also used in the follower drives, if CH2 available in the configuration. Parameters 70.07 to 70.14 define the mode and
the references. The message type is broadcast. In the same link it is possible to use point-to-point communication between the master and two follower drives (nodes 2 and 3). See parameter group 94.
FAST AI and Encoder 2 on Channel CH2 Commissioning and Programming Tools on Channel CH3
A second pulse encoder module (ENCODER 2) or FAST AI can be connected to CH2. Only one module at a time can be used. The DriveWindow commissioning and DriveAP 2.x programming tools can be connected to channel CH3 on the RMIO board of each drive, either in a ring, or a star connection using NDBU-xx branching units. CH3 Node numbers must be set for each drive unit before starting the communication through the connection: see parameter 70.15 CH3 NODE ADDR. This setting can be made by a point-to-point connection with either the control panel CDP 312R or DriveWindow. The new node address becomes valid after cycling the auxiliary power of the RMIO board. RMIO board channel 3 (CH3) has been configured to Follower from the communication point of view.
4 - 23
DriveWindow and DriveAP2.0 tools can be used simultaneously in the PC. See the DriveWindow 2 Users Manual, section Several Clients in chapter Advanced Information.
Ethernet Adapter NETA-01 Ethernet Adapter module instead of DriveWindow and DriveAP can Module be connected to CH3 for remote diagnostics purposes. Modbus Panel The CDP 312R Control Panel, NLMD-01 LED Monitoring Display panel or Link DriveWindow Light can be connected to the drive through an internal Modbus
link. The default communication speed is 9600 bit/s (8 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd parity). The connected device is the master of the communication link. NBCI-01 bus connection units must be used if the distance between the panel and drive is over three metres.
Application The block CW (Control Word) has mainly the same function as ABB Drives Control Word CW profile, except bit 11 controls start/stop by normal ramp and bit 3 RUN
ENABLE is used to coast the drive. By means of these features, the block CW simplifies normal ramp stop control.
ABB Drive States The ABB Drive Profile is a PROFIBUS-based model describing the drive
interface between the state transitions under control of an overriding control system. In order to achieve this, the ABB Drive Profile defines general states. A control word generally commands the transitions between these states. The table below defines the most important states and the ABB Drive Profile names for these states.
4 - 24
Table 4 - 4 ABB Drive Profile States, see Chapter 5 Signals for more Information on Status and Commands.
Action
Switch on inhibit
Name of state
ON_INHIBIT
Explanation
The drive is moved to this state after the EMERGENCY OFF/STOP or TRIPPED state. The main idea is to guarantee that the ON command is removed. Drive is moved to an OFF state after the ON command has been removed. The drive stays in this state as long as the EMERGENCY OFF/STOP commands are active. After these commands have been deactivated and the command Control from the automation unit is activated, the drive is moved to the RDYON state. After an ON command the drive is allowed to perform equipment specific actions. For drives these are: - Flux ON - Stator pulses inhibited After a RUN command the drive performs - enabling internal controllers, when all internal controllers are ready, the drive is moved to RDYREF state. The drive is following the given references. This is actually the speed ramp control, all drive controllers are activated but the output of the speed ramp is clamped to zero. This causes the drive to decelerate to zero speed and regulate zero speed. This is also the speed ramp control, the ramping can be started or stopped (HOLD). This is also the speed ramp control, the input of ramp is released. The ON command is removed. The drive deactivates all of its functions which were commanded by the ON command e.g. Drive is first decelerated to the zero speed by deceleration stop ramp. - Stator and flux current to zero. After this the drive is shifted to the OFF state. The voltage of the drive is immediately removed (coast stop), all functions created by the ON command are removed and after that the drive is shifted to ON INHIBIT state. The drive is decelerated to zero speed according to parameter 21.04 EME STOP MODE, all of the functions created by the ON command are removed and after that the drive is shifted to the ON INHIBIT state. After tripping, the drive remains in this state as long as the rising edge of the RESET signal is sent to the drive. The drive is shifted to the ON INHIBIT state, so the ON command must first be turned OFF before the sequence is allowed to continue.
Not ready for switch on
OFF
Ready to switch on
RDY_ON
Ready Enable operation RFG: enable output
RDY_RUN RDY_REF
RFG: Acceleration enabled Operating status OFF 1 active
OFF 2 active
OFF_2_STA EMERGENCY OFF OFF_3_STA EMERGENCY STOP TRIPPED
OFF 3 active
Fault
4 - 25
Main Control Word The table below defines the use of the ABB Drive Profile command (MCW) word for drives application.
Table 4 - 5 Main Control Word Bits 010, see Chapter 5 Signals for more Information on Status and Commands.
Bit Name
ON OFF1
Value
1 0
Description
Command to RDYRUN state. Command to OFF state. (Can go immediately to RDYON state if there are no other interlocking (OFF 2 / OFF 3). Drive stops down to the zero speed by ramp. Ramp time is defined by parameter 22.02 DECELER TIME. All pulses are removed, when in zero speed. Restart is not possible before zero speed. No OFF 2 (Emergency OFF) Command to ON INHIBIT state. Inhibit pulses and drive coasts down. Sequence control handles: - Stator and flux current to zero - All pulses are removed No OFF 3 (Emergency STOP) Command to ON INHIBIT state. Digital input 1 in the hardware operates parallel with this bit. Drive decelerates to zero speed using deceleration value of parameter 22.04 EME STOP RAMP. After zero speed the sequence control handles: - Stator and flux current to zero - All pulses are removed Enable Operation Command to RDYREF states. Enable stator/armature pulses. Raise flux to the nominal reference if not already in that value. Then accelerate via speed ramp to the given speed reference setpoint. Inhibit Operation. Inhibit inverter pulses and the drive coasts, and goes into the READY status (refer to control word bit 0) Operating condition. Ramp-function generator output is set to zero. Drive ramps down along the current limit or at the DC link voltage limit. Enable ramp-function generator. Speed ramping stopped. Freeze the actual setpoint from the ramp-function generator. Enable setpoint Inhibit setpoint. Speed ramp input is forced to zero.
OFF 2
1 0
OFF 3
1 0
RUN
4 5 6
RAMP-OUTZERO
1 0
RAMP-HOLD
1 0
RAMP-IN-ZERO
1 0
4 - 26
7 8
RESET
1 0
Fault resetting with a positive edge. No significance Drive accelerates as fast as possible to inching setpoint 1, if following conditions are fulfilled: - bit RAMP-OUT-ZERO = 0 - bit RAMP-HOLD = 0 - bit RAMP-IN-ZERO = 0 Drive brakes as fast as possible if INCHING_1 was previously ON Drive accelerates as fast as possible to inching setpoint 2, if following conditions are fulfilled: - bit RAMP-OUT-ZERO = 0 - bit RAMP-HOLD = 0 - bit RAMP-IN-ZERO = 0 Drive brakes as fast as possible if INCHING_1 was previously ON Overriding computer is requesting to control the drive No control from the overriding system, except OFF1, OFF2 and OFF3 commands.
INCHING_1
INCHING_2
10
REMOTE_CMD
1 0
4 - 27
Voltage switched off

Power ON
Switch on inhibit
Status Disable ON INHIBIT (MSW Bit6=1)
ABB Drives Profile for AC drives
OFF 1 (MCW Bit0=0)
AB C DE F
not ready to switch on
Status Not ready for startup OFF (MSW Bit0=0)
Control and States

from any device status Fault
disable operation (MCW Bit3=0 RUN)
Main Control word basic condition (MCW=XXXX X1XX XXXX X110)
Inhibit Operation active

operation disabled
Inhibit inverter pulses Status: Operation Disabled (MSW Bit2=0 RDY_REF)
ready to switch on
Status Ready for startup RDY_ON (MSW Bit0=1)
Fault
Stop drive Status: TRIPPED (MSW Bit3=1)
ON (MCW Bit0=1)
Error corrected confirm by RESET (MCW Bit7= 1)
Ready
from any device status OFF1 (MCW Bit0=0)
Status Ready for operation RDY_RUN (MSW Bit1=1) from any device status Emergency Off OFF2 (MCW Bit1=0)
OFF1 active
Stop by DECELER TIME (MSW Bit1=0 RDY_RUN)
Release from any device status operation RUN Emergency Stop OFF3 (MCW Bit2=0) (MCW Bit3=1) Stop drive OFF3 according to active EME_STOP_MODE OFF_3_STA (MSW Bit5=0)
OFF2 active
Coast Stop (no torque) Status: OFF_2_STA (MSW Bit4=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0 B CD RFG output disable (MCW Bit4=0 RAMP_OUT_ZERO) CD A RFG stop (MCW Bit5=0 RAMP_HOLD) D Setpoint disabled (MCW Bit6=0 RAMP_IN_ZERO) B
n(f)=0 / I=0
Enable Operation
Release electronics and pulses RDY_REF (MSW Bit2=1) Status Operation released MCW: Bit 4 = 0 and Bit 5 = 0 and Bit 6 = 0 Purpose: Main speed ref. is deactivated INCHING 1 ON (MCW Bit 8 = 1)
RFG output free RAMP_OUT_ZERO (MCW Bit4=1)
RFG: Enable output

RFG output released RAMP_HOLD (MCW Bit5=1)
Inching 1 Active Drive Running
Inching 1 setpoint to speed control
E INCHING 1 OFF (MCW Bit 8 = 0)
RFG: Accelerator enable

Setpoint released RAMP_IN_ZERO (MCW Bit6=1)
INCHING 2 ON (MCW Bit 9 = 1)
MCW = Main Control Word C MSW = Main Status Word n = Speed I = Power input current RFG = Ramp Function Generator f = Frequency D
Inching 2 Active Drive Running
Inching 2 setpoint to speed control
Operating state
n = n_set AT_SETPOINT (MSW Bit8=1)
F INCHING 2 OFF (MCW Bit 9 = 0)
CONTROL5.DRW 2.12.1999
Figure 4 - 19 Control and State Diagram, see Chapter 5 - Signals for more information on Status and Commands.
4 - 28
START by AUTO- or DC MAGN-mode, STOP by Ramp Generator Control

State DC Voltage ON FLUX 23.01 SPEED REF
Par. 50.10 ABOVE_SPEED_LIMIT Par. 20.03 ZERO_SPEED_LIMIT
1
100% 30% FLUX ACTUAL 0%
MOTOR SPEED
0 rpm
0 ON, OFF1 1 OFF2 2 OFF3 3 RUN 4 RAMP_OUT_ZERO 5 RAMP_HOLD 6 RAMP_IN_ZERO 7 RESET 8 INCHING1 9 INCHING2 10 REMOTE_CMD
Control by Overriding System
MCW 7.01 bits
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
0 RDY_ON 1 RDY_RUN 2 RDY_REF 3 TRIPPED 4 OFF_2_STA 5 OFF_3_STA 6 ON_INHIBITED 7 ALARM 8 AT_SETPOINT 9 REMOTE 10 ABOVE_LIMIT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MSW 8.01 bits
ACW 7.02 bits
RAMP_BYPASS BAL_RAMP_OUT FLUX_ON_DC FLUX_ON
0 0 0 0
ASW 8.02 bits
0 ... 3 MAGNETIZED ... 11 ZERO_SPEED
1 0
5 Time
1 0
Figure 4 - 20 Control example: Start by AUTO or DC MAGN Mode, Stop by Ramp Generator, see Chapter 5 Signals for more information on Status and Commands.
4 - 29
FAULT, RESET, INCHING 1, INCHING 2, RUN by SPEED REF

State DC Voltage ON
100%
FLUX 23.01 SPEED REF

Par. 50.10 ABOVE_SPEED_LIMIT Par. 23.02 CONST SPEED1 Par. 20.03 ZERO_SPEED_LIMIT Par. 23.03 CONST SPEED2
0%
MOTOR SPEED
0 rpm
0 ON, OFF1 1 OFF2 2 OFF3 3 RUN 4 RAMP_OUT_ZERO 5 RAMP_HOLD 6 RAMP_IN_ZERO 7 RESET 8 INCHING1 9 INCHING2 10 REMOTE_CMD
Control by Overriding System
4
2 6 5 3 9
MCW 7.01 bits
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
7
8
0 RDY_ON 1 RDY_RUN 2 RDY_REF 3 TRIPPED 4 OFF_2_STA 5 OFF_3_STA 6 ON_INHIBITED 7 ALARM 8 AT_SETPOINT 9 REMOTE 10 ABOVE_LIMIT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MSW 8.01 bits
ACW 7.02 bits
RAMP_BYPASS BAL_RAMP_OUT FLUX_ON_DC FLUX_ON
0 0 0 0
ASW 8.02 bits
0 ... 3 MAGNETIZED ... 11 ZERO_SPEED

Time
1 0 1 0
Figure 4 - 21 Control example: Fault Reset, Run by CONST SPEED 1 (Inching 1), CONST SPEED 2 (Inching 2) and SPEED REF, see Chapter 5 - Signals for more information on Status and Commands.
4 - 30
I/O Configurations
Basic and Extension I/O
The basic inputs and outputs are located on the RMIO board. The number of inputs and outputs can be extended with RDIO-01 and RAIO-01 I/O extension modules by means of an AIMA-01 I/O Module Adapter if free Slots are not available on the RMIO board. See parameters 98.0498.13. Table 4 - 6 Number of I/Os and execution interval as milliseconds in brackets.
I/O Device RMIO Basic I/O RDIO DI/O EXT1 RDIO DI/O EXT2 RDIO DI/O EXT3 RDIO DI/O EXT4 RDIO DI/O EXT5 RAIO AI/O EXT1 RAIO AI/O EXT2 RAIO AI/O EXT3 RAIO AI/O EXT4 RAIO AI/O EXT5 NAIO-03F FAST AI RTAC Pulse Encoder NTAC-02 Pulse Encoder
Digital Inputs
Digital Outputs
Analogue Inputs
Analogue Outputs
Fast Analogue Inputs
Pulse Encoders
7
(20/10ms)
3
(20 ms)
3
(20/10ms)
2
(20 ms)
3
(40ms)
2
(40ms)
3
(40ms)
2
(40ms)
3
(40ms)
2
(40ms)
3
(40ms)
2
(40ms)
3
(40ms)
2
(40ms)
2
(40ms)
2
(40ms)
2
(40ms)
2
(40ms)
2
(40ms)
2
(40ms)
2
(40ms)
2
(40ms)
2
(40ms)
2
(40ms)
2
(2ms) *) ENCODER 1 (2ms) ENCODER 1 ENCODER 2 *) (2 ms)
Totally:
22
13
13
12
2 Fast AIs
2 Encoders
*) Reserves DDCS channel CH2 Note: Also NDIO I/O Extension modules (ACS 600) can be used as DI/O EXT15. Diagnostics of extension I/O modules is collected to IO FAULT WORD (9.09). For extension module connection with AIMA-01, see AIMA-01 I/O Module Adapter Users Manual (3AFE 64661442, English).
4 - 31
Option I/O, Fieldbus and PC tool configurations RMIO

motor control and I/O board E.g: Profibus RPBA-01 Devicenet RDNA-01 Modbus RMBA-01 R-type Fieldbus module OR RAIO-01 RDIO-01 Digital Ext. OR Analog Ext. OR module module
*)
SLOT 1
RTAC-01 Pulse Enc. module (Encoder 1)

**) Alternative location instead of SLOT 1
SLOT 2
RDIO-01 RAIO-01 Digital Ext. OR Analog Ext. OR module module
*)
RTAC-01 Pulse Enc. OR module (Encoder 1)
RMBA-01 Modbus module

**)
RDCO-0x
DDCS communication option
*) Recommended to be connected to AIMA-01 if exists.
- Fieldbus - ABB Controllers - Follower in M/F link
POF (Plactic Optic Fibre)
CH0
Use with RDCO-02 (5 MBd) Nxxx type of FBA
OR
OR CI858 Use with RDCO-01 AC800M (10 MBd) Controller
OR Modulebus Use with AC800M RDCO-01 Controller (10 MBd)
Use with RDCO-01 (10 MBd)
AC80 Controller
- I/O extensions - Encoder 1
POF (Plactic Optic Fibre)
CH1
CH 1A
AIMA-01
CH 1A
AIMA-01
CH 1A
AIMA-01
NTAC-02 (Encoder 1)
Node Addr. = 16
SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT3
SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT3
SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT3
0...4 AIMA-01 I/O Module Adapter according to need of I/O. - M/F link: Master or Follower - Encoder 2 - Fast AI Option modules: RDIO, RAIO, RTAC (encoder 1) HCS (Hard Silica Fibre with RDCO-01/-02) POF (Plactic Optic Fibre with RDCO-01/-02/-03)
CH2
CH0 or CH 2 RDCO-0x CH0 or CH 2 RDCO-0x CH0 or CH 2 RDCO-0x CH0 or CH 2 RDCO-0x RMIO RMIO RMIO RMIO
ACS800 FOLLOWER 1
Node Address = 2
ACS800 FOLLOWER 2
Node Address = 3
ACS800 FOLLOWER 3
Node Address = 4 Broadcast
ACS800 FOLLOWER n
Broadcast
Node Address = n+1
OR
This option module can be used, if no other devices connected in the CH2
Point to point + Broadcast
Point to point + Broadcast
OR
This option module can be used, if no other devices connected in the CH2
NTAC-02 (Encoder 2)
Node Addr. = 17
NAIO-03F (Fast AI)

Node Addr. = 1
- PC Tools - NETA-0x Ethernet Adapter module
HCS (Hard Silica Fibre with RDCO-01/-02) POF (Plactic Optic Fibre)
NETA-01
Ethernet Adapter Module
CH3
OR
CH0 MSTR CH1 MSTR CH2 ACS800 Drives CH3 ... CH8 ACS800 Drives CH1 CH2 CH3 ... CH8 CH0
NDBU-95 or NDBU-85 Branching Unit

DDCS/PC Card Cable
To CH3 of RDCO or OR MSTR of NDBU
OR
NDPC -12
OR
PCMCIA board NDPA-02
PCMCIA board NDPA-02 PCI card adapter
ACS800
4 - 32
NDBU-95 or NDBU-85 Branching Unit
Lap top PC
Desk top PC
I/O configurations.dsf Rev: B
Figure 4 - 22 AIMA-01 I/O Module Adapter for 3 I/O option modules. With an RDIO-01 installed
Digital Inputs All inputs can be read by the block programming application and overriding
controller. The status of digital inputs can be read from the signals 8.05 DI STATUS WORD and 8.06 EXTENSION DI STATUS WORD. Each input is represented by a function block in the DriveAP 2 PC tool. HW terminal information is also given, e.g. X22:1.
DI1 8.05.1 X22:1 OUT Format: group.index.bit X12:3-4 OUT Format: group.index.bit EXT1 DI3 8.06.3
Figure 4 - 23 Digital input blocks. The Output format is group.index.bit number
Digital Outputs The digital outputs can be controlled either by an overriding controller or block
program. The RMIO and extension digital outputs can be controlled with function blocks as shown by following figure. Control of each extension DO needs a BITSET function block.
EXT1 DO2 control EXT2 DO1 control
DO1 C1 IN 66.07 X25 0
BSET ENABLE BITNR INPUT xx.xx C2 xx.xx
BSET ENABLE BITNR INPUT xx.xx
EXTDO
EXTDO
Figure 4 - 24 Controlling of extension digital outputs.
4 - 33
Analogue I/O Analogue inputs can be used for temperature measurement. I/O speed /
torque references and signals can be read by the overriding system.
AI1 13.01 13.02 CONV MODE FILTER ms X21:3-4 5.01 13.15 13.17 13.19 EXT1 AI1 X21:3-4 HW MODE CONV MODE FILTER ms 5.04
Figure 4 - 25 Analogue input blocks. The Output has a fixed scaling according to selected conversion mode. Basic I/O of RMIO board Three differential, non-galvanically isolated analogue inputs (11 bits + sign with AI1, accuracy +/- 0.5%) and two non-galvanically isolated analogue outputs AO1 and AO2 (10 bits, accuracy +/- 1%) are available on the RMIO board. The RAIO Analogue I/O Extension Module has analogue inputs AI1 and AI2. The resolution of the RAIO is 12 bits with a unipolar signal and 11 bits + sign with bipolar. The input range is selectable by DIP switches and the maximum voltage or milliampere value corresponds to an integer value in the program. HW filtering for analogue inputs is approx 2 ms. The RAIO-01 extension module also has two analogue outputs with a resolution of 12 bits.
AO1 15.01 15.02 66.11 OFFSET SCALE IN X21:9-10 15.23 15.24 66.22 EXT5 AO2 OFFSET SCALE IN
RAIO Analogue I/O Extension Module
Figure 4 - 26 View of the analogue output blocks.
PT100, PTC, KTY 84 AI1+ AI1AO1AO1+
C2 13.01 C10000 13.02
AI1 CONV MODE 200 C == 20000 FILTER ms X21:3-4 5.01
10 15.01 20000 15.02 66.11
AO1 OFFSET SCALE IN X21:9-10
Figure 4 - 27 Example of temperature measurement with 1 x PT100 according to parameter 13.01 AI1 CONV MODE. Note the 10 mA offset at AO1. Note: Set RAIO input signal type selection to 02 V range with PT100 temperature measurement and 010 V range with KTY84-1xx sensor.
4 - 34
Terminal Block X16 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Motor Temperature Measurement 1...3 PT100 or PTC

AI1+ AI1rpm
RMIO board
Negative reference voltage 10 V, max 10 mA
-VREF AI GND VREF AI GND AI1+ AI1AI2+ AI2AI3+ AI3AO1+ AO1AO2+ AO2DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6
Terminal Block X21 Analogue signals Positive reference voltage +10 V, max 10 mA Speed Reference (default) (Range for AI1: voltage 10 V0+10 V)
8
(%)
9 10 11 12
Motor Torque 020 mA == 0Motor Nominal Torque Motor Speed 020 mA == 0Motor Nominal Speed START/STOP (default) RESET (default)
AO1AO1+
Terminal Block X22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
+24 VDC +24 VDC max. 100 mA +24 VDC DGND DGND DI7 (DIIL) +24 V DC Aux. voltage output 24V 250 mA or 130 mA, GND RO1 RO1 RO1 RO2 RO2 RO2 RO3 RO3 RO3 Relay Output 3 NO FAULT (default) Relay Output 2 RUN (default) if NLMD-01 panel included Relay Output 1 READY (default) Digital ground Digital ground
Terminal Block X23

Use an external power if the total current consumption exceeds 250 mA
1 2 1 2 3 5 6 7 5 6 7
Terminal Block X25
Terminal Block X26
Terminal Block X27
Figure 4 - 28 RMIO Board Signals
4 - 35
Figure 4 - 29 RDCU-02 Drive Controller Unit, containing the RMIO board.
Pulse Encoder 1 The pulse encoder module 1 (RTAC-01) is connected to Slot1, Slot2 on the Interface RTAC RMIO board, or by means of an AIMA-01 I/O extension unit in channel CH1. It
is activated by parameter 98.01 ENCODER MODULE. The feedback used is indicated in the AUXILIARY STATUS WORD (8.02) bit 12. B12: 0 = External pulse encoder 1 = Internal speed
4 - 36
The Master / Follower Link
General The Master/Follower application is designed for applications in which the
system is operated by several drives and the shafts are coupled to each other via gearing, chain, belt etc. The Master controls the Followers via a fibre optic serial communication link. The pulse encoder is recommended to use in both with the torque controlled followers. The Master drive is typically speed controlled and the other drives follow its torque or speed reference. In general, Torque control of the Follower should be used when the motor shafts of the Master and Follower drives are coupled fixedly to each other via gearing, a chain etc. and no speed difference between the drives is possible.
Link Configuration Channel 2 (CH2) on the RMIO board is used for the Master/Follower link
between the drives. The drive is programmable to be either the master or a follower in the communication by parameter 70.08 M/F MODE. Typically, the speed controlled process master drive is configured also as the communication master. In addition to broadcast messaging, the Multi Block Programming Application also supports point-to-point communication between the master and two followers. See parameter group 94. A follower channel can be either CH2 or CH0.
4 - 37
Broadcasting messages from the Master Drive
Packed Boolean type signals, e.g. CW (Control Word), can be sent on the link. This is configured by parameter 70.09 MASTER REF1 by selecting the source signal of the CW block. By parameters 70.10 MASTER REF2 and 70.11 MASTER REF3, two other signals can be transmitted through the link. Typical parameter addresses are:
MASTER REF1 (70.09) MASTER REF2 (70.10) MASTER REF3 (70.11) Application 23.01 2.10 e.g. Control Word (CW) SPEED REF TORQ REF 3
The parameters above have also another meaning in the follower drives with multi master connection. MASTER REF 3 signal can be scaled before sending to CH2 by parameter 70.30 MASTER SGN3 SCALE. This is useful for example, if torque reference to be sent to follower is unit of Nm. Rescaling back to the correct % of motor nominal torque in the follower drive is scaled by parameter 70.31 FOLLOW SGN3 SCALE based on the power of the motor in follower. The Master Drive cyclically sends Master References 13 in one DDCS message, a broadcast every 2 milliseconds.
4 - 38
Figure 4 - 30 Control principle of torque controlled master follower configuration.
4 - 39
Figure 4 - 31 Control principle of speed controlled follower with load share function.
4 - 40
Follower Drive(s)
The Follower mode for CH2 is selected by parameter 70.08 M/F MODE. The signals can be read either directly into the speed and torque control chain or into the block programming application. When point-to-point communication is also activated, the updating interval is 4 ms.
Direct assigning of M/F broadcast message in the Follower Drive Selection Parameter 70.17 70.18 Dataset Index 2 3 Interval 2 / 4 ms 2 / 4 ms Address 23.01 25.01 Parameter Name SPEED REF TORQ REF A Signal 2.19 DS SPEED 2.20 DS TORQ REF
Star Configuration
T = Transmitter; R = Receiver; RMIO = I/O and Control Board Please note that channels CH0/CH2/CH3 are located on the optional RDCO-0x module.
A Master/Follower link is formed by connecting the DDCS CH2 channels of two or more drives in a ring or star configuration (NDBU branching unit is required with star configuration).
4 - 41
Ring Configuration
RMIO-0x MAST ER DR I V E RDCO-0x Ch3 C h2

V1 8 V 1 7
RMIO-0x
C h1
Ch0
RDCO-0x Ch3
Ch2
V18 V17
Ch1
C h0
FOL LO W ER D R IV E
FOLLOW ER DRIVE
V1 7 V 18
Ch0
Ch 1
C h2
Ch 3
RDCO-0x RMIO-0x
An alternative connection using CH0 in the Follower drives.

RMIO-0x M A S T E R DR I V E RDCO-0x Ch3 Ch2
V1 8 V 17
RMIO-0x
FOLLOWER DRIVE
RMIO-0x
FOLLOWER DRIVE
Ch1
Ch0
RDCO-0x C h3
C h2
C h1
C h0
V1 8 V1 7
RDCO-0x C h3
C h2
C h1
C h0
V1 8 V1 7
Figure 4 - 32 Master/Follower Fibre Optic Cable Connections On-the-fly switching between Speed and Torque Control In some applications, both speed and torque control of the followers are required. This is the case e.g. when it is necessary to accelerate all drives along the same speed ramp up to a certain speed before torque control can be started. On-the-fly switching between speed and torque control is controlled for the parameter 26.01 TORQ REF SEL by means of WR-I function block in the application. WR-I and WR-PB are general-purpose write blocks for changing parameter values. If window control is requested, also control ACW_1 (7.02) bit 7.
Torque selector control MINIMUM SPEED xx.xx xx.xx C4 xx.xx C2 SW-IL ACT NO NC xx.xx C26 xx.xx C1 xx.xx WR-I GROUP INDEX INPUT
Figure 4 - 33 Example of torque selector switching control between the SPEED and MINIMUM selections.
4 - 42
Follower All Followers receive the torque reference through the DS TORQUE REF A Diagnostics signal. The follower drive is able to detect a communication break, the action upon which is defined by parameter 70.13 M/F TIMEOUT and 70.14 M/F COM LOSS CTRL. Master/Follower Link Specification Size of the Link: One Master and maximum of 10 Follower drives. If more than 10 Followers are required, an ABB representative should be consulted. There is also a glass fibre alternative for longer distances between the master and follower (pair of NOCR-01 units). With RDCO-01 or RDCO-02: - POF (Plastic Optic Fibre): Maximum cable length is 30 m. - HCS (Hard-Clad Silica Fibre): Maximum cable length is 200 m. For distances up to 1000 m: Use two of Optical Converter/Repeater boards (NOCR-01) with glass optic cable (GOF, 6.25 um, Multi-Mode). With RDCO-03: - POF (Plastic Optic Fibre): Maximum cable length is 10 m. - HCS (Hard-Clad Silica Fibre): Not supported. Transmission Rate: 4 Mbit/s Total Performance of Link: < 5 ms to transfer references as broadcast between the Master and Follower drives without point-to-point communication. Protocol: DDCS (Distributed Drives Communication System). Point to point Communication between the Master and two Follower drives This application also supports point-to-point communication between the Master and two Followers at 100 ms time intervals. Three 16 bits data words can be sent to Followers and three data words can be received from the Followers.
4 - 43

Master Drive
66.25 Signal to be sent to Follower 1 drive e.g. data = 12345 66.26 66.27 TRANSMIT 3 OUT
TRA M/F 1 TRANSMIT 1 TRANSMIT 2
REC3 M/F 1
Follower Drive 1
Integer signal from the Master drive (Data word 3). 94.04 Data = 12345 1 94.01 3 70.08 2 70.07 REC1 M/F 1 ENABLE FOLL 1 CH2 M/F MODE OUT CH2 NODE ADDR 94.02
1 94.01 2 70.08 1 70.07
REC1 M/F 1 ENABLE FOLL 1 CH2 M/F MODE OUT CH2 NODE ADDR Integer signal from the Follower drive. 94.02 Data = 3210
Signal to be sent to Master drive e.g. data = 3210
66.25 66.26 66.27
TRA M/F 1 TRANSMIT 1 TRANSMIT 2 TRANSMIT 3
Figure 4 - 34 Example of point-to-point communication between the master and follower drive 1. Speed controlled Follower with load share Speed controlled follower(s) can be used in several applications where load sharing is also needed between the master and follower(s). This is implemented in practice by using additional term for speed reference based on the torque reference of master drive. Master and follower drive should be similar with same speed control tuning values. Drooping function must not be used at all by parameter 24.02 DROOP RATE. A load share is adjusted with same parameter as with TORQUE REF A by parameter 25.03 LOAD SHARE. A load share function is activated by ACW 7.02 bit 13. A gain for load share function is set by parameter 23.18 FOLL SPD CTRL COR. A value of load share correction is added to the speed reference between the SPEED REF3 and SPEED REF 4 and can be monitored from the signal 2.29 FOLL SPD CORR OUT. See figures in section Control Block Diagrams.
Diagnostics
General
A common method of drive diagnostics is to provide the user with information on previous conditions. Signals, data loggers and fault loggers are commonly implemented in most modern drives. The following is a description of the data and fault loggers available in the Multi Block Programming Application program.
Alarm and Fault Logger
The fault logger collects 64 of the most recent faults into the fault buffer in the RAM memory. The latest 16 faults are stored into the FLASH memory at the beginning of an auxiliary power loss, when an internal +24 V power supply is used. With an external +24 V power supply, RAPI-01C Auxiliary Power interface unit must be used for successful power fail function. It concerns also parameters 19.1119.14. The fault logger records all available information from the drive including faults, alarms, reset and system messages. See the chapter Fault Tracing to see diagnostics messages.
4 - 44
AMC Time Format and Counting
The Time for the logger fault is taken from the power-on counter, whose format is 9999 hr, xx min, yy.yyyy s. However, the counter can be updated cyclically from the overriding system if the system includes an overriding controller with clock master (for example AC800M and AC80). Then DriveWindow and the CDP 312R Control Panel will show the real date and time.
Data Loggers The purpose of the Data Logger is to collect the history of signals related to 1 and 2 an incident and store them for later retrieval and analysis. The contents of the
Data Loggers are stored to the RAM memory. There are two Data Loggers on the RMIO board. Both of the Data Loggers consist of 1...4 channels and the total memory size is 1024 bytes. The maximum number of samples depends on the data type: Integer type signal or parameters reserve 1 byte Real-type values reserve 2 bytes
Example: Four real-type signals are measured by Data Logger 1. The maximum number of sample is 1024/(2 bytes x 4 channels) = 128. The Data Loggers store the selected signals to the RAM memory every 1 milliseconds. By default, the following signals and parameters are monitored by Data Logger 1: 1.01 1.07 23.01 25.01 MOTOR SPEED FILT MOTOR TORQUE FILT SPEED REF TORQUE REF A
By default, the following signals are monitored by Data Logger 2: 1.02 1.10 1.12 2.15 SPEED ESTIMATED DC VOLTAGE PP TEMP FLUX ACT
The signals to be monitored can be selected from DriveWindow. The default trigger mode is Fault.
4 - 45
Positioning Counter with Pulse Encoder 1
The number of pulses from Encoder 1 can be counted and set by using 7.02 ACW bits B9...11.
&
7.02 B9
SYNC COMMAND
7.02 B10
S R
S R
8.02 B5
SYNC DISABLE
8.01 B3
SYNC RDY
TRIPPED
7.02 B11
>1
RESET SYNC RDY

50.08 3.07
POS COUNT INIT LO

50.09
POS COUNT LO
3.08
POS COUNT INIT HI PULSES FROM ENCODER 1
POS COUNT HI
Figure 4 - 35 Positioning counting logic.
Positioning The basic function can be seen in the following diagram. Synchronisation is Counting Function enabled when SYNC_DISABLE = 0, no fault and RESET SYNC RDY = 0.
When the next rising edge of the SYNC_COMMAND is encountered, the initial values of POS COUNT INIT LOW and POS COUNT INIT HIGH are loaded into the counter and the counting continues. The Status signal SYNC_RDY is set to indicate controlled SYNC_COMMAND. When the positioning has been completed by the application or overriding system (i.e. the motor can be stopped or another sequence started), the signal SYNC_RDY is reset by RESET_SYNC_RDY. Before the next synchronisation, both SR flip-flops must be reset. See the logic diagram above.
Synchronising command DI6 8.05.6 SW-IL ACT C512 C3072 NO NC OUT C7 C2 WR-PB GROUP INDEX IN OUT
OUT
X22:6
C512 (integer) : bit 9 = TRUE for SYNC command C3072 (integer): bits 10 and 11 are TRUE for RESET_SYNC_RDY and SYNC_DISABLE
Figure 4 - 36 Simple initialisation example of positioning counter.
4 - 46
SYNC_COMMAND 7.02 B9 SYNC_DISABLE 7.02 B10
SYNC_RDY 8.02 B5 RESET_SYNC_RDY 7.02 B11
ENCODER PULSES POS_COUNT_LOW 3.07 POS_COUNT_HIGH 3.08
POS_COUNT_INIT_LO 50.08 POS_COUNT_INIT_HI 50.09
Back-Up of Parameters or Software
Figure 4 - 37 Example of the Positioning counting function At the end of the commissioning of the drive, backing up the (RMIO board) parameters is recommended. The results of the Motor ID Run should also be backed up. If necessary, the data can be restored later on (e.g. downloaded to a spare board of the same type). The back-up can be done by the DriveWindow PC Tool. One spare RDCU-02C unit (includes RMIO board) covers the whole ACS600 or ACS800 drive power range, loaded with the same firmware as in the drives. See signal 4.01 in the drive for firmware version. The inverter ratings can be NONE (no ratings entered) or any inverter type for a spare part RMIO board.
Spare RMIO Boards
DriveWindow Back-Up Function
Introduce to DriveWindow 2 Users Manual. Back-up file (*.BPG) is normally downloaded in case of RMIO board replacement. Note: Cannot be performed in Local mode. Remember to save it after back upping. Note: When the backup is restored to e.g. spare part board, restore it twice, if there is a problem (e.g. with ID run results). A version update means here restoring of parameters from the old drive firmware version to newer one without a need of new ID-RUN. All the blocks and their connections are also restored. For parameter file saving, select from DW2.1x File menu ! Parameters ! Save as (parameter file *.dwp). Next step is to save block application file (*.ap) to PC in DriveAP; File menu -> Save As. DriveWindow 2.x file. Select File menu ! Parameters ! Open ! Select (*.dwp) file ! Open. Select drive from upper left window and select from File menu ! Parameters ! Download ! Version conflicts ! Yes ! Restore User data and ID run results ! Yes ! Yes.
Version Update Back-Up Function
Restoring of Parameters in Version Update
4 - 47
Download DriveAP application to RMIO board from File menu ! Open block application file (*.ap). Perform Download from Drive menu. Start the used time levels by DriveAP.
Reduced Run Function
Reduced run function is available for parallel connected R8 inverters, 212 R8i. Reduced run function makes it possible to continue the operation with limited current if an inverter module(s) is out of order. If one of the modules is broken, it must be removed from the cabinet. Parameter change is needed to continue the run with reduced current. The safety instructions must be followed. See the safety instructions on the first pages of the appropriate hardware manual or the safety manual. Disconnect the supply voltage and all auxiliary voltages from the drive. Remove the broken inverter module from the cabinet. See appropriate hardware manual.
Removing a broken Inverter Module
Fasten the air baffle provided with the unit to the top module guide to block airflow through the empty module space. Disable the charging monitoring of the isolated module, i.e. set switch S1S3 of the ASFC-01 board to DIS (=disabled). Switch on the supply voltage. INT CONFIG fault (09.06 Fault Word 3 bit 7 value is 1) now indicates that the number of the connected inverter modules has changed. If the operation is continued with limited current, number of existing inverter modules must be set by parameter 16.10 INT CONFIG USER. Reset the fault and start the drive. PPCS link is reconfigured automatically and the maximum current is limited (20.04 MAXIMUM CURRENT) in relation to the new inverter configuration and inverter nominal current.
Note: If INT CONFIG fault reappears, the number of parallel connected inverters defined by parameter 16.10 INT CONFIG USER is incorrect. See signal 08.22 INT CONFIG WORD.
4 - 48
Note: When the isolated module is reconnected, set switch S1/S2/S3 of the ASFC-01 board back to the enabled position. Note: If all switches S1, S2 and S3 of the ASFC-01 board are set to DIS (=disabled), the main contactors of the DC switches will not close. When inverter hardware configuration is changed back to the original, parameter 16.10 INT CONFIG USER value automatically restores back to the original value. Settings
Parameter Additional information
16.10 INT CONFIG USER 20.04 MAXIMUM CURRENT
Number of parallel connected inverter modules (R8i) in the drive. Maximum motor current
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
08.22 INT CONFIG WORD 09.06 FAULT WORD 3
Inverters recognized by the application program. Number of recognized inverters.
4 - 49
4 - 50
Chapter 5 Signals
Overview
This chapter describes the measured and calculated actual signals, and the content of the control, status, limit, fault, and alarm words of the drive. Before you start to read the signal table, we first recommend you read this description.
How to Read the Signal Table
Signals
Group + Index 1.11.14, 1.18, 1.261.28, 1.311.32 2.12.3, 2.82.16, 2.182.29 3.7...3.8, 3.16, 3.313.32 4.14.2, 4.4 5.1...5.13 Description Actual Signals Actual Signals Actual Signals Quantity 21 24 5 3 13 12 3 11 23 Total
Index unit: A
Information (reserved for the application) 6.1...6.12 (reserved for the application) 7.1...7.2, 7.5 Control Words 8.1...8.7, 8.208.23 Status Words, Limit Words 9.1...9.2, 9.49.6, Fault Words, Alarm 9.89.9, 9.139.19, Words 9.309.39
115
05
(161.3) Description: type: R
CURRENT
Measured motor current absolute value. Integer Scaling Max: Min: 0
10 == 1A
Figure 5 - 1 Sample of an Actual Signal table All signals are read-only. However the overriding system can write to the control words, but it only affects the RAM memory. If the overriding control system reads or writes individual bits of a word with an Advant CONV_IB element, (for example AUX CONTROL WORD 7.02) the bit B15 corresponds to the SIGN outputs of the element. If signal type is R (real value), it also has an integer scaling relation mentioned in the column Integer scaling. For example, if the CURRENT signal is read to the overriding system, an integer value of 10 corresponds to 1 Ampere. All the read and sent values are limited to 16 bits (-32768...32767).
5-1
Chapter 5 Signals
The unit of the signal value can be seen on the lower left-hand corner of the signal description. Minimum and maximum values are shown in decimal format. Data type is given with a short code: I = 16-bit signed integer B = Boolean value PB = Packed Boolean value R = Real value
5-2
ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Multi Block Programming Application 7.x
Chapter 5 Signals
AMC Table Signals

Group 1 Actual Signal
1
01
Index
Group name: Description: Description: type: R
ACTUAL SIGNALS
Measured or calculated values
MOTOR SPEED FILT

Filtered actual speed according to the speed feedback selection. Filter time constant is adjustable by parameter. 50.12 MOTOR SP FILT TIME. Default filter time constant is 500 ms + parameter 50.06 SP ACT FILT TIME with pulse encoder. See also parameter 50.03. Min: Max: Integer scaling: See parameter 50.01
unit: rpm
02
Description: unit: rpm type: R
Index
SPEED ESTIMATED
Internally calculated actual speed. Min: Max: Integer scaling: See parameter 50.01
03
Index
SPEED MEASURED 1
Description: type: R Measured actual speed from the pulse encoder 1. This actual value can be used for speed control. Min: Max: Integer scaling: See parameter 50.01
unit: rpm
04
Index
MOTOR SPEED
Actual speed to the speed error calculation of the speed controller. Min: Max: Integer scaling: See parameter 50.01
05
Description: unit: Hz type: R
Index
FREQUENCY
Calculated frequency of the motor. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 100 == 1Hz
06
Index
MOTOR CURRENT
Description: type: R Description: type: R Measured motor current (absolute value). Min: Max: Integer scaling: 10 == 1A
unit: A
07
Index
MOTOR TORQ FILT2

Filtered motor torque in percent of the rated motor torque. See also parameter 25.07. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
unit: %
08
Description: unit: % type: R
Index
MOTOR TORQUE
Motor torque in percent of the rated motor torque. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
09
Index
POWER
Motor power in percent of the rated motor power. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 10 == 1%
10
Index
DC VOLTAGE
Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: type: R Measured dc bus voltage as percents of nominal DC voltage (1.35 x Umax(AC)). See section DC Overvoltage in Chapter 8 Fault Tracing. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 10 == 1%
unit: %
11
Index
MOTOR VOLTAGE
Calculated motor output voltage. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 1 == 1 V
unit: V
12
Index
ACS800 TEMP
Temperature indication of the IGBT heat sink plate. This is indicated in degrees centigrade with ACS600 and percents with ACS800. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 1 == 1, 1 == 1%
unit: C / %
13
Index
TIME OF USAGE
Description: type: R This actual signal is an elapsed mains-on time indicator. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 1 == 1 h
unit: h
ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Block Programming Application 7.x
5-3
Chapter 5 Signals
1
14 18
Index
Group name:
ACTUAL SIGNALS
KILOWATT HOURS
KWh counter. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 1 == 1 kWh
Index Description: unit: kWh type: R
MOTOR TEMP EST

Description: Calculated motor temperature when thermal model (DTC or USER MODE) is used for motor overtemperature protection. See parameter 30.01 MOT THERM P MODE. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 1 == 1 kWh
unit: C
type: R Interval: 100 ms LED PANEL OUTPUT 26 Index Description: Output monitoring of the NLMD-01 LED panel. See parameter group 18. unit: % type: R Min: Max: Integer scaling: 1 == 1
27
Index
CABLE TEMPERATURE
Output monitoring of the motor cable thermal model. An alarm limit is 100%, trip limit 103%. Min: 0% Max: 110% Integer scaling: 1 == 1
28
Index
SPEED MEASURED 2
Measured actual speed from the pulse encoder 2 (NTAC-02). Min: Max: Integer scaling: See parameter 50.01
29
Index
MOTOR RUN-TIME
Description: type: R Description: type: R Motor run rime counter. The counter runs when the inverter modulates. Counter can be reset by parameter 16.09 RESET RUN-TIME. Min: 0 h Max: 139810 h Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit: h
31
Index
FAN ON-TIME
Running time of the drive cooling fan. Note: The counter can be reset by means of application blocks or DriveAP 2. Resetting is recommended when the fan is replaced. Min: 0 h Max: 139810 h Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit: h
32
Description: unit: rpm/s type: R
Index
MOTOR ACCELERATIO
Motor speed change in rpm/s. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 1rpm/s == 1
Group 2 Actual Signals
2
01
Index
Group name: Description:
ACTUAL SIGNALS
Measured or calculated values in the speed and torque reference chain.
SPEED REF2
Limited speed reference. Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000rpm Integer scaling: See parameter 50.01
02
Index
SPEED REF3
Description: type: R Description: type: R Speed reference after the speed ramp. Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000rpm Integer scaling: See parameter 50.01
unit: rpm
03
Index
SPEED ERROR NEG

Difference between reference and the actual value. If parameter WINDOW_SEL_ON is enabled, SPEED_ERROR_NEG is filtered through the window function. Min: Max: Integer scaling: See parameter 50.01
unit: %
08
Index
TORQUE REF 1
Limited torque reference value in the torque reference chain. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
5-4
Chapter 5 Signals
2
09
Index
Group name: Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: type: R
ACTUAL SIGNALS
TORQUE REF 2
Final torque reference from the speed control chain. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
unit: %
10
Index
TORQUE REF 3
Torque reference after the torque selector block. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
unit: %
11
Index
TORQUE REF 4
Sum of TORQUE REF 3 and LOAD COMPENSATION. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
unit: %
12
Index
TORQUE REF 5
Sum of TORQUE REF 4 and TORQUE STEP. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
unit: %
13
Index
TORQ USED REF

Limited torque reference. This is the final torque input for the internal torque controller. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
14
Index
FLUX USED REF

Flux reference used. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 10 == 1%
15
Index
FLUX ACT
Description: type: R Flux actual value. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 10 == 1%
unit: %
16
Index Description: unit: rpm/s type: R
dV/dt
Speed reference change in rpm/s at the output of the speed ramp generator. Min: Max: Integer scaling: See parameter 50.01
18
Index
SPEED REF4
Speed reference before speed error calculation. Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000rpm Integer scaling: See parameter 50.01
19
Index
DS SPEED REF
Description: type: R For example speed reference from the Master Follower link to be used in the Follower drive. Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000rpm Integer scaling: See parameter 50.01
unit: rpm
20
Index
DS TORQ REF A
For example torque reference from the Master Follower link to be used in the Follower drive. Min: -300% Max: 300% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
21
Index
FIELDWK POINT ACT

Actual field weakening point. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 100 == 1Hz
22
Index
TORQ FREQ LIM REF

Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: Torque reference after frequency limiter block. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
unit: %
23
Index
TORQ DC LIM REF

Torque reference after DC-voltage limiter block. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
unit: %
24
Index
TORQ POW LIM REF

Torque reference after power limiter block Min: -600.00 Max: 600.00 Integer scaling: 10 == 1%
unit: %
25
Index
DS MCV
Packed boolean word from the Master Follower link to be used in block application of the Follower drive. type: PB Min: 0 Max: 65535 Integer scaling:
unit:
5-5
Chapter 5 Signals
2
26
Index
Group name:
ACTUAL SIGNALS
MAIN CONTROL WORD USED SPEED REF
Speed reference before the summing of ADDITIVE SP REF in the speed reference chain. Min: -18000 Max: 18000 Integer scaling: See parameter 50.01
unit:
Description: The status of final main control word into the state machine. type: Pb Min: 0 Max: 65535 Integer scaling:
27
Index
28
Index
USED TORQ REF A

Torque reference A before filter (TORQ REF A FTC) in the torque reference chain. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
29
Index
FOLL SPD CORR OUT

Output of speed follower load share function. Min: -18000 Max: 18000 Integer scaling: See parameter 50.01
Group 3 Actual Signals
3
07
Index
Group name: Description: Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description:
ACTUAL SIGNALS
Data values.
POS COUNT LOW

Position counter value in pulses (low word). Min: 0 Max: 65536 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
08
Index
POS COUNT HIGH

Position counter value in pulses (high word). Min: 0 Max: 65536 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
16
Index
CTRL BOARD TEMP

Control board (RMIO) temperature. Min: Max: Integer scaling: 1 == 1 C
unit: C
31
unit: type: Description: unit: type:
LCU ACT SIGNAL 1

Signal from active supply unit. Signal is selected with parameter 95.03 LCU PAR1 SEL. See parameter group 95. Min: Max: Integer scaling: See IGBT Supply Control Manual
32
LCU ACT SIGNAL 2

Signal from active supply unit. Signal is selected with parameter 95.04 LCU PAR2 SEL. See parameter group 95. Min: Max: Integer scaling: See IGBT Supply Control Manual
5-6
Chapter 5 Signals
Group 4 Information
4
01
Index
Group name: Description: Description:
INFORMATION
This signal group consists of information about the downloaded software on the RMIO board.
SOFTWARE VERSION
This signal gives information on the downloaded loading package information. This information must be mentioned when spare part board is ordered.
Product A = Inverter software based on ACS 600/ACS800 platform D = DC Drives software based on ACS 600/ACS800 platform I = Input bridge software based on ACS 600/ACS800 platform L = Large Drives software based on ACS 600/ACS800 platform M = ACS 1000 software Software Product B = Multi Block Programming Application C = ACC 600/800 Crane appl. F = ACF 600 H = ACS 600/ACS800 PFC Macro J = ACS 600 Cascade Application M = ACS 600/ACS800 System Application N = ACS 600/ACS800 PMSM System Appl. O = ACS 600/ACS800 OEM device P = ACP 600 Motion Control Application S = ACS 600/ACS800 Standard Application T = ACS 600/ACS800 FCB Appl. Template U = ACS 600 Water Cooling Unit Application Inverter Hardware type A = Custom Application Software X = Multiple hardware (SD & MD)
ABXR7200
NAMC-board type A = software for NAMC-03 or NAMC-04 Control Board M = software for NAMC-03 or NAMC-04 Control Board B = software for NAMC-2x Control Board C = software for AMC 3 Control Board D = reserved for N2AC AMC Board E = software for NAMC-11 Control Board G = software for NAMC-51 Control Board R = RMIO Control Board for ACS 600 and ACS800 hardware
Software Version Number

Examples: AMXR7xxx = System Application SW for ACS 600 and ACS 800 ASXR7xxx = Standard Application SW for ACS 600 and ACS 800 IXXR7xxx = IGBT Supply Unit Application for ACS 600
swtypede_71.dsf
unit:
type: C
Min:
Max:
5-7
Chapter 5 Signals
4
02
Index
INFORMATION
APPLICATION OVERL
unit:
Possible overload of each application task can be detected by means of this signal in the Packed Boolean format. The status is cleared with RESET command. To eliminate detected possible overload, move functions from the fastest task to slower one. Bit Application Task 1 overload B0 Application Task 2 overload B1 Application Task 3 overload B2 Application Task 4 overload B3 Application Task 5 overload B4 Application Task 6 overload B5 type: PB Min: 0 Max: Integer scaling: 1 == 1
04
Description: unit: type: C
APBU EPLD VERSION

This signal indicates APBU logic software version with parallel connected ACS800 inverters. This signal is read only when PPCC link has been successfully established. Min: Max: Integer scaling:
5-8
Chapter 5 Signals
Group 5 Analogue Inputs
5
01
Index
ANALOGUE INPUTS
BASIC AI1
Basic board analogue input AI1. Min: -20000 Max: 20000 Integer scaling:
unit:
Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I
02
Index
BASIC AI2
unit:
03
Index
BASIC AI3
unit:
04
Index
EXT1 AI1
Extension board 1 analogue input AI1. Min: -20000 Max: 20000 Integer scaling:
unit:
05
Index
EXT1 AI2
unit:
06
Index
EXT2 AI1
unit:
07
Index
EXT2 AI2
unit:
08
Index
EXT3 AI1
unit:
09
Index
EXT3 AI2
unit:
10
Index
EXT4 AI1
unit:
11
Index
EXT4 AI2
unit:
12
Index
EXT5 AI1
unit:
13
Index
EXT5 AI2
unit:
5-9
Chapter 5 Signals
Group 6 Analogue Outputs
6
01
Index
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
BASIC AO1
Basic board analogue input AO1. Min: 0 Max: 22 Integer scaling: 1==1483
Description: unit: mA type: R
02
Index
BASIC AO2
Description: type: R Description: type: R Basic board analogue input AO2. Min: 0 Max: 22 Integer scaling: 1==1483
unit: mA
03
Index
EXT1 AO1
Extension board 1 analogue input AO1. Min: 0 Max: 22 Integer scaling: 1==1483
unit: mA
04
Index
EXT1 AO2
05
Index
EXT2 AO1
06
Index
EXT2 AO2
Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: type: R Extension board 2 analogue input AO2. Min: 0 Max: 22 Integer scaling: 1==1483
unit: mA
07
Index
EXT3 AO1
unit: mA
08
Index
EXT3 AO2
unit: mA
09
Index
EXT4 AO1
unit: mA
10
Index
EXT4 AO2
11
Index
EXT5 AO1
12
Index
EXT5 AO2
Description: type: R Extension board 5 analogue input AO2. Min: 0 Max: 22 Integer scaling: 1==1483
unit: mA
5 - 10
Chapter 5 Signals
Group 7 Control Words
7
01
Index
Group name: Description: Interval: 20 ms
CONTROL WORDS
ABB Drive Profile Control Word for fieldbus control.
MAIN CTRL WORD (MCW)

Bit Name ON
unit:
02
Index
Value Meaning 1 Command to RDYRUN state B0 0 Command to OFF state OFF 2 1 No OFF2 (Emergency OFF or Coast Stop) B1 0 Command to ON INHIBIT state OFF 3 1 No OFF 3 (Emergency STOP) B2 0 Command to ON INHIBIT state RUN 1 Command to RDYREF states B3 0 Stop by coasting RAMP_OUT_ZERO 1 No other activities B4 0 Speed ramp output is forced to zero RAMP_HOLD 1 No other activities B5 0 Speed ramping stopped RAMP_IN_ZERO 1 No other activities B6 0 Speed ramp input is forced to zero RESET 1 Fault resetting with a positive edge B7 0 INCHING1 1 Constant speed 1 defined by a parameter B8 0 INCHING2 1 Constant speed 2 defined by a parameter B9 0 1 Overriding computer is req. to control the drive B10 REMOTE_CMD 0 Only OFF commands are valid reserved 1 (reserved) B11 0 1 (reserved) B12 reserved 0 1 (reserved) B13 reserved 0 1 (reserved) B14 reserved 0 1 (reserved) B15 reserved 0 type: PB Min: 0 Max: 65535 Integer scaling: Interval: 20 ms
AUX CONTROL WORD 1 (ACW_1)

RESTART_DLOG TRIGG_LOGGER RAMP_BYPASS BAL_RAMP_OUT FLUX ON DC FLUX ON HOLD_NCONT WINDOW_CTRL BAL_NCONT SYNC_COMMAND SYNC_DISABLE RESET_SYNC_RDY RAMPED INCH REF FOLL SPD CORR ENA 0
Description:
unit:
type: PB
Bit B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Min:
Drive-specific auxiliary control word Restart data logger (rising edge). Data logger triggering (rising edge) Bypass Speed ramp. Force ramp output. Flux on DC. (Flux off: set this bit and MCW bit 3 to 0). Flux on (zero torque). Hold the integral part in the speed controller. FALSE = ADD CONTROL, TRUE = Window Control. Force speed controller output. Position counting: synchronise command. Position counting: disable synchronise command. Position counting: reset synchronous ready command. Activates 23.17 RAMPED INCH REF to speed ref chain. Enables speed follower load share function. Integer scaling:
Max: 65535
5 - 11
Chapter 5 Signals
7
05
Group name: Interval: 20 ms Description:
CONTROL WORDS
MAIN CONTROL W MASK
Mask word for control word 7.01. If a mask is used, set FFFF (65535 int) for the mask. If e.g. bit 0 is masked, set FFFE (65534 int) for the mask. Several bits can be masked at the same time. A mask function is needed if there is a need to share the control of bits between the fieldbus and block programming application. See Figure 4-6 in section Control Block Diagrams. Bit 0 = mask, 1 = no mask B0 0 = mask, 1 = no mask B1 0 = mask, 1 = no mask B2 0 = mask, 1 = no mask B3 0 = mask, 1 = no mask B4 0 = mask, 1 = no mask B5 0 = mask, 1 = no mask B6 0 = mask, 1 = no mask B7 0 = mask, 1 = no mask B8 0 = mask, 1 = no mask B9 B10 0 = mask, 1 = no mask B11 0 = mask, 1 = no mask B12 0 = mask, 1 = no mask B13 0 = mask, 1 = no mask B14 0 = mask, 1 = no mask B15 0 = mask, 1 = no mask Min: 0 Max: 65535 Integer scaling:
Index:
Description:
unit:
type: PB
5 - 12
Chapter 5 Signals
Group 8 Status Words
8
01
Index
Group name: Description: Interval: 20 ms
STATUS WORDS
Status signals of the drive according to the ABB Drive Profile.
MAIN STATUS WORD (MSW)

Bit
INPUT
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15

unit: type: PB Min:
Name RDYON RDYRUN RDYREF TRIPPED OFF_2_STA OFF_3_STA SWC ON INHIB ALARM AT_SETPOINT REMOTE ABOVE_LIMIT ...
Value Meaning 1 Ready to switch on 0 Not ready to switch on 1 Ready 0 Not ready 1 Operation enabled (RUNNING) 0 Operation inhibited 1 Fault 0 1 No OFF 2 0 OFF 2 1 No OFF 3 0 OFF3 1 Switch on inhibit 0 1 Alarm 0 1 Setpoint/act. value monitoring in the tolerance 0 1 Remote control 0 Local control 1 frequency or speed > par. 50.10 Speed Above Limit 0 (reserved) Motor par. typed and no prev. of unexpected start-up (reserved) (reserved) (reserved)
INTERNAL_INTERLOCK 1 0
Max: 65535
Integer scaling:
5 - 13
Chapter 5 Signals
8
02
Index
Group name: Interval: 20 ms Description: Description:
STATUS WORDS
AP STATUS WORD (APSW)
Bolded status bits are especially recommended to use with block programming application. Drive specific auxiliary status word Bit B0 A drive is ready for immediate start. B1 READY FOR START A drive is running. B2 RUNNING A flux has been formed in the motor. B3 MAGNETIZED IGBTs are switching voltage to the motor. B4 MODULATING Position counter synchronous ready status. B5 SYNC_RDY Not started after the setting of Group 99. B6 1_START_NOT_DONE Motor Identification run has been completed. B7 IDENTIF_RUN_DONE Prevention of unexpected start-up is active. B8 START_INHIBITION Control at a limit. (See signals 8.038.04). B9 LIMITING A drive is torque controlled. B10 TORQUE CONTROL Motor actual speed is below the zero speed limit. B11 ZERO_SPEED Internal speed feedback selected for speed control. B12 INTERNAL_SPEED_FB An alarm is active. B13 ALARMING A drive is tripped. B14 FAULTED B15 Min: Bit B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Min: 0 Max: 65535 Integer scaling:
unit:
03
Index
type: PB Interval: 2 ms Description:
LIMIT WORD 1
TORQ_MOTOR_LIM SPC_TORQ_MIN_LIM SPC_TORQ_MAX_LIM TORQ_USER_CUR_LIM TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM TORQ_MIN_LIM TORQ_MAX_LIM TREF_TORQ_MIN_LIM TREF_TORQ_MAX_LIM FLUX_MIN_LIMIT FREQ_MIN_LIMIT FREQ_MAX_LIMIT DC_UNDERVOLT_LIM DC_OVERVOLT_LIM TORQUE_LIMIT FREQ_LIMIT 0 Max: 65535
unit:
type: I
Interval: 20 ms
Integer scaling:
04
Index
LIMIT WORD 2
POWER MOTORING LIMIT is active. POWER GENERATING LIMIT is active. (reserved) Integer scaling:
Description:
unit:
Bit P MOT LIM B0 P GEN LIM B1 B215 type: PB Min: 0 Max: 65535
5 - 14
Chapter 5 Signals
8
05
Index
STATUS WORDS
DI STATUS WORD
Digital input status word DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 (DIIL) RMIO board digital input DI1 status RMIO board digital input DI2 status RMIO board digital input DI3 status RMIO board digital input DI4 status RMIO board digital input DI5 status RMIO board digital input DI6 status RMIO board digital input DI7 status
unit:
06
Index
Bit B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 type: PB Min: Interval: 20 ms Description: Bit B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 type: PB Min:
If RDIO Extension Modules are installed, see also parameters 98.0498.08 and Chapter 4 - I/O Configuration, Digital Inputs.
Max: 65535
Integer scaling:
EXT DI STATUS WORD

Extension digital input status word EXT1_DI1 EXT1_DI2 EXT1_DI3 EXT2_DI1 EXT2_DI2 EXT2_DI3 EXT3_DI1 EXT3_DI2 EXT3_DI3 EXT4_DI1 EXT4_DI2 EXT4_DI3 EXT5_DI1 EXT5_DI2 EXT5_DI3 0 RDIO Extension Module 1 DI1 status RDIO Extension Module 1 DI2 status RDIO Extension Module 1 DI3 status RDIO Extension Module 2 DI1 status RDIO Extension Module 2 DI2 status RDIO Extension Module 2 DI3 status RDIO Extension Module 3 DI1 status RDIO Extension Module 3 DI2 status RDIO Extension Module 3 DI3 status RDIO Extension Module 4 DI1 status RDIO Extension Module 4 DI2 status RDIO Extension Module 4 DI3 status RDIO Extension Module 5 DI1 status RDIO Extension Module 5 DI2 status RDIO Extension Module 5 DI3 status Max: 65535 Integer scaling:
unit:
5 - 15
Chapter 5 Signals
8
07
Index
Group name:
STATUS WORDS
LIMIT WORD INV
Description:
Description:
unit:
Following bits are included to bit 4 TORQ INV CUR LIM in 8.03 LIMIT WORD 1: Bit B0 Current integrator 200% (Function is active only in ACS 600) B1 Current integrator 150% B2 High IGBT temperature in low frequency with current integrators B3 High IGBT temperature with current integrators B4 IGBT overtemperature with temperature model B5 IGBT overload with temperature model B6 Inverter maximum power limit (internal limit is INV POWER LIM). If line converter is not included and brake chopper is configured, power limit in generator side is calculated directly according to internal parameter MAX BRAKING POWER B7 Inverter trip current (internal limit is INV TRIP CURRENT%) B8 Inverter maximum current limit (internal limit is OVERLOAD CURR LIM) B9 Continuous power limit i.e. dc-current B10 Continuous output current limit B11 Maximum continuous output current limited due to Reduced Run function B12 Maximum output current limited due to Reduced Run function B13 B14 B15 type: PB Min: 0 Max: 65535 Integer scaling:
20
Index: Description:
INV ENABLED WORD

Bit B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 PB Min: These bits are indicating state TRUE when the parameter 98.12 FUSE SWITCH CTRL has been activated, a DC switch of each ACS800 R8i inverter module is closed, intermediate circuit has been charged and inverter module is allowed to start modulating. INV1 ENABLED Inverter module 1 ready for operation INV2 ENABLED Inverter module 2 ready for operation INV3 ENABLED Inverter module 3 ready for operation INV4 ENABLED Inverter module 4 ready for operation INV5 ENABLED Inverter module 5 ready for operation INV6 ENABLED Inverter module 6 ready for operation INV7 ENABLED Inverter module 7 ready for operation INV8 ENABLED Inverter module 8 ready for operation INV9 ENABLED Inverter module 9 ready for operation INV10 ENABLED Inverter module 10 ready for operation INV11 ENABLED Inverter module 11 ready for operation INV12 ENABLED Inverter module 12 ready for operation
unit:
type:
Max:
65535
Def:
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
5 - 16
Chapter 5 Signals
8
21
Group name:
STATUS WORDS
START INHIBI WORD
These bits are indicate the status of unexpected start-up circuit INV1 START INHIB Inverter module 1 start inhibited INV2 START INHIB Inverter module 2 start inhibited INV3 START INHIB Inverter module 3 start inhibited INV4 START INHIB Inverter module 4 start inhibited INV5 START INHIB Inverter module 5 start inhibited INV6 START INHIB Inverter module 6 start inhibited INV7 START INHIB Inverter module 7 start inhibited INV8 START INHIB Inverter module 8 start inhibited INV9 START INHIB Inverter module 9 start inhibited INV10 START INHIB Inverter module 10 start inhibited INV11 START INHIB Inverter module 11 start inhibited INV12 START INHIB Inverter module 12 start inhibited
Index: Description:
unit:
type:
Bit B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 PB Min: Bit B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Pb Min:
Max:
65535
Def:
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
22
Index: Description:
INT CONFIG WORD

Found inverter units by APBU 44 branching unit. INV1 found INV2 found INV3 found INV4 found INV5 found INV6 found INV7 found INV8 found INV9 found INV10 found INV11 found INV12 found
unit:
type:
Max:
65535
Def:
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
5 - 17
Chapter 5 Signals
8
23
Group name:
STATUS WORDS
LCU STATUS WORD
Bit B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 CHARGING Max: 1 = charging contactor is closed 65535 Def: Integer scaling: 1 == 1 ALARM MODULATING REMOTE NET OK 1 = warning 1 = line converter modulates 1 = drive control: remote 1 = network voltage is OK. Line converter status word. RDY_ON 1 = ready to switch on (no fault) RDY_RUN RDY_REF TRIPPED 1 = ready to operate 1 = operation enabled 1 = fault
Index: Description:
unit:
type:
Pb
Min: 0
5 - 18
Chapter 5 Signals
Group 9 Fault Words
9
01
Index
Group name:
FAULT WORDS
FAULT WORD 1
SHORT CIRC OVERCURRENT DC OVERVOLT ACS 800 TEMP EARTH FAULT MOTOR TEMP SYSTEM_FAULT UNDERLOAD OVERFREQ Short circuit in the main circuit. Overcurrent. Intermediate circuit DC overvoltage. Power plate overtemperature. Earth (ground) fault or excessive output current unbalance in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. Bit B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Min: Bit B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Min:
Description: Fault signals of the drive. Interval: 500 ms Description:
unit:
02
Index
Motor overtemperature (calculated). A fault is indicated by the System Fault Word 9.03. Underload fault. See parameter 30.16. Overspeed fault. (reserved) Channel CH2 (Master/Follower link) communication error CH2 COM LOS Short circuit in parallel connected INU 1. SC (INU1) Short circuit in parallel connected INU 2. SC (INU2) Short circuit in parallel connected INU 3. SC (INU3) Short circuit in parallel connected INU 4. SC (INU4) 0 Max: 65535 Integer scaling:
FAULT WORD 2
SUPPLY PHASE NO MOTOR DATA DC UNDERVOLT CABLE TEMP INV DISABLED ENCODER 1 ERR I/O COMM ERR CONTROL B TEMP DC voltage ripple in intermediate circuit is too high. No motor data entered in Group 99. Intermediate circuit DC undervoltage Motor cable overtemperature DC supply switch of inverter module is opened. Speed measurement 1 fault on pulse encoder module 1. I/O device fault on DDCS channel CH1. Drive cabinet overtemperature (meas. by RMIO board)
unit:
type:
PB
Switching frequency is too high. OVER SWFREQ ENCODER 2 ERR Communication break on pulse encoder module 2. NINT board current measurement or communication error. PPCC LINK Fieldbus communication break. COMM MODULE Local control lost. PANEL LOST Motor stall MOTOR STALL Motor circuit fault. MOTOR PHASE 0 Max: 65535 Integer scaling:
5 - 19
Chapter 5 Signals
9
04
Index
FAULT WORDS
ALARM WORD 1
Bit B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 START INHIBIT EM STOP MOTOR TEMP ACS 800 TEMP ENCODER 1 ERR ENCODER 2 ERR DIGITAL IO ANALOG IO EXT DIGITAL IO EXT ANALOG IO CH2 COM LOS EARTH FAULT Preventation of Unexpected Start-up Emergency stop function has been activated DI1=0. Overtemperature alarm of the thermal model. Power plate overtemperature. Pulse encoder 1 error. See parameter 50.05. Pulse encoder 2 error. See parameter 50.17. Basic digital I/O alarm (RMIO). Basic analogue I/O alarm (RMIO). External digital I/O alarm (RDIO). External analogue I/O alarm (RAIO). CH2 Master/Follower link communication error. Earth (ground) fault / current unbalance with parallel connected drives Integer scaling:
unit:
05
Index
Min: 0 Bit B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Min: Bit B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Min:
Max: 65535
ALARM WORD 2
INV OVERLOAD CABLE TEMP ENCODER A<>B POWFAIL FILE POWDOWN FILE MOTOR STALL COMM MODULE BATT FAILURE PANEL LOST RUN DISABLED 0 Internal current limitation is active. Motor cable overtemperature. Pulse encoder output phasing is wrong (polarity). Error in restoring powerfail.ddf file Error in restoring powerdown.ddf file Motor stall Fieldbus communication break. APBU 44 branching unit memory backup battery error Local control lost. Input of the block RUN ENA is in state FALSE. Integer scaling:
unit:
06
Index
Max: 65535
FAULT WORD 3
FAST EXT AI LINE CONV ERR Extension analogue I/O alarm (NAIO-02F on CH2) Line converter fault. Used in 2Q and 4Q single drives.
INT CONFIG ENCODER A<>B DC HIGH RISE
Found R8i inverter modules does not match with configuration Pulse encoder output phasing is wrong (polarity). Too high change in the DC voltage level.
unit:
type:
PB
MOD CHOKE T Overtemperature in choke of liquid cooled R8i inverter module. MOD BOARD T Overtemperature in AINT board of inverter module TEMP DIFF Temperature difference. See 09.17 TEMP DIF FLT WORD. 0 Max: 65535 Integer scaling:
5 - 20
Chapter 5 Signals
9
08
Index
FAULT WORDS
ALARM WORD 3
Bit B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Min: Bit B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Min: APPL OVERLOAD APPLIC 1 FAULT APPLIC 2 FAULT APPLIC 3 FAULT NODE2 ERR NODE3 ERR Application software overload Application task program 1 fault Application task program 2 fault Application task program 3 fault Node 2 communication error on channel CH2 Node 3 communication error on channel CH2
unit:
09
Index
MOD CHOKE T Overtemperature in choke of liquid cooled R8i inverter module. MOD BOARD T Overtemperature in AINT board of inverter module TEMP DIFF Temperature difference. See 09.18 TEMP DIF ALM WORD. 0 Max: 65535 Integer scaling:
I/O FAULT WORD

DIO EXT1 ERROR DIO EXT2 ERROR DIO EXT3 ERROR DIO EXT4 ERROR DIO EXT5 ERROR RMIO DI ERROR Error detected in the digital extension module 1 Error detected in the digital extension module 2 Error detected in the digital extension module 3 Error detected in the digital extension module 4 Error detected in the digital extension module 5 Error detected in the digital I/O of RMIO control board
unit:
13
type: PB Interval: 2 ms
AIO EXT1 ERROR Error detected in the analogue extension module 1 AIO EXT2 ERROR Error detected in the analogue extension module 2 AIO EXT3 ERROR Error detected in the analogue extension module 3 AIO EXT4 ERROR Error detected in the analogue extension module 4 AIO EXT5 ERROR Error detected in the analogue extension module 5 RMIO AIO ERROR Error detected in the analogue I/O of RMIO control board 0 Max: 65535 Integer scaling: CUR UNBAL 1 CUR UNBAL 2 CUR UNBAL 3 CUR UNBAL 4 CUR UNBAL 5 CUR UNBAL 6 CUR UNBAL 7 CUR UNBAL 8 CUR UNBAL 9 CUR UNBAL 10 CUR UNBAL 11 CUR UNBAL 12 Current unbalance fault detected in inverter module 1 Current unbalance fault detected in inverter module 2 Current unbalance fault detected in inverter module 3 Current unbalance fault detected in inverter module 4 Current unbalance fault detected in inverter module 5 Current unbalance fault detected in inverter module 6 Current unbalance fault detected in inverter module 7 Current unbalance fault detected in inverter module 8 Current unbalance fault detected in inverter module 9 Current unbalance fault detected in inverter module 10 Current unbalance fault detected in inverter module 11 Current unbalance fault detected in inverter module 12
CURRENT UNBALANCE
Index: Description:
unit:
type:
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 PB Min:
Max:
65535
Def:
Integer scaling:
5 - 21
Chapter 5 Signals
9
14
Group name: Interval: 2 ms
FAULT WORDS
OVERCURRENT FAULT
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 PB Min: B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 PB Min: B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 PB Min: OVERCURR 1 OVERCURR 2 OVERCURR 3 OVERCURR 4 OVERCURR 5 OVERCURR 6 OVERCURR 7 OVERCURR 8 OVERCURR 9 OVERCURR 10 OVERCURR 11 OVERCURR 12 Overcurrent fault detected in inverter module 1 Overcurrent fault detected in inverter module 2 Overcurrent fault detected in inverter module 3 Overcurrent fault detected in inverter module 4 Overcurrent fault detected in inverter module 5 Overcurrent fault detected in inverter module 6 Overcurrent fault detected in inverter module 7 Overcurrent fault detected in inverter module 8 Overcurrent fault detected in inverter module 9 Overcurrent fault detected in inverter module 10 Overcurrent fault detected in inverter module 11 Overcurrent fault detected in inverter module 12
Index: Description:
unit:
15
type: Interval: 2 ms
Max:
65535
Def:
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
OVERCURRENT FAULT
SC INV 1 U 1 SC INV 1 U 2 SC INV 1 U 3 SC INV 1 U 4 SC INV 1 U 5 SC INV 1 U 6 SC INV 1 U 7 SC INV 1 U 8 SC INV 1 U 9 SC INV 1 U 10 SC INV 1 U 11 SC INV 1 U 12 SC PHASE U SC PHASE V SC PHASE W 0 Max: Short circuit detected in inverter module 1 Short circuit detected in inverter module 2 Short circuit detected in inverter module 3 Short circuit detected in inverter module 4 Short circuit detected in inverter module 5 Short circuit detected in inverter module 6 Short circuit detected in inverter module 7 Short circuit detected in inverter module 8 Short circuit detected in inverter module 9 Short circuit detected in inverter module 10 Short circuit detected in inverter module 11 Short circuit detected in inverter module 12 Short circuit detected in phase U of inverter module Short circuit detected in phase V of inverter module Short circuit detected in phase W of inverter module 65535 Def: Integer scaling: 1 == 1
Index: Description:
unit:
16
type: Interval: 2 ms
OVERTEMP WORD
ACS TEMP INV1 ACS TEMP INV2 ACS TEMP INV3 ACS TEMP INV4 ACS TEMP INV5 ACS TEMP INV6 ACS TEMP INV7 ACS TEMP INV8 ACS TEMP INV9 ACS TEMP INV10 ACS TEMP INV11 ACS TEMP INV12 OVERTEMP PHASE U OVERTEMP PHASE V OVERTEMP PHASE W 0 Max: Overtemperature in inverter module 1 Overtemperature in inverter module 2 Overtemperature in inverter module 3 Overtemperature in inverter module 4 Overtemperature in inverter module 5 Overtemperature in inverter module 6 Overtemperature in inverter module 7 Overtemperature in inverter module 8 Overtemperature in inverter module 9 Overtemperature in inverter module 10 Overtemperature in inverter module 12 Overtemperature in inverter module 12 Overtemperature in phase U Overtemperature in phase V Overtemperature in phase W Def: Integer scaling: 1 == 1
Index: Description:
unit:
type:
65535
5 - 22
Chapter 5 Signals
9
17
Group name: Interval: 2 ms
FAULT WORDS
TEMP DIF FLT WORD
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 TEMPD INV1 TEMPD INV2 TEMPD INV3 TEMPD INV4 TEMPD INV5 TEMPD INV6 TEMPD INV7 TEMPD INV8 TEMPD INV9 TEMPD INV10 TEMPD INV11 TEMPD INV12 TEMPD PHASE U TEMPD PHASE V TEMPD PHASE W 0 Max: Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 1 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 2 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 3 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 4 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 5 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 6 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 7 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 8 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 9 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 10 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 11 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 12 Temperature difference is too high in phase U Temperature difference is too high in phase V Temperature difference is too high in phase W 65535 Def: Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
18
type: PB Interval: 2 ms
Min:
TEMP DIF ALM WORD

TEMPD INV1 TEMPD INV2 TEMPD INV3 TEMPD INV4 TEMPD INV5 TEMPD INV6 TEMPD INV7 TEMPD INV8 TEMPD INV9: TEMPD INV10: TEMPD INV11 TEMPD INV12: TEMPD PHASE U TEMPD PHASE V TEMPD PHASE W 0 Max: Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 1 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 2 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 3 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 4 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 5 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 6 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 7 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 8 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 9 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 10 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 11 Temperature difference fault detected in inv. module 12 Temperature difference is too high in phase U Temperature difference is too high in phase V Temperature difference is too high in phase W 65535 Def: Integer scaling: 1 == 1
Index: Description:
unit:
19
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 type: PB Min: Interval: 20 ms
AP ALARM and FAULT WORD (AP AFW)

Alarm and Fault word for users events. This word can be used for Block Programming purposes typically for fieldbus information. Use function block A/F WORD in application program.
Index: Description: B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 PB Min:
unit:
type:
Max:
65535
Def:
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
5 - 23
Chapter 5 Signals
9
30
Index
Group name: Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I
FAULT WORDS
FAULT CODE 1 LAST
Fieldbus code of the latest fault. This code is also displayed in fault logger. See Chapter 8 Fault Tracing for the codes. Min: 0 Max: FFFF Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
31
Index
FAULT CODE 2 LAST

Fieldbus code of the 2nd latest fault. Min: 0 Max: FFFF Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
32
Index
FAULT CODE 3 LAST

Fieldbus code of the 3rd latest fault. Min: 0 Max: FFFF Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
33
Index
FAULT CODE 4 LAST

Fieldbus code of the 4th latest fault. Min: 0 Max: FFFF Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
34
Index
FAULT CODE 5 LAST

Fieldbus code of the 5th latest fault. Min: 0 Max: FFFF Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
35
Index
WARN CODE 1 LAST

Fieldbus code of the latest warning. This code is also displayed in fault logger. See Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing for the codes. Min: 0 Max: FFFF Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
36
Index
WARN CODE 2 LAST

Fieldbus code of the 2nd latest warning. Min: 0 Max: FFFF Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
37
Index
WARN CODE 3 LAST

Fieldbus code of the 3rd latest warning. Min: 0 Max: FFFF Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
38
Index
WARN CODE 4 LAST

Fieldbus code of the 4th latest warning. Min: 0 Max: FFFF Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
39
Index
WARN CODE 5 LAST

Fieldbus code of the 5th latest warning. Min: 0 Max: FFFF Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
5 - 24
Chapter 6 Parameters
Overview Parameter Groups
This chapter explains the function of, and valid selections for, each parameter. The parameters are arranged into groups by their function. The figure below illustrates the organisation of the parameter groups.
Quantity 36 7 24 7 2 14 15 2 5 19 12 7 3 3 5 4 24 1 5 12 18 33 24 152 5 247 5 251 254 27 23 1 12 12 8 4 1 15 13 1312
Drive Parameters Group + Index Description 13.0113.06, 13.1513.44 Analogue Input 14.0214.07 Fast Inputs 15.0115.24 Analogue Outputs 16.0216.04, 16.0716.10 System Control Inputs 18.0118.02 LED Panel Control 19.0119.14 Data Storage 20.0120.11, 20.1720.20 Limits 21.0121.02 Start/Stop Functions 22.0122.02, 22.0422.05, 22.08 Accel/Decel 23.01...23.19 Speed Reference 24.0224.03, 24.0424.06, 24.09, 24.1124.16 Speed Control 25.0125.07 Torque Reference 26.0126.03 Torque Reference Handling 27.0327.05 Flux Control 28.0728.08, 28.1228.15 Motor Model 29.0129.04 Scalar Control 30.0130.02, 30.0930.25, 30.2830.32 Fault Functions 31.02 Fault Functions 34.0134.05 Brake Chopper 37.01, 37.0337.13 Function Generator 50.0150.06, 50.0850.19 Speed Measurement 51.0151.33 Master Adapter 53.0153.24 User Parameters 55.0155.02, 55.0555.154 Appl Prog1 56.0156.05 Appl Task 1 Ctrl 57.0157.02, 57.0557.249 Appl Prog2 58.0158.05 Appl Task 2 Ctrl 59.0159.02, 59.0559.254 Appl Prog3 60.0160.254 Appl Task 3 Ctrl 66.02, 66.04, 66.0666.30 Applic Connect 70.0170.20, 70.2870.30 DDCS Control 71.01 DriveBus Communication 90.0190.12 Data Set Receive Addresses 92.0192.12 Data Set Transmit Addresses 94.0194.08 P2P Connection 95.0195.04 LCU 97.01 Drive 98.0198.02, 98.0498.16 Option Modules 99.0199.13 Start-Up Data Total
6-1
Chapter 6 Parameter
How to Read the Parameter Table
Before you start to read the parameter table, we first recommend you read this description. Parameter change by DriveWindow or the CDP 312 R is stored to FPROM memory; changes made by the overriding system are only stored to RAM. If the overriding control system reads or writes individual bits of a word with an Advant CONV_IB element, (for example 7.02 AUX CONTROL WORD) the bit B15 corresponds to the SIGN outputs of the element. From DriveWindow and the control panel, parameter values are set in decimal. Unit of the parameter value can be seen on the lower left-hand corner of the parameter description. Minimum, maximum and default values are shown in decimal format. Data type is given with a short code: I = 16-bit signed integer value B = Boolean value PB = Packed Boolean value R = Real value P = Pointer Communication between the overriding system and the drive uses 16 bit integer values (-32768...32767). To change a parameter value from the overriding system, an integer value for the parameter must be calculated using the information given in the Integer scaling column.
Example 1: If TREF TORQMAX (real) is set from the overriding system, an integer value of 100 corresponds to 1% (see below).
09
Index
TREF TORQMAX
Description: type: R Maximum torque reference as a percentage of the motor nominal torque. Min: 0 % Max: 300 % Def: 300 % Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
unit: %
Figure 6 - 1 Sample of the Parameter Table Example 2: Speed reference from the overriding system. Speed reference input is given by parameter 23.01 SPEED REF. The Integer scaling box reads see parameter. 50.01. Parameter 50.01 defines the motor speed (in rpm) at maximum reference (20000 for the overriding system). Thus, sending a value of 20000 from the overriding system into parameter 23.01 sets the speed reference to the rpm value given with parameter 50.01.
6-2
Group 13 Analogue Inputs
13
01
Index:
ANALOGUE INPUTS
AI1 CONV MODE
The conversion mode for the analogue input AI1. Different modes are: 1 = NORMAL scaling: 10 V010 V = -20000020000 2 = PT 100: supply from any AO, scale 200C = 20000 1xPT 100: = 10 mA 2xPT 100: = 5 mA 3Xpt 100: = 3.3 mA 3 = KTY84 = supply from any AO, supply 2 mA; scale 100C = 10000 Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 (normal) Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I
02
Description: unit: ms type: I
Index:
AI1 FILTER ms
The filtering time constant for AI1. Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 1000 (ms) Integer scaling: 1 = 1 ms
03
Index:
AI2 CONV MODE

Description: The conversion mode for the analogue input AI2. Different modes: 1 = NORMAL scaling: 20 mA020 mA = 20000020000 2 = 4 mA scaling: 4 mA20 mA = 020000 Min: 1 Max: 2 Def: 1 (normal) Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I
04
Index:
AI2 FILTER ms
05
Index:
AI3 CONV MODE

Description: The conversion mode for the analogue input AI3. Different modes are: 1 = NORMAL scaling: 20 mA020 mA = 20000020000 2 = 4 mA scaling: 4 mA20 mA = 020000 Min: 1 Max: 2 Def: 1 (normal) Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I
06
Index:
AI3 FILTER ms
15
Index
EXT1 AI1 HW MODE

Description: This parameter configures the inputs and outputs of an RAIO analogue I/O extension module. The operating mode of the analogue inputs can be selected by using the configuration DIP switch (S2) on the circuit board of the module. The drive parameters must be set accordingly. Each input can be used with a current or voltage signal. The selection is made with the configuration DIP switch (S2) on the circuit board of the module. 1 = UNIPOLAR unipolar input mode (default) bipolar input mode 2 = BIPOLAR RAIO-01 Switch S2 (Operating mode): Analogue input AI1 Analogue input AI2 Input signal type
ON ON
0(4)20 mA 0(2)10 V 02 V 0(4)20 mA 0(2)10 V 02 V (Default)
ON
ON
6-3
Chapter 6 Parameter
13
Group name:
ANALOGUE INPUTS
Switch S2 (Current or voltage signal): Analogue input AI1 Analogue input AI2
ON ON
Current signal 0(4)20 mA (Default) Voltage signal 0(2)10 V
ON
ON
ON
ON
Voltage signal 02 V
1 2 3 4 5 6
unit:
type: I Description: type: I Description:
Min: 1 See index 15. Min: 1
Max: 2
Def: 1 (unipolar) Integer scaling:
16
Index:
EXT1 AI2 HW MODE

Max: 2 Def: 1 (unipolar) Integer scaling:
unit:
17
Index:
EXT1 AI1 CONV MODE

The conversion mode for the external 1 analogue input AI1. The scaling is the same in both hw modes (unipolar, bipolar). Different modes: 1 = NORMAL scaling: 20 mA / -2 V / -10 V020 mA / 2 V / 10 V = -2000020000 2 = 4 mA scaling: 420 mA = 020000 3 = PT 100 supply from any AO, scale 200C = 20000 1XPT 100: = 10 mA 2XPT 100: = 5 mA 3XPT 100: = 3.3 mA 4 = KTY84 = supply from any AO, supply 2 mA; scale 200C = 20000 Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 (normal) Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I Description: type: I
18
Index:
EXT1 AI2 CONV MODE

See index 17. Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 (normal) Integer scaling:
unit:
19
Index:
EXT1 AI1 FILTER ms

The filtering time constant for external module 1 AI1. Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 1000 (ms) Integer scaling: 1 = 1 ms
20
Index:
EXT1 AI2 FILTER ms

Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I The filtering time constant for external module 1 AI2. Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 1000 (ms) Integer scaling: 1 = 1 ms
unit: ms
21
Index:
EXT2 AI1 HW MODE

See index 15. Min: 1 See index 15. Min: 1 Max: 2 Def: 1 (unipolar) Integer scaling:
unit:
22
Index:
EXT2 AI2 HW MODE

unit:
6-4
13
23
Index:
Group name: Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I
ANALOGUE INPUTS
EXT2 AI1 CONV MODE
See index 17. Min: 1 See index 17. Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 (normal) Integer scaling:
unit:
24
Index:
EXT2 AI2 CONV MODE

Max: 4 Def: 1 (normal) Integer scaling:
unit:
25
Index:
EXT2 AI1 FILTER ms

unit: ms
26
Index:
EXT2 AI2 FILTER ms

27
Index:
EXT3 AI1 HW MODE

Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I See index 15. Min: 1 See index 15. Min: 1 See index 17. Min: 1 See index 17. Min: 1 Max: 2 Def: 1 (unipolar) Integer scaling:
unit:
28
Index:
EXT3 AI2 HW MODE

unit:
29
Index:
EXT3 AI1 CONV MODE

unit:
30
Index:
EXT3 AI2 CONV MODE

unit:
31
Index:
EXT3 AI1 FILTER ms

unit: ms
32
Index:
EXT3 AI2 FILTER ms

33
Index:
EXT4 AI1 HW MODE

Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I See index 15. Min: 1 See index 15. Min: 1 See index 17. Min: 1 See index 17. Min: 1 Max: 2 Def: 1 (unipolar) Integer scaling:
unit:
34
Index:
EXT4 AI2 HW MODE

unit:
35
Index:
EXT4 AI1 CONV MODE

unit:
36
Index:
EXT4 AI2 CONV MODE

unit:
37
Index:
EXT4 AI1 FILTER ms

unit: ms
38
Index:
EXT4 AI2 FILTER ms

unit: ms
6-5
Chapter 6 Parameter
13
39
Index:
Group name: Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I
ANALOGUE INPUTS
EXT5 AI1 HW MODE
See index 15. Min: 1 See index 15. Min: 1 See index 17. Min: 1 See index 17. Min: 1 Max: 2 Def: 1 (unipolar) Integer scaling:
unit:
40
Index:
EXT5 AI2 HW MODE

unit:
41
Index:
EXT5 AI1 CONV MODE

unit:
42
Index:
EXT5 AI2 CONV MODE

unit:
43
Index:
EXT5 AI1 FILTER ms

44
Index:
EXT5 AI2 FILTER ms

Description: type: I The filtering time constant for external module 5 AI2. Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 1000 (ms) Integer scaling: 1 = 1 ms
unit: ms
6-6
Group 14 Fast Inputs
14
02
Index
FAST INPUTS
Fast analogue input signals of NAIO-03F can be directly switched into the speed and torque control chain. This mode is activated with parameter 98.16 FAST AI. No other devices allowed to connect simultaneously on DDCS communication channel CH2.
NAIO AI1 REF SEL

Description: Analogue input AI1 connection point in the speed and torque reference chain. No connections for AI1 of fast NAIO-03F AI1 of NAIO-03F is connected internally to input ADDITIVE SPEED reference. AI1 of NAIO-03F is connected internally to input SPEED 2 = SPEED COR CORRECTION. 3 = TORQ REF A AI1 of NAIO-03F is connected internally to input TORQUE REFERENCE A. 4 = TORQ REF B AI1 of NAIO-03F is connected internally to input TORQUE REFERENCE B. AI1 of NAIO-03F is connected internally to input TORQUE STEP. 5 = TORQ STEP Min: 0 Max: 5 Def: 0 Integer scaling: 0 = NO AI REF 1 = ADD SPEED
unit:
type: I Description:
03
Index
NAIO AI2 REF SEL

Analogue input AI2 connection point in the speed and torque reference chain. No connections for AI2 of fast NAIO-03F AI2 of NAIO-03F is connected internally to input ADDITIVE SPEED reference. AI2 of NAIO-03F is connected internally to input SPEED 2 = SPEED COR CORRECTION. 3 = TORQ REF A AI2 of NAIO-03F is connected internally to input TORQUE REFERENCE A. 4 = TORQ REF B AI2 of NAIO-03F is connected internally to input TORQUE REFERENCE B. AI2 of NAIO-03F is connected internally to input TORQUE STEP. 5 = TORQ STEP Min: 0 Max: 5 Def: 0 Integer scaling: 0 = NO AI REF 1 = ADD SPEED
unit:
type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: R Description: type: R
04
Index
AI1 SPEED SCALE

A scaling of NAIO-03F analogue input AI1 signal in the speed reference chain. The value of this parameter corresponds the nominal signal level of NAIO-03F (+2 V, +10 V or 20 mA). Min: -9000 Max: 9000 Def: 0 Integer scaling:
unit: rpm
05
Index
AI2 SPEED SCALE

A scaling of NAIO-03F analogue input AI2 signal in the speed reference chain. The value of this parameter corresponds the nominal signal level of NAIO-03F (+2 V, +10 V or 20 mA). Min: -9000 Max: 9000 Def: 0 Integer scaling:
unit: rpm
06
Index
AI1 TORQUE SCALE

A scaling of NAIO-03F analogue input AI1 signal in the torque reference chain. The value of this parameter corresponds the nominal signal level of NAIO-03F (+2V, +10 V or 20 mA). Min: -2844 Max: 2844 Def: 0 Integer scaling:
unit: %
07
Index
AI2 TORQUE SCALE

A scaling of NAIO-03F analogue input AI2 signal in the torque reference chain. The value of this parameter corresponds the nominal signal level of NAIO-03F (+2V, +10 V or 20 mA). Min: -2844 Max: 2844 Def: 0 Integer scaling:
unit: %
6-7
Chapter 6 Parameter
Group 15 Analogue Outputs
15
01
Index
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
It is possible to select a signal or parameter to control the analogue outputs. The outputs can also be controlled from the overriding system.
AO1 OFFSET
Analogue output AO1 signal offset in milliamperes. Min: 0 mA Max: 20 mA Def: 0 mA Integer scaling: 1 mA == 1000
02
Index
AO1 SCALE
Description: type: I The scaling of analogue output AO1 signal. The value of this parameter corresponds the maximum output current (20 mA). E.g. 20000 (default) = 20 mA. Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 20000 Integer scaling:
unit:
03
Index
AO2 OFFSET
See index 01. Min: 0 mA Max: 20 mA Def: 0 mA Integer scaling: 1 mA == 1000
04
Index
AO2 SCALE
Description: type: I Description: type: R Description: type: I Description: type: R Description: type: I Description: type: R Description: type: I Description: type: R Description: type: I Description: type: R See index 02. Min: 0 See index 01. Min: 0 mA See index 02. Min: 0 See index 01. Min: 0 mA See index 02. Min: 0 See index 01. Min: 0 mA See index 02. Min: 0 See index 01. Min: 0 mA See index 02. Min: 0 See index 01. Min: 0 mA Max: 30000 Def: 20000 Integer scaling: Max: 30000 Def: 20000 Integer scaling: Max: 30000 Def: 20000 Integer scaling: Max: 30000 Def: 20000 Integer scaling: Max: 30000 Def: 20000 Integer scaling:
unit:
05
Index
EXT1 AO1 OFFSET

Max: 20 mA Def: 0 mA Integer scaling: 1 mA == 1000
unit: mA
06
Index
EXT1 AO1 SCALE
unit:
07
Index
EXT1 AO2 OFFSET

unit: mA
08
Index
EXT1 AO2 SCALE
unit:
09
Index
EXT2 AO1 OFFSET

unit: mA
10
Index
EXT2 AO1 SCALE
unit:
11
Index
EXT2 AO2 OFFSET

unit: mA
12
Index
EXT2 AO2 SCALE
unit:
13
Index
EXT3 AO1 OFFSET

unit: mA
6-8
15
14
Index
Group name: Description: type: I Description: type: R Description: type: I Description: type: R Description: type: I Description: type: R Description: type: I Description: type: R Description: type: I
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
EXT3 AO1 SCALE
See index 02. Min: 0 See index 01. Min: 0 mA See index 02. Min: 0 See index 01. Min: 0 mA See index 02. Min: 0 See index 01. Min: 0 mA See index 02. Min: 0 See index 01. Min: 0 mA See index 02. Min: 0 See index 01. Min: 0 mA See index 02. Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 20000 Integer scaling: Max: 30000 Def: 20000 Integer scaling: Max: 30000 Def: 20000 Integer scaling: Max: 30000 Def: 20000 Integer scaling: Max: 30000 Def: 20000 Integer scaling:
unit:
15
Index
EXT3 AO2 OFFSET

unit: mA
16
Index
EXT3 AO2 SCALE
unit:
17
Index
EXT4 AO1 OFFSET

unit: mA
18
Index
EXT4 AO1 SCALE
unit:
19
Index
EXT4 AO2 OFFSET

unit: mA
20
Index
EXT4 AO2 SCALE
unit:
21
Index
EXT5 AO1 OFFSET

unit: mA
22
Index
EXT5 AO1 SCALE
unit:
23
Index
EXT5 AO2 OFFSET

24
Index
EXT5 AO2 SCALE

Description: type: I Max: 30000 Def: 20000 Integer scaling:
unit:
6-9
Chapter 6 Parameter
Group 16 System Control Inputs
16
02
Index
SYSTEM CTR INPUTS

PARAMETER LOCK
This parameter selects the state of the parameter lock. With the parameter lock you can prevent unauthorised changes by CDP 312R or the DriveWindow Tool for parameter groups 099. 1 = LOCKED Parameter changes are disabled. Parameter changes are enabled. 0 = OPEN Min: Max: Def: OPEN Integer scaling: 1 == 1
Description:
unit:
type: B Description: type: I Description:
03
Index
PASS CODE
This parameter enters the pass code for the Parameter Lock. The default value of this parameter is 0. In order to open the Parameter Lock, change the value to 358. After the Parameter Lock is opened, the value is automatically changed back to 0. Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Integer scaling:
unit:
04
Index
LOCAL LOCK
Control place change of the drive from remote to local can be disabled by setting this parameter to TRUE. If LOCAL LOCK is activated during local control, it takes effect only after the control place is changed back to remote. 0 = FALSE No locking for control place change. 1 = TRUE Local control is disabled. Min: Max: Def: FALSE Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
07
Index
type: B Description: CNTR BOARD SUPPLY Selection value of this parameter must be matched with the power supply source of RMIO board or RDCU-02C unit. 0 = INTERNAL +24 V RMIO board is supplied using internal power supply from the inverter module. After power fail saving function RMIO board is booted. In normal cases RMIO loses power supply before waking up from boot state. 1 = EXTERNAL +24 V The RMIO board is powered from an external supply. Power fail saving is done without boot in background. type: B Description: Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
08
Index
FAN SPD CNTR MODE

ACS800 inverter modules 112 x R8i equipped with optional fan inverter have adjustable speed control as a function of IGBT temperature. However fan speed can also be set to constant. There are following control mode selections: 0 = CONST 50 HZ Fan is running always at constant frequency 50 Hz when powered. Drive stopped: Fan is running at constant frequency 10 Hz 1 = RUN/STOP Drive started: Fan is running at constant frequency 50 Hz. 2 = CONTROLLED Fan speed is determined from IGBT temperature vs. fan speed curve. Min: 0 Max: 2 Def: 0 Integer scaling:
unit:
09
Index
RESET RUN-TIME
A run time counter can be reset by means of this parameter. See signal 1.29 MOTOR RUNTIME. 0 = NO No reset for run time counter. 1 = YES Reset the run time counter. Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
type: B Description:
10
Index
INT CONFIG USER

Adjustable number of parallel connected ACS800 inverter modules for user. Changing of this parameter is user acceptance for Reduced Run function. It must be corresponded with active (found) R8i inverter module configuration when inverter module(s) disconnected from the main circuit. If active INU configuration is the same as the original configuration (8.22 INT CONFIG WORD), this parameter has no meaning and will be updated automatically to same value as the original INT configuration. Min: 1 Max: int config Def: int config Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I
6 - 10
Group 18 LED Panel Control
18
LED PANEL CTRL

The NLMD-01 Monitoring Display has a 0150% LED bar to show an absolute real type value. The source and the scale of this display signal is defined by this parameter group. Note: If NLMD -01 and CDP 312 control panel are used together, the first signal selected in the Actual Signal Display Mode of CDP 312 must be the default value 1.26 LED PANEL OUTP. Otherwise the NLMD-01 LED bar display will not show the correct value.
01
Index
Interval 100 ms
1 L -> 0.0 rpm 0 LED PANEL OUTP MOTOR SPEED FILT MOTOR TORQUE FILT LED PANEL OUTPUT
Signal group and index for the LED monitor display. The default value for this signal is 1.07 MOTOR TORQUE FILT. Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 107 Integer scaling:
Description: type: I Description: type: R
unit:
02
Index
SCALE PANEL
The signal value (defined in parameter 18.01) which corresponds to 100% on the LED bar display. Min: 0 Max: 65536 Def: 100 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
6 - 11
Chapter 6 Parameter
Group 19 Data Storage
19
01
Index
Group name:
DATA STORAGE
DATA 1
A storage parameter for receiving from or sending to the overriding system. For example, if the signal from data set 10 word 3 (DW 10.3) is required for monitoring by DriveWindow, first set parameter 90.03 DATA SET 10 VAL 3 to 1901 (denoting parameter 19.01), then select parameter 19.01 DATA1 for the desired DriveWindow monitoring channel. Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Integer scaling:
This parameter group consists of unconnected parameters for linking, testing and commissioning purposes. Fieldbus signals with RPBA-01 module are linked to inputs of blocks via parameters 19.0119.08. Description:
unit:
type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description:
02
Index
DATA 2
See 19.01 DATA 1 Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Integer scaling:
unit:
03
Index
DATA 3
unit:
04
Index
DATA 4
unit:
05
Index
DATA 5
unit:
06
Index
DATA 6
unit:
07
Index
DATA 7
unit:
08
Index
DATA 8
unit:
09
Index
DATA 9
unit:
10
Index
DATA 10
unit:
11
Index
NV STORE1
The non-volatile storage 1 for any data in power shutdown. The data is written to this index and after power up it can ONCE be read from the index 13. Note! RAPI-01C Auxiliary Power Interface module is needed with the external +24 V power supply circuit for RMIO to guarantee this power fail function. Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Integer scaling:
unit:
12
Index
NV STORE2
The non-volatile storage 2 for any data in power shutdown. The data is written to this index and after power up it can ONCE be read from the index 14. Note! RAPI-01C Auxiliary Power Interface module is needed with the external +24 V power supply circuit for RMIO to guarantee this power fail function. Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I
6 - 12
19
13
Index
DATA STORAGE
STORED DATA1
The non-volatile storage 1 for any data in power shutdown. Data type is unsigned integer. The stored data 1 (index 11) can ONCE be read after power up from this index. Note! RAPI-01C Auxiliary Power Interface module is needed with the external +24 V power supply circuit for RMIO to guarantee this power fail function. Min: 0 Max: 65535 Integer scaling:
unit:
type: UI Description:
14
Index
STORED DATA2
The non-volatile storage 2 for any data in power shutdown. Data type is unsigned integer. The stored data 1 (index 12) can ONCE be read after power up from this index. Note! RAPI-01C Auxiliary Power Interface module is needed with the external +24 V power supply circuit for RMIO to guarantee this power fail function. Min: 0 Max: 65535 Integer scaling:
unit:
type: UI
Group 20 Limits
20
LIMITS
This parameter group defines the maximum and minimum limits for the speed, frequency, current and torque algorithms. Note: The absolute nominal torque is calculated in the application program from the motor parameters (see parameter group 99).
01
Index
MINIMUM SPEED
Negative speed reference limit in rpm. Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000rpm Def: See 99.05 Integer scaling: See 50.01
02
Index
MAXIMUM SPEED
Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: Positive speed reference limit in rpm. Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000rpm Def: See 99.05 Integer scaling: See 50.01
unit: rpm
03
Index
ZERO SPEED LIMIT

The absolute speed value at which the drive coasts after a stop command. Min: 0 rpm Max: 15000rpm Def: 60 rpm Integer scaling: See 50.01
unit: rpm
04
Index
MAXIMUM CURRENT
Maximum output current I2max as a percentage of the drive. The maximum values are limited according to the duty cycle tables. There are two loading cycles defined: 10 s / 60 s and 1 min / 4 min. See the MultiDrive catalogue. Min: 0% Max: 200% Def: 170% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
unit: %I2ma type: R
05
Index
MAXIMUM TORQUE
Maximum positive output torque as a percentage of the motor nominal torque. Min: 0% Max: 300% Def: 300% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
06
Index
MINIMUM TORQUE
Minimum negative output torque as a percentage of the motor nominal torque. Min: -300% Max: 0% Def: -300% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
07
Index
SPC TORQMAX
Description: type: R Description: type: R Maximum speed controller output limit as a percentage of the motor nominal torque in remote and I/O control mode. Min: 0% Max: 600% Def: 300% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
unit: %
08
Index
SPC TORQMIN
Minimum speed controller output limit as a percentage of the motor nominal torque in remote and I/O control mode. Min: -600% Max: 0% Def: -300% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
unit: %
09
Index
TREF TORQMAX
Maximum torque reference as a percentage of the motor nominal torque. Min: 0% Max: 300% Def: 300% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
6 - 13
Chapter 6 Parameter
20
10
Index
Group name: Description: type: R Description:
LIMITS
TREF TORQMIN
Minimum torque reference as a percentage of the motor nominal torque. Min: -300% Max: 0% Def: -300% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
unit: %
11
Index
FREQ TRIP MARGIN

The purpose of this parameter is to protect the process against an over speed condition. This parameter defines, together with parameters SPEEDMAX and SPEEDMIN (FREQ MAX and FREQ MIN in scalar control mode) the maximum allowed frequency of the drive. If this frequency is reached, an OVER SPEED FAULT is activated. Example: If the maximum process speed is 1420 rpm (Parameter 20.01 SPEED MAX = 1420 rpm == 50 Hz) and this parameter (20.11) is 10 Hz, the drive trips at 60 Hz. Min: 0 Hz Max: 500 Hz Def: 50 Hz Integer scaling: 100 == 1 Hz
unit: Hz
type: R
17
Index
P MOTORING LIM
Maximum motoring power. 100% == motor nominal power. Min: 0% Max: 600% Def: 300% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
18
Index
P GENERATING LIM
Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: type: R Maximum generating power. 100% == motor nominal power. Min: -600% Max: 0% Def: -300% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
unit: %
19
Index
SPC TORQMIN LOC/EMS

Maximum speed controller output limit as a percentage of the motor nominal torque in local control and emergency stop situation. Min: 0% Max: 600% Def: 300% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
unit: %
20
Index
SPC TORQMIN LOC/EMS

Minimum speed controller output limit as a percentage of the motor nominal torque in local control and emergency stop situation. Min: -600% Max: 0% Def: -300% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
unit: %
6 - 14
Group 21 Start/Stop Functions
21
01
Index
START/STOP FUNC
Start and stop modes of the motor. Note: Coast stop is always the stop mode in a fault situation.
START FUNCTION
Description: 1 = AUTO 2 = DC MAGN This setting is selected when starting to a rotating machine (Flying Start).
If this setting is selected, a higher starting torque can be achieved. The optimal magnetising current is calculated on the basis of the motor parameters. The pre-magnetising time is calculated using the motor information. 3 = CNST DCMAGN Selects the constant magnetising mode. This is the fastest starting method if the motor is at a standstill. The optimal magnetising current is calculated on the basis of the motor parameters. The pre-magnetising time is defined by parameter 21.02 CONST MAGN TIME. To ensure full magnetising, set the value the same as or higher than the rotor time constant. If not known, use the rule-of-thumb value given below.
This mode remembers last position of the motor shaft until next auxiliary voltage break of the RMIO board. This minimises possible shaft movement during the next start. See also parameter 21.11 START JERK COMP. Constant Magnetising Time MOTOR RATED POWER <10 kW > 100 to 200 ms 10 to 200 kW > 200 to 1000 ms 200 to 1000 kW > 1000 to 2000 ms Note: The starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetising is selected. Note: DC magnetising cannot be selected if parameter 99.08 MOTOR CTRL MODE = SCALAR Max: 3 Def: 1 Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I
Min: 1
02
Description: unit: ms type: R
Index
CONST MAGN TIME

Defines the magnetising time for the constant magnetising mode. Min: 30 ms Max: 10000 ms Def: 300 ms Integer scaling: 1 == 1 ms
6 - 15
Chapter 6 Parameter
Group 22 Ramp Functions
22
01
Index
RAMP FUNCTIONS
Speed reference ramp functions.
ACCELER TIME
Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: The time within the drive accelerates from zero speed to the speed defined by parameter 50.01 SPEED SCALING. Min: 0 s Max: 1000 s Def: 20 s Integer scaling: 100 == 1s
unit: s
02
Index
DECELER TIME
The time within the drive decelerates from the speed defined by parameter 50.01 SPEED SCALING to zero speed. Min: 0 s Max: 1000 s Def: 20 s Integer scaling: 100 == 1s
unit: s
04
Index
EME STOP RAMP

If an emergency stop by ramp is activated (OFF3), the drive will decelerate according to this parameter to zero speed. Min: 0 s Max: 3000 s Def: 20 s Integer scaling: 10 == 1s
unit: s
05
Index
SHAPE TIME
Speed reference softening time. This function is deactivated during an emergency stop condition.
MAX SPEED REFERENCE
SPEED REFERENCE CHANGE LIMITED B RAMP FUNCTION FILTERED SPEED REFERENCE CHANG
ACCELER TIME
RAMP SHAPE TIME
unit: s
type: R Description: type: R
Min: 0 s
Max: 1000 s
Def:
0s
Integer scaling:
100 == 1s
08
Index
BAL RAMP REF

The output of the speed ramp can be forced to the value defined by this parameter. This function is activated by setting 7.02 AUX CONTROL WORD bit 3 to 1. Min: See 20.01 Max: See 20.02 Def: 0 rpm Integer scaling: See Par 50.01
unit: rpm
6 - 16
Group 23 Speed Reference
23
01
Index
Group name:
SPEED REF
SPEED REF
Main speed reference input for the speed control of the drive. Min: See 20.01 Max: See 20.02 Def: 0 rpm Integer scaling:
INPUT
See par. 50.01
02
Index:
CONST SPEED 1
Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: R Constant speed reference is activated from 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD bit 8. See also MCW bits 4...6. Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000 rpm Def: 0 Integer scaling: See par. 50.01
unit:
03
Index:
CONST SPEED 2
Constant speed reference is activated from 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD bit 9. See also MCW bits 4...6. Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000 rpm Def: 0 Integer scaling: See par. 50.01
unit:
04
Index
SPEED CORRECTION
INPUT
unit: rpm
This parameter value can be added to the filtered reference value. Note: If the overriding system or RMIO application itself sends a reference value into this parameter, it must be set to zero before a stop command of the drive. Min: See 99.05 Max: See 99.05 Def: 0 rpm Integer scaling: See par. 50.01
05
Index
SPEED SHARE
Speed reference share coefficient. Min: 0% Max: 400% Def: 100% Integer scaling: 10 == 1%
06
Index
SPEED ERROR FILT

Speed reference and actual error filter time. Min: 0 ms Max: 999999 ms Def: 0 ms Integer scaling: 1 == 1 ms
07
Index
WINDOW INTG ON
Description: 1 = ON Integrator of the speed controller is released when window control is on. 0 = OFF Integrator of the speed controller is blocked when window control is on.
The Idea of Window Control

The idea of Window Control is to deactivate speed control as long as the speed deviation remains within the window set by parameters 23.08 WINDOW WIDTH POS and 23.09 WINDOW WIDTH NEG. This allows the external torque reference to affect the process directly. For example, in Master/Follower drives, where the follower is torque controlled, window control is used to keep the speed deviation of the follower under control. The speed error output to the speed controller is zero, when speed error is within the window. If the load of the follower disappears due to a disturbance in the process, the speed error will be outside the window. The speed controller reacts and its output is added to the torque reference. Speed control (only with P-control) brings the speed to the value SPEED REF4 + WINDOW WIDTH, if not integrator used. Note the permanent error of the P-control. This function could be called over speed or under speed protection in the torque control mode. To activate the window control it must be set 26.01 TORQUE SELECTOR to value ADD and set ACW1 (7.02) bit 7 WINDOW CTRL to 1.
unit:
type:
Min: 0
Max: 1
Def: OFF
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
6 - 17
Chapter 6 Parameter
23
08
Index
SPEED REF
WINDOW WIDTH POS
Positive speed limit for the window control, when the calculated speed error is positive. Speed error = speed reference speed actual. Note: Window width positive and negative is forced to zero, if SPEED REF4 + WINDOW WIDTH POS is > MAXIMUM SPEED or < MINIMUM SPEED. Min: 0 rpm Max: See 99.05 Def: 0 rpm Integer scaling: See par 50.01
unit: rpm
type: R
09
Index
WINDOW WIDTH NEG

Description: Negative speed limit for the window control, when the calculated speed error is negative. The maximum limit is the absolute value of parameter 23.08 WINDOW WIDTH POS. Note: Window width positive and negative is forced to zero, if SPEED REF4 + WINDOW WIDTH NEG is > MAXIMUM SPEED or < MINIMUM SPEED. Min: 0 Max: See 99.05 Def: 0 rpm Integer scaling: See par 50.01
unit: rpm
type: R
10
Index
SPEED STEP
Description:
INPUT
unit: rpm
type: R
An additional speed step can be given to the speed controller directly as an additive error input. Note: If the overriding system or RMIO application itself sends a reference value into this parameter, it must be set to zero before a stop command of the drive. Min: See 20.01 Max: See 20.02 Def: 0 rpm Integer scaling: See par 50.01
11
Index
ADDITIVE SP REF
INPUT
unit: rpm
Additive speed reference. Can be used as an additional speed reference with Multi Block Programming application. Min: -18000 rpm Max: 18000rpm Integer scaling: See parameter 50.01
12
Index
RFE SPEED FILTER

Description: Resonance frequency elimination function. The actual speed of the speed controller is nd filtered by a common 2 order filter to eliminate amplification of mechanical resonance frequencies by the speed controller. The filter is configured using parameters 129.02 FREQUENCY OF ZERO, 129.03 DAMPING OF ZERO, 129.04 FREQUENCY OF POLE and 129.05 DAMPING OF POLE. 0 = OFF 1 = ON
Warning!
When tuning the filter, the user should have basic understanding of frequency filters. Unqualified tuning of the parameters may amplify mechanical oscillations and cause damage to the drive hardware. When significant changes in the filter configuration parameters are done, it is recommended that the inverter is either in stopped state or that the filter is switched off to ensure stability of the speed controller. Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: OFF Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
type: B
6 - 18
23
13
Index
SPEED REF
FREQUENCY OF ZERO
RFE speed filter zero frequency is set near to the resonance frequency which is desired to be filtered out before the speed controller block (see the magnitude of frequency response below).
20
0 20 log10|H ( )|
-20
-40 f zero = 45 Hz f pole = 40 Hz -60 0 50 f [Hz]
f zero = 90 Hz f pole = 80 Hz 100 150
unit: Hz
type: R Description:
Min: 0.5 Hz
Max: 500 Hz
Def: 45 Hz
Integer scaling:
10 == 1 Hz
14
Index
DAMPING OF ZERO
RFE speed filter damping of zero. Value 0 corresponds to maximum rejection of resonance frequency 23.13 FREQUENCY OF ZERO.
20
0 20 log10|H ( )|
zero = 0.25 pole = 1
f zero = 45 Hz
-20 f zero = 45 Hz zero = 0 pole = 1
-40
-60 0 50 f [Hz] 100 150
Warning!
unit: type: R Damping of zero should always be smaller than 23.16 DAMPING OF POLE to ensure that resonance frequency band is rejected, not amplified, by the RFE filter. Min: -1 Max: 1 Def: 0 Integer scaling: 100 == 1.0
6 - 19
Chapter 6 Parameter
23
15
Index
Group name:
SPEED REF
FREQUENCY OF POLE RFE speed filter pole frequency is used to shape frequency response e.g. to have more narrow bandwidth and thus to have better dynamic properties.
40 20 20 log10|H ( )| 0 -20 -40 -60 0 50 f [Hz] 100 f zero = 45 Hz f pole = 50 Hz zero = 0 pole = 0.25
Description:
f zero = 45 Hz f pole = 30 Hz zero = 0 pole = 0.25
Warning!
unit: Hz type: R Description: Moving the frequency of pole far from 23.13 FREQUENCY OF ZERO amplifies frequencies near the frequency of pole and may cause damage to the drive hardware. Min: 0.5 Hz Max: 500 Hz Def: 40 Hz Integer scaling: 10 == 1 Hz
16
Index
DAMPING OF POLE
RFE speed filter damping of pole is used to shape frequency response. Value 1 eliminates the effect of the pole.
40 20 20 log10|H ( )| 0 -20 -40 -60 0 50 f [Hz] 100 f zero = 45 Hz f pole = 40 Hz zero = 0 pole = 0.05
Warning!
unit: type: R Damping of pole should always be higher than 23.14 DAMPING OF ZERO to ensure that resonance frequency band is rejected, not amplified, by the RFE filter. Min: -1 Max: 1 Def: 0.25 Integer scaling: 100 == 1.0
17
Index
RAMPED INCH REF

Additional speed reference before speed share function. Min: See 20.01 Max: See 20.02 Def: 0 rpm Integer scaling:
INPUT
See par. 50.01
18
Index
FOLL SPD CTRL COR

(valid: ABXR7120)
unit: %
A correction term used typically with speed controlled follower drive using load share function. Keep value 0% in the parameter 24.02 DROOP RATE. See section Control Block Diagrams in chapter Software Description. Min: 0% Max: 100% Def: 0% Integer scaling: 10 == 1%
6 - 20
23
19
Index
SPEED REF
FOLL SPD COR MODE (valid: ABXR7120)
Control mode selection with speed controlled torque follower. 1 = FAST Fast torque follower mode. This mode is used, when fast torque following is needed in follower drive during the dynamic change of load. 2 = SLOW Torque in the follower drive is balanced slowly after the dynamic torque change in master drive. Min: 1 Max: 2 Def: 1 Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I
6 - 21
Chapter 6 Parameter
Group 24 Speed Control
24
SPEED CONTROL
The speed controller is based on PID algorithm, which continuous time is presented as follows:
T s 1 u( s ) = KPS (bYr ( s ) Y ( s )) + ( + d )e( s ) sTIS T f s + 1

Variable u is the output of the controller, e is the speed error (difference between the actual and reference values).
1 Tis yr
+ -
Tds s+1 f
+
+ +
Kp
y
The PID controller also has set point weighting. y is the output; yr is the set point; u is the controllers output.
02
Index
DROOP RATE
Description: The amount of speed decrease caused by the load is determined by means of this parameter. A setting of 1% causes (with nominal torque reference) a 1% decrease in speed from the rated speed. Note: When speed follower load share function is used, keep value 0%. Min: 0% Max: 100% Def: 0% Integer scaling: 10 == 1%
unit: %
03
Index
KPS
Relative gain for the speed controller in remote and I/O control. If you select a value of 1, a 10% change in the error value (e.g. reference - actual value) causes also the speed controller output to change by 10%. Set also parameter 24.16 KPS LOCAL/EMSTOP. Min: 0 Max: 250 Def: 10 Integer scaling: 100 ==1
unit:
The Adaptive Speed Control as a Function of the Torque Reference

KPS
KPS
The adaptive gain of the speed controller is used to smooth out disturbances, which are caused, by low load and backlash. Moderate filtering of the speed error (parameter 23.04) is typically not enough to tune the drive.
+
KPS MIN
Torque ref
KPS WEAKPOINT
6 - 22
24
04
Index
Group name: Description: type: R
SPEED CONTROL
KPS MIN
KPS MIN determines the proportional gain when the speed controller output is zero. Min: 0 Max: 150 Def: 10 Integer scaling: 100 == 1
unit:
05
Index
KPS WEAKPOINT
The value of the speed controller output where the gain is KPS Min: 0% Max: see 20.05 Def: 0% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
06
Index
KPS WP FILT TIME

Description: type: R The rate of change for the proportional gain can be softened by this parameter. Min: 0 ms Max: 999999 ms Def: 100 ms Integer scaling: 1 == 1 ms
unit: ms
Integration Time Parameters of the Speed Controller

09
Index
TIS
Description: type: R Description: type: R Integration time for the speed controller. This defines the time within which the maximum output is achieved if a constant error value exists and the relative gain of the speed controller is 1. Min: 0.01 s Max: 1000 s Def: 2.5 s Integer scaling: 1000 == 1s
unit: s
11
Index
BAL REF
External value to be forced to the output of the speed controller when 7.02 AUX CONTROL WORD bit 8 BAL_NCONT is 1. Min: see 20.06 Max: see 20.05 Def: 0% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
unit: %
Derivation Parameters of the Speed Controller

12
Index
DERIVATION TIME
Description: type: R Derivation time for speed controller. Defines the time within which he speed controller derives the error value before the output of the speed controller is changed. If this is set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise as a PID controller. Min: 0 ms Max: 10000 ms Def: 0 ms Integer scaling: 1 == 1 ms
unit: ms
13
Index
DERIV FILT TIME

The derivation filter time constant. Min: 0 ms Max: 100000 ms Def: 8 ms Integer scaling: 1 == 1 ms
Acceleration Compensation Parameters

14
Index
ACC COMP DER TIME

Description: type: R Derivation time used during compensation of acceleration. In order to compensate inertia during acceleration, the derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller. This function is deactivated by setting the parameter to 0. Min: 0 s Max: 1000 s Def: 0 s Integer scaling: 10 == 1s
unit: s
15
Index
ACC COMPFILT TIME

Acceleration compensation term filter coefficient. Min: 0 ms Max: 999999 ms Def: 8 ms Integer scaling: 1 == 1 ms
16
Index
KPS LOC/EMSTOP
Description: type: R Relative gain for the speed controller in local control and emergency stop situation. If you select a value of 1, a 10% change in the error value (e.g. reference - actual value) causes also the speed controller output to change by 10%. Set also parameter 24.03 KPS. Min: 0 Max: 250 Def: 10 Integer scaling: 100 == 1
unit:
6 - 23
Chapter 6 Parameter
Group 25 Torque Reference
25
01
Index
TORQUE REF
Torque reference chain.
INPUT TORQUE REF A Torque reference. TORQUE REF A can be scaled by the parameter LOAD SHARE.
Min: see 20.06 Max: see 20.05 Def: 0% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
02
Index
TORQ REF A FTC

Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: type: R TORQUE REF A low pass filter time constant. Min: 0 ms Max: 60000 ms Def: 0 ms Integer scaling: 1 == 1 ms
unit: ms
03
Index
LOAD SHARE
TORQ REF A scaling factor which scales the external torque reference to a required level. Min: -400% Max: 400% Def: 100% Integer scaling: 10 == 1%
unit: %
04
Index
TORQUE REF B
INPUT
unit: %
Torque reference. Torque reference B is ramped by the parameters TORQ RAMP UP TIME and TORQ RAMP DN TIME. Min: see 20.06 Max: see 20.05 Def: 0% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
05
Description: unit: s type: R
Index
TORQ RAMP UP
Torque reference B ramp time from 0% to 100%. Min: 0 s Max: 120 s Def: 0 s Integer scaling: 100 == 1s
06
Index
TORQ RAMP DOWN

Description: type: R Description: type: R Torque reference B ramp time from 100% to 0%. Min: 0 s Max: 120 s Def: 0 s Integer scaling: 100 == 1s
unit: s
07
Index
TORQ ACT FILT TIME

Filter time constant for signal 1.07 MOTOR TORQFILT2 used for torque actual monitoring purposes. Min: 2 ms Max: 20000 ms Def: 100 ms Integer scaling: 1 == 1 ms
unit: ms
6 - 24
Group 26 Torque Reference Handling
26
01
Index
TORQ REF HANDLING

The torque reference can be given from the speed reference chain (TORQ REF2) or from the torque reference chain (TORQ REF1) depending on the control mode. This group defines how to handle the reference after the torque selector block.
TORQUE SELECTOR
Description: The torque reference selector includes. This selection forces the output of the torque selector to zero. 1 = ZERO Speed control 2 = SPEED 3 = TORQUE Torque control Note: To prevent the torque limitation in the generating mode, keep the minimum torque limits < 0 (zero) e.g. during fast deceleration in the positive speed direction. 4 = MINIMUM Minimum control. The drive follows smaller value of the TORQ REF1 and TORQ REF2. However, if the speed error becomes negative the drive follows TORQ REF2 until the speed error becomes positive again (latch function). Thus the drive never accelerates uncontrolled if the load is lost in the torque control. 5 = MAXIMUM Maximum control. The drive follows bigger value of the TORQ REF1 and TORQ REF2. However if the speed error becomes positive the drive follows TORQ REF2 until the speed error becomes negative again (latch function). Thus the drive never accelerates uncontrolled if the load is lost in the torque control. Add control. The output of the torque selector is a sum of the TORQ REF1 6 = ADD and TORQ REF2. When the Window Control is required, a bit 7 WINDOW_CTRL must be activated in the ACW2 (7.02). See also parameter 23.07 WINDOW INTG ON. 7 = PURE MINIMUM Pure minimum control without checking of speed error sign. The most negative value of torque references is selected. 8 = PURE MAXIMUM Pure maximum control without checking of speed error sign. The most positive value of torque references is selected. Min: 1 Max: 8 Def: 2 SPEED Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I Description: type: R Description: type: R
02
Index
LOAD COMPENSATION
INPUT
unit: %
Load compensation added to TORQ REF3. Note: If the overriding system or the RMIO application itself sends a reference value into this parameter, it must be set to zero before the stop command of the drive. Min: See 20.06 Max: See 20.05 Def: 0% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
03
Index
TORQUE STEP
INPUT
unit: %
Additional torque step added to TORQ REF4. Note: If the overriding system or the RMIO application itself sends a reference value into this parameter, it must be set to zero before the stop command of the drive. Min: See 20.06 Max: See 20.05 Def: 0% Integer scaling: 100 == 1%
Group 27 Flux Control
27
03
Index
FLUX CONTROL
FLUX REF
Flux reference value in percentage. This value is stored to FPROM memory when set by CDP 312 or DriveWindow. Min: see 27.05 Max: see 27.04 Def: 100% Integer scaling: 10 == 1%
unit: %
04
Index
FLUX MAX
Maximum limit of the flux percentage. Min: 100% Max: 140% Def: 140% Integer scaling: 10 == 1%
05
Index
FLUX MIN
Description: type: R Minimum limit of the flux percentage. Min: 0% Max: 100% Def: 25% Integer scaling: 10 == 1%
unit: %
6 - 25
Chapter 6 Parameter
Group 28 Motor Model
28
07
Index
MOTOR MODEL
LONG DISTANCE MOD
Long Distance Mode. This function is used to limit maximum voltage peaks in the motor circuit and to reduce the switching frequency of the inverter. This parameter is used only with ACS600 inverter units; it can also be used when the motor cables are long. 1 = ON Long distance mode enabled. 0 = OFF Long distance mode disabled. Min: Max: Def: ON Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
08
Index
TR TUNE
This coefficient affects the calculated rotor time constant according to the motor rating plate values. It is used if the nominal speed value of the motor rating plate does not correspond to the real speed. For example, if the real slip speed is 10% higher than the calculated slip speed stated on the motor rating plate, a coefficient value of 10% is set into this parameter. See also signal 3.06 TR. Note: This parameter is effective only if a pulse encoder is used. Min: -60% Max: 200% Def: 0% Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit: %
12
Index
FLYSTART CUR REF [%]

Defines the current reference used with flying start (start to a rotating motor) when no pulse encoder is used. If flying start fails (i.e. drive is unable to detect motor speed 01.02 SPEED ESTIMATED): Monitor signals 01.02 SPEED ESTIMATED and 01.06 MOTOR CURRENT with DriveWindow PC tool and increase the reference in steps of 5% until the flying start function is successfully performed (i.e. drive is able to detect 01.02 SPEED ESTIMATED). See also parameter 28.13 FLYSTART INIT DLY. Min: 0 Max: 100% Def: 60% Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit: %
13
Index
FLYSTART INIT DLY

Defines together with the motor characteristics the delay before the speed value estimated at the beginning of flying start is connected to the speed reference ramp output. Increase the delay, if the motor starts to rotate in the wrong direction or if the motor starts to rotate with the wrong speed reference. See also parameter 28.12 FLYSTART CUR REF [%]. Min: -60% Max: 60% Def: 25% Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit: %
14
Index
PQ METHOD
Activates the flux correction at low frequencies, <3 Hz, when the torque exceeds 30%. Effective in the motoring and generating modes. 1 = ON Active 0 = OFF Inactive Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: ON Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit: %
15
Index
RS20 [mOhm]
Defines the stator resistance of the motor model at 20C. By increasing the default value defined during ID run (does not include the temperature dependence of the resistance), the motor model can be fine tuned especially in applications where the motor or ambient temperature is not measured. Note: If stator resistance value is too high, the desired starting torque cannot be achieved. *) The maximum value depends on the defined motor parameters (99 START-UP DATA). Min: 0 Max: ) mOhm Def: Set during ID run Integer scaling: 28676 = 1 Ohm
unit: mOhm type: R
6 - 26
Group 29 Scalar Control
29
SCALAR CONTROL
Scalar control is activated by setting parameter 99.08 MOTOR CTRL MODE to SCALAR. This parameter group is not visible when DTC control mode is selected. Note: The following start-up parameters have no effect in scalar control: 99.03 MOTOR NOM CURRENT 99.05 MOTOR NOM SPEED 99.06 MOTOR NOM POWER Note: Parameter 50.01 SPEED SCALING has only affect for scaling of the actual speed in the Scalar motor control mode. Scalar control parameters can be seen in the Control Diagram (chapter 5). The scalar control mode is recommended for multimotor drives when the number of motors connected to the drive is variable. Scalar control is also recommended when the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal current of the inverter, or the inverter is used for test purposes with no motor connected. The motor identification Run, flying start, torque control, DC HOLD, motor phase loss check, and stall functions are disabled in the scalar control mode.
01
Index
FREQUENCY REF
This is an input for the frequency reference. Min: See 29.03 Max: See 29.02 Def: 0 Integer scaling:
INPUT
100 == 1 Hz
02
Index
FREQUENCY MAX
Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: Operating range maximum frequency. This parameter has an internal link to the parameter SPEED MAX; if SPEED MAX is changed, this parameter is changed accordingly by the application program. Min: See 29.03 Max: 300 Hz Def: See 20.01 Integer scaling: 100 == 1 Hz
unit: Hz
03
Index
FREQUENCY MIN
Operating range maximum frequency. This parameter has an internal link to the parameter SPEED MIN; if SPEED MIN is changed, this parameter is changed accordingly by the application program. Min: -300 Hz Max: See 29.02 Def: See 20.02 Integer scaling: 100 == 1 Hz
unit: Hz
04
Index
IR COMPENSATION
This parameter sets the extra relative voltage that is fed to the motor at zero frequency. The range is 030% of motor nominal voltage. U(%)
Umax
a f(Hz)
Field weakening pointUmax
unit: %
type: R
Min: 0%
Max: 30%
Def: 0
Integer scaling:
100 == 1
6 - 27
Chapter 6 Parameter
Group 30 Fault Functions
30
01
Index
FAULT FUNCTIONS
MOT THERM P MODE
Motor thermal protection mode selection. The selections are based on the thermal model defined by the drive (DTC) or the user (USER MODE). Motor heat-up is calculated assuming a load curve. The motor is at the estimated temperature (value of 01.18 MOTOR TEMP EST saved at power switch off) when the power is switched on. With the first power switch on, the motor is at the ambient temperature (30C). Note: The motor thermal model can be used when only one motor is connected to the inverter. The drive defines the thermal model values during the Motor Identification 1 = DTC Run. (See parameter 99.06.) Note: This mode can be used for ABB motors up to 800 A of IN. Above that, USER MODE is the only valid selection. 2 = USER MODE The user can define the thermal model values using parameters 30.0930.12 and 30.2830.31. Min: 1 Max: 2 Def: 1 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
Description:
unit:
02
Index
MOTOR THERM PROT

Operation in case of an overload based on the motor thermal model protection (parameter 30.01 MOT THERM P MODE). 1 = FAULT 2 = WARNING 3 = NO Inactive Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I
Motor Thermal Model User Mode

09
Index
MOTOR THERM TIME

Description: Time for 63% temperature rise. Used with the motor thermal model when parameter 30.01 MOT THERM P MODE is set to USER MODE. For monitoring of the calculated temperature, see signal 1.18 MOTOR TEMP EST. The USER MODE is only used when motor nominal current is >800 A.
Motor Load
Temp rise
100%
63%
Motor Thermal Time
unit: s
type: R
If thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA class motors is desired, the thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s, for Class 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s. Min: 256 s Max: 9999 s Def: s Integer scaling: 1 == 1s
6 - 28
Table 6 - 1 Motor Thermal Times for ABB HXR and AMA Motors.
HXR motor type 400S 400L 450L 500L 560L AMA motor type all types Temp. rise time 2700 s 3600 s 4200 s 4800 s 6000 s 1500 s
30
10
Index
FAULT FUNCTIONS
MOTOR LOAD CURVE
The motor load curve sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor. It is active when USER MODE is selected in parameter 30.01 MOT THERM P MODE. When set to 100%, the maximum allowable load is equal to the value of Start-up Data parameter 99.03 MOTOR NOM CURRENT. The load curve level should be adjusted if the ambient temperature differs from the nominal value.
99.02 MOTOR NOM CURRENT
I(%)
150 100 50
30.10 MOTOR LOAD CURVE
30.11 ZERO SPEED LOAD
Speed
30.12 BREAK POINT
unit: %
Min: 50%
Max: 150%
Def:
100%
Integer scaling:
1 == 1%
11
Index
ZERO SPEED LOAD

The maximum motor load at zero speed for the load curve. A higher value can be used if the motor has an external fan motor to boost the cooling when running the drive at a low frequency. See the motor manufacturers recommendations. This parameter is used when USER MODE is selected in parameter 30.01 MOT THERM P MODE. Min: 25% Max: 150% Def: 74% Integer scaling: 1 == 1%
unit: %
12
Index
BREAK POINT
The break point frequency for the load curve. This parameter defines the point at which the motor load curve begins to decrease from the maximum value set by parameter 30.10 MOTOR LOAD CURVE to the value of parameter 30.11 ZERO SPEED LOAD. Used when the USER MODE is selected in parameter 30.01 MOT THERM P MODE. Min: 1 Hz Max: 300 Hz Def: 45 Hz Integer scaling: 100 == 1 Hz
unit: Hz
type: R
6 - 29
Chapter 6 Parameter
Stall Protection
30
13
Index
FAULT FUNCTIONS
STALL FUNCTION
This parameter defines the operation of the stall protection. The protection is activated if the following conditions are valid for a time longer than the period set by parameter 30.15 STALL TIME LIM. 1. The output frequency is below the level set by parameter 30.14. STALL FREQ HI. 2. The application is at stall limit set by the user (defined by parameters 20.0420.10). Operation in case of a motor stall condition. 1 = NO No action 2 = WARNING A warning is produced. 3 = FAULT A fault is produced. Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1
unit:
type: I
Integer scaling:
14
Index
STALL FREQ HI
Defines the frequency limit for the stall protection. See parameter 30.13 STALL FUNCTION. Min: 0.5 Hz Max: 50 Hz Def: 20 Hz Integer scaling: 100 == 1 Hz
15
Index
STALL TIME
Time value for the stall protection. See parameter 30.13 STALL FUNCTION. Min: 10 s Max: 400 s Def: 20 s Integer scaling: 1 == 1 s
6 - 30
Underload Protection
30
16
Index

TM
FAULT FUNCTIONS
UNDERLOAD FUNC
The absence of motor load may indicate a process malfunction. The protection wakes up if 1. The motor torque falls below the load curve selected by parameter 30.18 UNDERLOAD CURVE 2. The above conditions have been valid longer than the time set by parameter 30.17 UNDERLOAD TIME 3. Output frequency is higher than 10% of the nominal motor frequency. The protection function assumes that the drive is equipped with a motor of the rated power.
Underload curve
Underload region
f
0.1*fn
unit:
type: I
Min: 1
Max: 3
Operation in case of the underload fault. 1 = NO Protection is inactive. 2 = WARNING A warning is produced 3 = FAULT A fault is produced Def: 1 Integer scaling:
17
Index
UNDERLOAD TIME
Time limit for underload logic. Min: 0 s Max: 600 s Def: 600 s Integer scaling: 1 == 1
18
Index
UNDERLOAD CURVE
Description: Selects the load curve for the underload function. See parameter 30.16 UNDERLOAD FUNC.
TM (%) 100 80 60 40 20 0 N
unit: type: I Description: type: B Min: 1 Max: 5 Def: 1
3
70 %
2 1
50 %
5
4
30 %
2.4 * N
Integer scaling:
19
Index
MOTOR PHASE LOSS

Operation in case a motor phase is lost. 1 = FAULT Enabled. 0 = NO Disabled. Min: Max: Def: NO
unit:
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
6 - 31
Chapter 6 Parameter
30
20
Index
FAULT FUNCTIONS
EARTH FAULT
Operation in case of an earth fault condition. Note: A warning cannot be selected with parallel connected inverters. A fault is produced and the drive is tripped. 1 = FAULT 0 = WARNING A warning is produced and the drive continues running. Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: FAULT Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
21
Index
PANEL LOSS
Operation in case local control (control panel or DriveWindow) is lost. A fault is produced. 1 = FAULT 0 = LAST SPEED A warning is produced. Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: FAULT Integer scaling:
unit:
1 == 1
22
Index
UNDERVOLTAGE CTL
Activates the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link. If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor torque in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit. By decreasing the motor torque, the inertia of the load will cause and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop. This will act as a power-loss ride-through functionality in systems with high inertia, such as a centrifuge or a fan. 1 = ON Active 0 = OFF Inactive Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: OFF Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
23
Index
OVERVOLTAGE CTL
Activates the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link. Fast breaking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit, the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque. Note: If a brake chopper and resistor or a regenerative supply section are included in the drive, the controller must be OFF. 1 = ON Active 0 = OFF Inactive (This is the normal mode with regenerative supply sections.) Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: ON Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
24
Index
PPCC FAULT MASK

Activates the fault mask. Unwanted AINT / NINT board current measurement or communication faults can be masked in situations where the DC intermediate circuit voltage has been disconnected but the RMIO board has an external power supply and fault indication is not needed. A fault is produced only when the motor is started. See also parameter 31.02 START INHIBIT ALM. 0 = NO Fault mask is inactive. 1 = YES Fault mask is active. Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: NO Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
type: B
6 - 32
30
25
Index
FAULT FUNCTIONS
EARTH FAULT LEVEL
The earth fault trip level is set through the PPCC link by means of this parameter (non parallel connected ACS600 inverters R8i, R9i, R10i, R11i and R12i only and R8i inverter module with ACS800). For the parallel connected inverters this function is the current unbalance protection of the inverter output (e.g. short circuit). ACS800 Note: DO NOT change earth fault level with parallel connected inverter modules. With parallel connected inverters, the fault is CUR UNBAL x instead of EARTH FAULT. ACS 600:(*) Default value: 4 for non-parallel connected and 5 for parallel connected inverter. ACS800: type specific The earth fault level is given in percent of the current measurement range. 0 = Disabled 1 = 1% unbalance in the sum current 2 = 3% unbalance in the sum current 3 = 8% unbalance in the sum current 4 = 13% unbalance in the sum current 5 = 18% unbalance in the sum current 6 = 28% unbalance in the sum current 7 = 39% unbalance in the sum current 8 = 62% unbalance in the sum current Min: 0 Max: 8 Def: (*) Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
type: R
Motor Thermal Model User Mode Alarm and Fault Limits
30
28
Index
Group name: Description: type: I
FAULT FUNCTIONS
THERM MOD ALM LIM
An alarm temperature limit for the thermal model protection of the motor. The thermal model of the motor is activated by parameter 30.01 MOTOR THERM PMODE and calculated temperature is shown by the signal 1.18 MOTOR TEMP EST. Min: 0C Max: 300C Def: 90C Integer scaling:
unit: C
29
Description: unit: C type: I
Index
THERM MOD FLT LIM

A trip temperature limit for the thermal model protection of the motor. Min: 0C Max: 300C Def: 110C Integer scaling:
30
Index
MOT NOM TEMP RISE

Description: Motor nominal temperature rise when loading with motor nominal current. Temperature
MOTOR NOMINAL TEMPERATURE RISE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE Time
unit: C
type: R
Note: If ABB motor rating plate has coefficient MNTRC, multiply it by 80C to get the motor nominal temperature rise. With non-ABB motors, contact motor manufacturer. Min: 0C Max: 300C Def: 80C Integer scaling: 1 == 1C
31
Description: unit: C type: R
Index
AMBIENT TEMP
Typical motor ambient temperature. Used only with motor thermal protection model. Min: -40C Max: 100C Def: 30C Integer scaling: 1 == 1C
6 - 33
Chapter 6 Parameter
Motor Temperature Feedback to the Motor Model

32
Index
RS TEMP SCALE
Description: Tuning coefficient for temperature dependence of stator resistance Rs based on the measured temperature with PT100 sensors or internal motor thermal protection model. The measured total resistance includes motor cable and stator resistance. With pulse encoder feedback, 100% compensation can often be used. Undercompensation decreases the starting torque at high motor temperatures. Min: 0% Max: 200% Def: 40% Integer scaling: 1 == 1%
unit: %
type: R
Group 31 Fault Functions
31
02
Index
FAULT FUNCTIONS
START INHIBIT ALM
Logging of the Prevention of Unexpected Start-up alarm START INHIBI (9.04 AW_1 bit 0) to the fault/alarm logger can be prevented using this parameter. This function has no effect on status or alarm words. 0 = OFF Logging disabled 1 = ON Logging enabled Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
type: B
Group 34 Brake Chopper
34
01
Index
BRAKE CHOPPER
BRAKE CHOPPER CTL
Activates the optional brake chopper control with ACS800 inverter modules R2R6. 0 = OFF Inactive 1 = ON Active Min: Max: Def: OFF Integer scaling:
unit:
02
Index
BR OVERLOAD FUNC
Activates the overload protection of the brake resistor. The user-adjustable variables are parameters 34.03, 34.04 and 34.05. Inactive 0 = NO 1 = WARNING Active. If the drive detects an overload, it generates a warning. Active. If the drive detects an overload, it trips on a fault. 2 = FAULT Min: Max: Def: NO Integer scaling: 1==1
unit:
type: Description: type: R
03
Index
BR RESISTANCE
Defines the resistance value of the brake resistor. The value is used for brake chopper protection. See parameter 34.02. 0100 ohm Resistance value Min: 0 Max: 10000 Def: 0.000 Integer scaling: 1==1
unit: ohm
04
Index
BR THERM TCONST
Description: type: R Defines the thermal time constant of the brake resistor. The value is used in the overload protection. See parameter 34.02. 010000 s Time constant. Min: 0.000 Max: 9999.998 Def: 0.000 Integer scaling: 1==1
unit: s
6 - 34
34
05
Index
BRAKE CHOPPER
MAX CONT BR POWER
Defines the maximum continuous braking power witch will raise the resistor temperature to the maximum allowed value. The value is used in the overload protection. See parameter 34.02 BR OVERLOAD FUN. 0.0110000 kW Power Min: 0.000 Max: 9999.998 Def: 0 Integer scaling: 1==1
unit: kW
type: R
Group 37 Function Generator
37
01
Index
FUNCTION GENERATOR
The five point (x1,y1), (x2,y2), (x3,y3), (x4,y4), (x5,y5) function curve. This function is executed on 100 ms time level.
ENABLE
Description: Activates function. 0 = OFF Inactive 1 = ON Active Min: Max:
unit:
type: B Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: type: R Description: type: R
Def: OFF
Integer scaling:
03
Index
OUT
The output of the function curve. Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 0 Integer scaling: 1==1
unit:
04
Index
X1
The value for the x-axis 1. point. (x1, y1). Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 0 Integer scaling: 1==1
unit:
05
Index
Y1
The value for the y-axis 1. point. (x1, y1). Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 0 Integer scaling: 1==1
unit:
06
Index
X2
unit:
07
Index
Y2
unit:
08
Index
X3
unit:
09
Index
Y3
unit:
10
Index
X4
unit:
11
Index
Y4
unit:
12
Index
X5
unit:
6 - 35
Chapter 6 Parameter
37
13
Index
FUNCTION GENERATOR
Y5
unit:
Group 50 Speed Measurement
50
01
Index
SPEED MEASUREMENT
SPEED SCALING
This parameter defines the speed reference (in rpm) that corresponds to the value of 20000 from the overriding system or I/O. This parameter has only scaling effect to speed actual signals in the scalar control mode. Min: 0 rpm Max: 100000 rpm Def: 1500 rpm Integer scaling: 15000 = 1500 rpm
unit: rpm
02
Index
SPEED MEAS MODE

Description: Selects the measurement type for the pulse encoder mode. 0 = A_-B DIR Channel A: positive edges calculated for speed. Channel B: direction. Channel A: positive and negative edges calculated for speed. 1 = A_-_ Channel B: not used 2 = A_-_B DIR Channel A: positive and negative edges are calculated for speed. Channel B: direction. 3 = A_-_B_-_ All edges of the signals are calculated. Min: 0 Max: 3 Def: 3 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
type: I Description: type: I Description: type: R Description: type: B Description: type: R Description: type: PB Description: type: PB Description: type: R
03
Index
SPEED FB SEL
Source of the speed feedback to the speed controller. 1 = INTERNAL Calculated speed estimate 2 = ENCODER Pulse encoder module 1 (see also parameter 98.01 ENCODER MODULE). Min: 0 Max: 2 Def: 1 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
04
Index
ENCODER PULSE NR
Number of pulse encoder 1 pulses per revolution. Min: 1 Max: 30000 Def: 2048 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
05
Index
ENCODER ALM/FLT
Determines if speed measurement 1 error causes a warning or a fault. 1 = FAULT The drive trips on fault ENCODER ERR. 0 = ALARM The drive generates alarm ENCODER ERR. Min: Max: Def: ALARM Integer scaling:
unit:
1 == 1
06
Index
SP ACT FILT TIME

The time constant of the first order actual speed filter. Min: 0 ms Max: 999999 ms Def: 4 ms Integer scaling: 1 == 1 ms
unit: ms
08
Index
POS COUNT INIT LO

Position counter initial low word value when the mode is PULSE EDGES. Min: 0 Max: 65536 Def: 0 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
09
Index
POS COUNT INIT HI

Position counter initial high word value when the mode is PULSE EDGES. Min: 0 Max: 65536 Def: 0 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
10
Index
ABOVE SPEED LIMIT

When the actual speed has reached the value of this parameter, 8.01 MAIN STATUS WORD bit 10 is set to 1. Min: See 20.01 Max: See 20.02 Def: 0 Integer scaling: See 50.01
unit: rpm
6 - 36
50
11
Index
SPEED MEASUREMENT
ENCODER DELAY
Time of no encoder 1 pulses received, and the drive being at the torque or current limit simultaneously, before an alarm or a fault is produced. Setting this parameter to 0 disables the function at the torque or current limit. Min: 0 Max: 50000 Def: 1000 Integer scaling: 1 == 1 ms
unit: ms
12
Index
MOTOR SP FILT TIME ZERO DETECT DELAY

Description:
(available in sw ver 5.2x)

1 == 1 ms
Filter time constant for monitoring signal 1.01 MOTOR SPEED FILT. Min: 2 ms Max: 20000 ms Def: 500 ms Integer scaling:
13
Index:
This parameter can be adjusted for the best possible performance at the low speeds when a pulse encoder is used and pulses are not received during the 1 ms measurement cycle. The definition of low speeds depends on the type of the used encoder. If the encoder pulse number is 2048 and both edges of both of the channels (A and B) are counted, the number of pulses per revolution is 8192. This means that at least one pulse per millisecond is received at 7.3 rpm (1 pulse/ms 1000 pulses/s 1000/8192 rev/s = 7.3 rpm). Thus 4 ms between pulses corresponds to 1.8 rpm and 80 ms to 0.09 rpm. See the following example with parameter settings: 50.13 = 250 ms, 50.14 = 4 ms, constant speed reference. After receiving a pulse, measured speed is calculated and speed control P-part is set to a value related to speed error. When no new pulses are received within 1 ms, the measured speed and P-part (due to the constant speed reference) are held. After the SPEED HOLD TIME, the P-part is forced to zero so that speed control will not be based on an absolute speed measurement value. After ZERO DETECT DELAY, it is assumed that speed is zero, causing clearing of measured speed and allowing use of P-part. After the next pulse, some measured speed is calculated again and P-part accordingly. Ppart is cleared again after SPEED HOLD TIME. The measured speed is not set to zero anymore, because a new pulse comes before ZERO DETECT DELAY. The time between pulses 3 and 4 is still longer than SPEED HOLD TIME and P-part is forced to zero. The time between pulses 4 and 5 is already so short that neither P-part nor the measured speed is forced to zero.
1 2 t1 0 t2 t2 t2 0 3 4 5
tacho pulse edges t1 measured speed t2 speed control P-part t1 = zero detect delay t2 = speed hold time
Figure 6 - 2 ZERO DETECT DELAY = 250ms (t1) and SPEED HOLD TIME = 4ms (t2).
With the configuration of figure 6 -3 there is a long ZERO DETECT DELAY that gives accurate speed measurement. The short SPEED HOLD TIME keeps the speed control stable in many cases, because speed control output is not influenced by the earlier speed measurement sample. On the other hand, if P-part is very large, forcing it to zero causes undesirable torque steps. The tuning values depends on the clearances of mechanics. Therefore after increasing these parameter values, check that the torque actual value is still smooth. Min: 1 ms Max: 2000 ms Def: 4 ms Integer scaling:
unit:
ms
type: I
6 - 37
Chapter 6 Parameter
50
14
Index:
SPEED MEASUREMENT
SPEED HOLD TIME
The time after the P-part of speed control is forced to zero, if the time has been elapsed and no new pulses have been received after the last sample. By increasing the value, it amplifies the effect of P-part at the low speeds due to the longer effect time of P-part. Oscillation can occur, if the time is too long. See description of parameter 50.13 ZERO DETECT DELAY above. Note: The value of SPEED HOLD TIME <= ZERO DETECT DELAY. Min: See 50.13 Max: 2000 ms Def: 4 ms Integer scaling:
unit:
ms
type: I
15
Index
ENCODER2 PULSE NR
Description: type: R Description: Number of encoder 2 pulses per revolution. Min: 1 Max: 30000 Def: 2048 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
16
Index
SP MEAS MODE ENC2

Selects the measurement type for the pulse encoder 2 mode. 0 = A_-B DIR Channel A: positive edges calculated for speed. Channel B: direction. Channel A: positive and negative edges calculated for speed. 1 = A_-_ Channel B: not used 2 = A_-_B DIR Channel A: positive and negative edges are calculated for speed. Channel B: direction. 3 = A_-_B_-_ All edges of the signals are calculated. Min: 0 Max: 3 Def: 3 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
17
Index
ENCODER 2 ALM/FLT
Determines if encoder module NTAC-02 communication error on DDCS channel CH2 causes a warning or a fault. 1 = FAULT A drive is tripped 0 = ALARM A warning is generated. Min: Max: Def: ALARM Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
type: B
18
Index
ENC2 FILTER TIME

The time constant of the first order actual speed filter for encoder 2. Min: 0 ms Max: 10000 ms Def: 2 ms Integer scaling: 1 == 1 ms
19
Index
ENC2 CHANNEL
Description: type: S/I DDCS Channel for encoder 2 module. 1 = CH1 DDCS channel 1 2 = CH2 DDCS channel 2 Min: 1 Max: 2
unit:
Def:
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
Group 51 Master Adapter (Field Bus Adapter)
51
MASTER ADAPTER
This group defines the communication parameters for a fieldbus adapter module. The parameter names are copied from the module when its connection to the drive is activated using parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE. For details on the parameters, refer to the manual of the fieldbus module and chapter Fieldbus control. Note: Any changes in these parameters take effect only upon the next power-up of the adapter module or refreshing by parameter FBA PAR REFRESH. Note: With NMBA-0x module, choose parameter 70.19 CH0 HW CONNECTION to value RING to enable regeneration of received messages in the DDCS link. FIELDBUS PAR1 (Module type and software version)
01
Index
unit:
Min:
Max:
Def:
Integer scaling:
6 - 38
51
02...33
Index
MASTER ADAPTER
FIELDBUS PAR2...33 (According to module type)
Min: Max: Def: Integer scaling:
unit:
Group 52 Standard Modbus
52
01
Index
STANDARD MODBUS
These settings for the Standard Modbus Link are only visible, when the STANDARD MODBUS has been selected by parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE. See chapter Fieldbus control and RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter Users Manual [3AFE64498851(English)].
STATION NUMBER
Description: type: I Description: Defines the address of the device. Two units with the same address are not allowed on-line. Min: 1 Max: 247 Def: 1 Integer scaling:
unit:
02
Index
BAUDRATE
Defines the transfer rate of the link. 600 bits/s 1 = 600 2 = 1200 1200 bits/s 3 = 2400 2400 bits(s 4 = 4800 4800 bits/s 5 = 9600 9600 bits/s 6 = 19200 19200 bits/s Min: 1 Max: 6
unit:
Def: 5
Integer scaling:
03
Index
PARITY
Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s). The same setting must be used in all on-line stations. 1 = NONE1STOPBIT No parity bit, one stop bit 2 = NONE2STOPBIT No parity, 2 stop bits Odd parity indication bit, one stop bit 3 = ODD Even parity indication bit, one stop bit 4 = EVEN Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 3 Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I
Group 53 User Parameters
53
01
Index
Group name:
USER PARAMETERS
NUMERIC 1
Users numeric parameter for Multi Block Programming purposes. Min: -8388608 Max: 8388607 Integer scaling:
This parameter group consists of unconnected parameters to be used with application blocks. Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I
unit:
02
Index
NUMERIC 2
unit:
03
Index
NUMERIC 3
unit:
04
Index
NUMERIC 4
unit:
05
Index
NUMERIC 5
unit:
6 - 39
Chapter 6 Parameter
53
06
Index
Group name: Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: S Description: type: S Description: type: S Description: type: S Description: type: S Description: type: S Description: type: S Description: type: S Description: type: S Description: type: S Description: type: S
USER PARAMETERS
NUMERIC 6
unit:
07
Index
NUMERIC 7
unit:
08
Index
NUMERIC 8
unit:
09
Index
NUMERIC 9
unit:
10
Index
NUMERIC 10
unit:
11
Index
STRING 1
Users ASCII string type of parameter for the alarm or fault text definition of EVENT block. Min: 0 chars Max: 9 chars Integer scaling: -
unit:
12
Index
STRING 2
unit:
13
Index
STRING 3
unit:
14
Index
STRING 4
unit:
15
Index
STRING 5
unit:
16
Index
STRING 6
unit:
17
Index
STRING 7
unit:
18
Index
STRING 8
unit:
19
Index
STRING 9
unit:
20
Index
STRING 10
unit:
21
Index
STRING 11
unit:
6 - 40
53
22
Index
Group name: Description: type: S Description: type: S Description: type: S
USER PARAMETERS
STRING 12
unit:
23
Index
STRING 13
unit:
24
Index
STRING 14
unit:
6 - 41
Chapter 6 Parameter
Group 55 Appl Prog1
55
01
Index
APPL PROG1
STATUS
Shows the value of the application task 1 status word. The table below shows the alternative bit states and the corresponding values on the panel display. STOPPED if all bits are false. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. CDP312R Panel display indicates: Bit RUNNING 1 B0 EDITING 2 B1 CHECKING 4 B2 FAULTED 8 B3 Min: 0 Max: 8 Def: Integer scaling:
Index
unit:
type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: P
02
Index
FAULTED PAR
Points out the faulted parameter in the application task 1. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: 0 Max: 32768 Def: Integer scaling:
unit:
05
Index
BLOCK 1
Selects the function block type for block 1 in the application task 1. This parameter is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. See the section Function blocks. Min: 0 Max: 32768 Def: Integer scaling:
unit:
06
Index
INPUT 1
An input for parameter or constant value. This parameter is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. See the corresponding function block description. Format for input is [Group.Index.bit]. Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
unit:
07
Index
INPUT 2
Description: type: P An input for parameter or constant value. This parameter is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. See the corresponding function block description. Format for input is [Group.Index.bit]. Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
unit:
08
Index
INPUT 3
unit:
09
Index
OUTPUT
Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: P Stores and displays the output of block 1. This parameter is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. See the section Function blocks. Min: 0 Max: 32768 Def: Integer scaling:
unit:
10
Index
BLOCK 2
unit:
11
Index
INPUT 1
unit:
6 - 42
55
12
Index
Group name: Description: type: P
APPL PROG1
INPUT 2
unit:
13
Index
INPUT 3
unit:
14
Index
OUTPUT
Description: type: I Stores and displays the output of block 2. This parameter is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. See the section Function blocks. Min: 0 Max: 32768 Def: Integer scaling:
unit:
From block 55.05 to the last block 155.54 has same parameter order structure.
Group 56 Appl Task 1 Cntr
56
01
Index
Group name:
APPL TASK 1 CTRL

APPL TASK1 CNTR
Selects the operation mode for the fastest application task program. Stop. The program can be edited. 1 = STOP 2 = START Run. The program cannot be edited. Stop to edit mode. The program can be edited. 3 = EDIT Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Integer scaling:
This parameter group consists of execution control for the fast application task.
Description:
unit:
02
Index
EDIT COMMAND
Selects the command for the block placed in the location defined by parameter 56.03. This parameter is used by DriveAP PC tool. Home value. The value automatically restores to NO after an editing 1 = NO command has been executed. Shifts the block in the location defined by parameter 56.03 and the 2 = PUSH subsequent blocks one location up. A new block can be placed in the emptied location. Deletes the block in the location defined by parameter 56.03 and shifts 3 = DELETE the subsequent blocks one step down. Read protects input connections of the blocks. 4 = PROTECT 5 = UNPROTECT Unprotects read protection of input connections. Min: 1 Max: 5 Def: 1 Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I Description: type: I
03
Index
EDIT BLOCK
Defines the block location number for the command selected by parameter 56.02. This parameter is used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: 1 Max: 15 Def: 0 Integer scaling:
unit:
6 - 43
Chapter 6 Parameter
56
04
Index
APPL TASK 1 CTRL

TIMELEVEL_SEL
Selection of the execution cycle time for application task 1. 1 = 10 ms Application task 1 is running on 10 ms interval. Also digital and analogue inputs of RMIO are read on this time level. Note: Only limited number of blocks can be used on 10 ms level. An alarm APPL SW OVERLOAD is indicated and application task execution is delayed. 2 = 20 ms Application task 1 is running on 20 ms interval. This is normally used task interval. Min: 1 Max: 2 Def: 2 Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I
05
Description: unit: hex type: I
Index
PASS CODE
Pass code to deactivate protection of input pin connections. Min: 0 h Max: FFFFFF h Def: 0 Integer scaling:
Group 57 Appl Prog2
57
01
Index
APPL PROG2
STATUS
unit:
Shows the value of the application task 2 status word. The table below shows the alternative bit states and the corresponding values on the panel display. STOPPED if all bits are false. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. CDP312R Panel display indicates: Bit RUNNING 1 B0 EDITING 2 B1 CHECKING 4 B2 FAULTED 8 B3 type: I Min: 0 Max: 8 Def: Integer scaling:
02
Index
FAULTED PAR
Description: Points out the faulted parameter in the application task 2. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. type: I Min: 0 Max: 32768 Def: Integer scaling:
unit:
05
Index
BLOCK 1
Description: Selects the function block type for block 1 in the application task 2. This parameter is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. See the section Function blocks. type: I Min: 0 Max: 32768 Def: Integer scaling:
unit:
06
Index
INPUT 1
Description: An input for parameter or constant value. This parameter is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. See the corresponding function block description. Format for input is [Group.Index.bit]. type: P Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
unit:
07
Index
INPUT 2
unit:
08
Index
INPUT 3
unit:
6 - 44
57
09
Index
APPL PROG2
OUTPUT
unit:
Stores and displays the output of block 1. This parameter is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. See the section Function blocks. type: I Min: 0 Max: 32768 Def: Integer scaling:
10
Index
BLOCK 2
Description: Selects the function block type for block 2 in the application task 2. This parameter is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. See the section Function blocks. type: I Min: 0 Max: 32768 Def: Integer scaling:
unit:
11
Index
INPUT 1
unit:
12
Index
INPUT 2
unit:
13
Index
INPUT 3
unit:
14
Index
OUTPUT
Description: Stores and displays the output of block 2. This parameter is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. See the section Function blocks. type: I Min: 0 Max: 32768 Def: Integer scaling:
unit:
From block 57.05 to last block 57.254 has same parameter order structure.
Group 58 Appl Task 2 Cntr
58
01
Index
Group name:
APPL TASK 2 CTRL

APPL TASK 2 CNTR
Selects the operation mode for the medium fast application task program. 1 = STOP Stop. The program can be edited. 2 = START Run. The program cannot be edited. Stop to edit mode. The program can be edited. 3 = EDIT Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Integer scaling:
This parameter group consists of execution control for the medium fast application task.
Description:
unit:
type: I
6 - 45
Chapter 6 Parameter
58
02
Index
APPL TASK 2 CTRL

EDIT COMMAND
Selects the command for the block placed in the location defined by parameter 58.03. This parameter is used by DriveAP PC tool. Home value. The value automatically restores to NO after an editing 1 = NO command has been executed. Shifts the block in the location defined by parameter 58.03 and the 2 = PUSH subsequent blocks one location up. A new block can be placed in the emptied location. Deletes the block in the location defined by parameter 58.03 and shifts the 3 = DELETE subsequent blocks one step down. Read protects input connections of the blocks. 4 = PROTECT 5 = UNPROTECT Unprotect read protection of input connections. Min: 1 Max: 5 Def: 1 Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I
03
Index
EDIT BLOCK
unit:
04
Index
TIME LEVEL SEL

Indicates the fixed execution cycle time for application task 2. Min: 1 Max: 1 Def: 1 Integer scaling:
unit:
05
Description: unit: hex type: I
Index
PASS CODE
6 - 46
Group 59 Appl Prog3
59
01
Index
APPL PROG3
STATUS
Shows the value of the application task 3 status word. The table below shows the alternative bit states and the corresponding values on the panel display. STOPPED if all bits are false. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. CDP312R Panel display indicates: Bit RUNNING 1 B0 EDITING 2 B1 CHECKING 4 B2 FAULTED 8 B3 Min: 0 Max: 8 Def: Integer scaling:
Index
unit:
type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: P
02
Index
FAULTED PAR
Points out the faulted parameter in the application task 3. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: 0 Max: 32768 Def: Integer scaling:
unit:
05
Index
BLOCK 1
unit:
06
Index
INPUT 1
unit:
07
Index
INPUT 2
unit:
08
Index
INPUT 3
unit:
09
Index
OUTPUT
Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: P Stores and displays the output of block 1. This parameter is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. See the section Function blocks. Min: 0 Max: 32768 Def: Integer scaling:
unit:
10
Index
BLOCK 2
unit:
11
Index
INPUT 1
unit:
6 - 47
Chapter 6 Parameter
59
12
Index
APPL PROG3
INPUT 2
unit:
13
Index
INPUT 3
unit:
14
Index
OUTPUT
Description: type: I Stores and displays the output of block 2. This parameter is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. See the section Function blocks. Min: 0 Max: 32768 Def: Integer scaling:
unit:
From block 59.03 to last block 59.254 has same parameter order structure.
Group 60 Appl Task3 Ctrl
60
01
Index
Group name:
APPL TASK3 CTRL

APPL TASK 3 CNTR
Selects the operation mode for the slow application task program. Stop. The program can be edited. 1 = STOP 2 = START Run. The program cannot be edited. Stop to edit mode. The program can be edited. 3 = EDIT Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Integer scaling:
This parameter group consists of execution control for slow application task.
Description:
unit:
02
Index
EDIT COMMAND
Selects the command for the block placed in the location defined by parameter 60.03. This parameter is used by DriveAP PC tool. Home value. The value automatically restores to NO after an editing 1 = NO command has been executed. Shifts the block in the location defined by parameter 60.03 and the 2 = PUSH subsequent blocks one location up. A new block can be placed in the emptied location. Deletes the block in the location defined by parameter 60.03 and shifts 3 = DELETE the subsequent blocks one step down. Read protects input connections of the blocks. 4 = PROTECT 5 = UNPROTECT Unprotects read protection of input connections. Min: 1 Max: 5 Def: 1 Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I
03
Index
EDIT BLOCK
unit:
04
Index
TIME LEVEL SEL

Indicates the fixed execution cycle time for application task 2. Min: 1 Max: 1 Def: 1 Integer scaling:
unit:
6 - 48
60
05
Index
Group name: Description: type: I
APPL TASK3 CTRL

PASS CODE
unit: hex
Group 66 Applic Connect
66
02
Index
Group name:
APPLIC CONNECT
N REF
Speed reference input for function block. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
This group consists of input type parameters for block programming application. Note: It is recommended that these parameter values are set with the DriveAP 2.x PC tool. Description: type: P
unit:
04
Index
T REF
Description: type: P
Interval: 20 ms
unit:
Torque reference input for function block. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
06
Index
CW (Control Word)
Control Word reference input for function block. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Start and stop by speed ramp is controlled by bit 11. A bit 3 must be normally at state TRUE and FALSE only when a coast stop is needed. Bit Drive-specific control word B0 ON 1 = Normal, 0 = EMERGENCY STOP by RAMP B1 OFF2 see bit 1 of 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD B2 OFF3 see bit 2 of 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD B3 1 = Enable run, 0 = Drive stops modulation (Coast stop) COAST STOP B4 RAMP_OUT_ZERO see bit 4 of 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD B5 RAMP_HOLD see bit 5 of 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD B6 RAMP_IN_ZERO see bit 6 of 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD B7 see bit 7 of 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD RESET B8 INCHING1 see bit 8 of 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD B9 INCHING2 see bit 9 of 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD B10 REMOTE_CMD see bit 10 of 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD B11 START 1 = Normal start, 0 = Stop with ramp B12 B13 B14 B15 Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
Description:
unit:
type: P
07
Index
DO1
Description: type: P An input for Relay Output 1 control on RMIO board. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
unit:
6 - 49
Chapter 6 Parameter
66
08
Index
APPLIC CONNECT
DO2
An input for Relay Output 2 control on RMIO board. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
unit:
09
Index
DO3
Description: type: P
Interval: 20 ms
unit:
An input for Relay Output 3 control on RMIO board. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
10
Index
EXT DO
An input to control extension digital outputs (EXT DO word). This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. See function block EXT DO. Extension digital input status word Bit EXT1_DO1 Digital output 1 control on RDIO Ext. Module 1. B0 EXT1_DO2 Digital output 2 control on RDIO Ext. Module 1. B1 EXT2_DO1 Digital output 1 control on RDIO Ext. Module 2. B2 EXT2_DO2 Digital output 2 control on RDIO Ext. Module 2. B3 EXT3_DO1 Digital output 1 control on RDIO Ext. Module 3. B4 EXT3_DO2 Digital output 2 control on RDIO Ext. Module 3. B5 EXT4_DO1 Digital output 1 control on RDIO Ext. Module 4. B6 EXT4_DO2 Digital output 2 control on RDIO Ext. Module 4. B7 EXT5_DO1 Digital output 1 control on RDIO Ext. Module 5. B8 EXT5_DO2 Digital output 2 control on RDIO Ext. Module 5. B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
Description:
unit:
type: P
11
Index
AO1
Description: type: P An input for analogue output 1 on RMIO board. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
unit:
12
Index
AO2
Description: type: P An input for analogue output 2 on RMIO board. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
unit:
13
Index
EXT1 AO1
Description: type: P An input for extension AI/O module 1 analogue output 1. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
unit:
14
Index
EXT1 AO2
unit:
6 - 50
66
15
Index
APPLIC CONNECT
EXT2 AO1
An input for extension AI/O module 2 analogue output 1. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
unit:
16
Index
EXT2 AO2
unit:
17
Index
EXT3 AO1
unit:
18
Index
EXT3 AO2
unit:
19
Index
EXT4 AO1
unit:
20
Index
EXT4 AO2
unit:
21
Index
EXT5 AO1
unit:
22
Index
EXT5 AO2
unit:
23
Index
DC SWITCH STATE
Description: type: P An input for DC switch control / monitoring. This is used only with ACS800 MultiDrive with optional DC switch. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
unit:
24
Index
FUNC GEN
Description: type: P An input for function generator input. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
unit:
6 - 51
Chapter 6 Parameter
66
25
Index
APPLIC CONNECT
TRA1 NODE2
A transmit input 1 for point to point communication to node 2 on DDCS channel CH2. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
unit:
26
Index
TRA2 NODE2
Description: type: P A transmit input 2 for point to point communication to node 2 on DDCS channel CH2. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
unit:
27
Index
TRA3 NODE2
unit:
28
Index
TRA1 NODE3
unit:
29
Index
TRA2 NODE3
unit:
30
Index
TRA3 NODE3
unit:
31
Index
AP AFW
Description: type: P An alarm and fault word for users application. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
unit:
32
Index
RUN ENA
Description: type: P A run enable interlocking for start command. This signal is mainly used by DriveAP PC tool. Min: -255.255.31 Max: -255.255.31 Def: Integer scaling: C 32768 C 32768
unit:
6 - 52
Group 70 DDCS Control
70
01
Index
DDCS CONTROL
Parameter settings of the DDCS communication channels.
CH0 NODE ADDR

Node address for channel CH0. In an AC800M with CI858 and AC80 DriveBus connection, the drives are addressed 1 to 12. The drive address is related to the value of the DRNR terminal of the ACSRX PC element. When using the APC2 system, the address must be 1. With optical ModuleBus connection CH0 node address is calculated with the following steps: 1. Multiply the hundreds of the position value by 16. 2. Add the tens and ones of the position value to the result. For example, if the position value is 101, parameter 70.01 must be set 16 x 1 + 1 = 17. Min: 0 Max: 254 Def: 1 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
type: R Description: type: R Description:
02
Index
CH0 LINK CONTROL

DDCS channel 0 intensity control for transmission LEDs. This parameter can be used in special cases to optimise the communication performance of the link. Min: 1 Max: 15 Def: 10 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
03
Index
CH0 BAUD RATEChannel CH0 communication speed. This must be set to 4 Mbits/s, when FCI or FBA communication modules are used. Otherwise, the overriding system automatically sets the communication speed. 0 = 8 Mbit/s 1 = 4 Mbit/s 2 = 2 Mbit/s 3 = 1 Mbit/s Min: 1 Mbit/s Max: 8 Mbit/s Def: 4 Mbit/s Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit: Mbit/s
type: I
04
Index
CH0 TIMEOUT
Description: type: R Description: The delay time before a communication break fault is declared. The time count starts when the link fails update the message. Setting this parameter to 0 disables the function. Min: 0 ms Max: 60000 ms Def: 100 ms Integer scaling: 1 == 1 ms
unit: ms
05
Index
CH0 COM LOSS CTRL

This parameter defines the action after a communication fault on channel CH0. 1 = STOP RAMPNG The drive is stopped by ramping. The deceleration time is defined by parameter 22.02 DECELER TIME. The drive is stopped by torque limit. 2 = STOP TORQ The drive is stopped by coasting. 3 = COAST STOP The drive continues running on the last reference, the warning CH0 4 = LAST SPEED TIME OUT is activated, and 9.05 ALARM WORD 2 bit 11 is set to 1. The drive continues running at the speed reference defined by 5 = CNST SPEED1 parameters 23.02 CONST SPEED 1, the warning CH0 TIME OUT is activated and 9.05 ALARM WORD 2 bit 11 is set to 1. Min: 1 Max: 5 Def: 1 Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I Description: type: R
06
Index
CH1 LINK CONTROL

DDCS channel CH1 intensity control for transmission LEDs. This value is adjusted through the link including each device on the link. This parameter can be used in special cases to optimise the communication performance of the link. Min: 1 Max: 15 Def: 10 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
6 - 53
Chapter 6 Parameter
70
07
Index
DDCS CONTROL
CH2 NODE ADDR
Defines the node address for channel CH2. This is used only in applications, with one or several point to point communications connections between the RMIO boards. Min: 1 Max: 125 Def: 1 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
08
Index
M/F MODE
Channel CH2 can be used to send the torque reference from the Master Drive to one or several Followers. Master/Follower is an application in which the machinery is run by several drives and the motor shafts are coupled to each other by gearing, a chain, a belt etc. 1 = NOT IN USE Channel CH2 not used for M/F communication. The drive is the master on the M/F link and broadcasts via CH2 the 2 = MASTER contents of data set 41 (defined by parameters 70.0970.11). 3 = FOLLOWER The drive is a follower on the M/F link. Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Integer scaling:
unit:
09
Index
MASTER SIGNAL 1
When parameter 70.08 M/F MODE = MASTER, this parameter defines a group + Index of the signal to be sent as a broadcast message in the selected data set (see parameter 70.29 FOLL DS SEL) index 1 to the follower drives. Example: the setting 701 broadcasts 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD.
unit:
When parameter 70.08 M/F MODE = FOLLOWER, the data value of selected signal is written to dataset n-1 according to the parameter 70.07 CH2 NODE ADDRESS. See parameter 70.29 FOLL DS SEL. This function is used with special M/F configuration where master and follower configuration can be changed on-line. type: PB Min: 0 Max: 20000 Def: 0 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
10
Index
MASTER SIGNAL 2
Description: When parameter 70.08 M/F MODE = MASTER, this parameter defines a group + Index of the signal to be sent as a broadcast message in the selected data set (see parameter 70.29 FOLL DS SEL) index 2 to the follower drives. Example: the setting 2301 broadcasts 23.01 SPEED REF. When parameter 70.08 M/F MODE = FOLLOWER, the data value of selected signal is written to dataset n-1 according to the parameter 70.07 CH2 NODE ADDRESS. See parameter 70.29 FOLL DS SEL. This function is used with special M/F configuration where master and follower configuration can be changed on-line. Min: 0 Max: 20000 Def: 0 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
11
Index
MASTER SIGNAL 3
When parameter 70.08 M/F MODE = MASTER, this parameter defines a group + Index of the signal to be sent as a broadcast message in the selected data set (see parameter 70.29) index 3 to the follower drives. Example: 2.10 TORQ REF3 is typically used to send as torque reference to the 25.01 TORQUE REF A in the follower drives. Parameter 70.11 value is then 210. When parameter 70.08 M/F MODE = FOLLOWER, the data value of selected signal is written to dataset n-1 according to the parameter 70.07 CH2 NODE ADDRESS excluding dataset 41. See parameter 70.29. This function is used with special M/F configuration where master and follower configuration can be changed on-line. This signal can be scaled before broadcasting on the DDCS channel CH2 by parameter 70.30 MASTER SGN3 SCALE. Min: 0 Max: 20000 Def: 0 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
12
Index
CH2 LINK CONTROL

DDCS channel CH2 intensity control for transmission LEDs. This parameter can be used in special cases to optimise the communication performance of the link. Min: 1 Max: 15 Def: 10 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
6 - 54
70
13
Index
DDCS CONTROL
M/F TIME OUT
The delay time before a communication break fault is declared. The time count starts when the link fails update the message. During the time elapsing, the warning M/F TIMEOUT is activated and 9.04 ALARM WORD 1 bit 6 is set to 1. Min: 0 ms Max: 60000 ms Def: 100 ms Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit: ms
14
Index
M/F COM LOSS CTRL

This parameter defines the action upon a communication fault on CH2 of the RMIO board. 1 = FAULT Drive is tripped, fault M/F LINK FAULT activated and 9.01 FAULT WORD 1 bit 11 is set to 1. 2 = ALARM The warning M/F LINK ALARM is generated and 9.04 ALARM WORD 1 bit 11 is set to 1. Min: 1 Max: 2 Def: 1 Integer scaling:
unit:
15
Index
CH3 NODE ADDR

Node address for channel CH3. This channel is normally used with the start-up and maintenance tools. If the CH3 channels of several drives have been connected in a ring or star (using a branching unit), each one must be given unique node address. The new node address becomes valid only on the next RMIO board power-on. The address range is 175 and 125254. Addresses 75124 are reserved for branching units. Min: 1 Max: 254 Def: 1 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
16
Index
CH3 LINK CONTROL

DDCS channel CH3 intensity control for transmission LEDs. This value is adjusted through the link including each device on the link. This parameter can be used in special cases to optimise the communication performance of the link. Min: 1 Max: 15 Def: 15 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
17
Index
SPEED REF SEL

This parameter defines the source for the speed reference in the Master/Follower mode. Speed reference is read either datasets 1, 10...24 or I/O. 0 = SPEED REF 1 1 = DS SPEED REF Speed reference is read from M/F link or fast com interface with fieldbus. See control block diagrams. Min: Max: Def: SPEED REF 1 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
18
Index
TORQ REF SEL

This parameter defines the source for the torque reference in the Master / Follower mode. 0 = TORQUE REF A Torque reference is read either datasets 1, 81 or 10...24. 1 = DS TORQ REF A Torque reference is read from M/F link or fast com interface with fieldbus. See control block diagrams. Min: Max: Def: DS TORQ REF A Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
type: B
6 - 55
Chapter 6 Parameter
70
19
Index:
DDCS CONTROL
CH0 HW CONNECTION
This parameter is used to enable or disable the regeneration of CH0 transmitter in DDCS mode (parameter 71.01 DRIVEBUS MODE = OFF). Regeneration means that the drive echoes all messages back. DDCS mode is typically used with APC2, AC70, module bus of AC800M and AC450 controllers. Regeneration is enabled. Used with ring-type bus topology. 0 = RING Regeneration disabled. Used with star-type bus topology. Typically with 1 = STAR configurations: AC80 or NDBU-95 branching unit(s) ACS800. Note: This parameter has no effect in DriveBus mode. Select RING, if the CH0 channels on the RMIO boards have been connected to ring. Note: Select RING with NMBA-01 field bus module. Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 = STAR Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
20
Index:
CH3 HW CONNECTION
This parameter is used to enable or disable the regeneration of CH3 transmitter. Regeneration means that the drive echoes all messages back. Regeneration is enabled. Used with ring-type bus topology. 0 = RING Regeneration disabled. Used with star-type bus topology. Typically with 1 = STAR configurations: DriveWindow (PC) NDBU-95 branching unit(s) ACS800. Select RING, if the CH3 channels on the RMIO boards have been connected to ring. Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 = STAR Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
28
Index:
FAST TREF SEL

This parameter is used to enable or disable fast update of third data word via R-type of fieldbus module on the same way as with MCW and REF1. To activate this function: Enable this parameter and set value 3 for assigning of third data word in the group 51. E.g. with Profibus module parameter PZD3OUT = 3 0 = DISABLED Fast mode is disabled. 1 = ENABLED Fast mode is enabled. This function is enabled typically, when two fast references (speed and torque) are needed through the field bus. Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 = DISABLED Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
type: B Description: Description:
29
Index:
FOLL DS SEL
This parameter is used to select desired data set package in the follower drive. Each data set package contains 3 data words. This function is needed in the application, where the process master drive is changed on-line. Digital input status word Bit DS41 Data set 41. This is used normally with basic master- follower connection. B0 DS45 Data set 45 is read to the speed and torque ref. chain. Source: CH2 node 2 B1 DS47 Data set 47 is read to the speed and torque ref. chain. Source: CH2 node 3 B2 DS49 Data set 49 is read to the speed and torque ref. chain. Source: CH2 node 4 B3 DS51 Data set 51 is read to the speed and torque ref. chain. Source: CH2 node 5 B4 DS53 Data set 43 is read to the speed and torque ref. chain. Source: CH2 node 6 B5 B6 B7 . B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Min: 0 Max: 65535 Def: B0 = DS41 Integer scaling:
unit:
type: PB
6 - 56
70
30
Index
DDCS CONTROL
MASTER SGN3 SCALE
A signal selected by parameter 70.11 MASTER SIGNAL 3 can be rescaled before sending to the follower drive. Thus it is possible to send higher data values than with the normal integer scaling 10 == 1%. Min: 0% Max: 1000% Def: 100% Integer scaling: 10 == 1%
unit: %
31
Index
FOLLOW SGN3 SCALE

Scaling of torque reference received from master follower link (MASTER SIGNAL 3). Min: 0 Max: 1000 Def: 100% Integer scaling: 10 == 1%
32
Index:
CH2 HW CONNECTION
Description: This parameter is used to enable or disable the regeneration of CH2 transmitter. Regeneration means that the drive echoes all messages back. Regeneration is enabled. Used with ring-type topology. 0 = RING Regeneration disabled. Used with star-type bus topology. Can be used with 1 = STAR master follower application. Select RING, if the CH3 channels on the RMIO boards have been connected to ring. Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 = RING Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
type: B
Group 71 DriveBus Communication
71
01
Index
DRIVEBUS COMM
Parameter settings of DriveBus communication on channel CH0.
CH0 DRIVEBUS MODE

Communication mode selection for channel CH0. The DriveBus mode is used with the ABBs AC800M or AC80 controller. The performance is four times better with DriveBus mode than ordinary DDCS module bus. The new mode becomes valid only on the next RMIO board power-on. 0 = NO DDCS mode 1 = YES DriveBus mode Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 NO Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
type: B
6 - 57
Chapter 6 Parameter
Group 90 Data Set Receive Addresses
90
D SET REC ADDR

This group is only visible when parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE = ADVANT/N-FB. Addresses for Received Data from the Overriding System. The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x = Group, yy = Index.
Overriding System NAMC-xx Dataset Table DDCS link
10 12 14
Address Assignment of Dataset Group

90.01...90.18 91.01...91.09
AMC Table
Ch0
32
01
Index
D SET 10 VAL 1
Description: type: I Data set 10 value 1 receive address (Interval: 2 ms). Min: 0 Max: 9999 Def: 701 Integer scaling:
unit:
02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
D SET 10 VAL 2 D SET 10 VAL 3 D SET 12 VAL 1 D SET 12 VAL 2 D SET 12 VAL 3 D SET 14 VAL 1 D SET 14 VAL 2 D SET 14 VAL 3 D SET 16 VAL 1 D SET 16 VAL 2 D SET 16 VAL 3
See 90.01 See 90.01 See 90.01 See 90.01 See 90.01 See 90.01 See 90.01 See 90.01 See 90.01 See 90.01 See 90.01
Interval: 2 ms Interval: 2 ms Interval: 4 ms Interval: 4 ms Interval: 4 ms Interval: 20 ms Interval: 20 ms Interval: 20 ms Interval: 20 ms Interval: 20 ms Interval: 20 ms
6 - 58
Group 92 Data Set Transmit Addresses
92
D SET TR ADDR
The parameters are visible only when a fieldbus communication is activated by setting parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE to FIELDBUS or ADVANT/N-FB. Signal addresses for the transmitted data to the overriding system. The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x = Group, yy = Index.
Overriding System RMIO Dataset Tab le DDCS link
11 13 15
Address Assignment of Dataset Grou p

92 .0 1...92 .1 8
AMC Table
93.01...93.09
Ch0
33
01
Index
D SET 11 VAL 1
Description: type: I Data set 11 value 1 transmit address (Interval: 2 ms). Min: 0 Max: 9999 Def: 801 Integer scaling:
unit:
02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
D SET 11 VAL 2 D SET 11 VAL 3 D SET 13 VAL 1 D SET 13 VAL 2 D SET 13 VAL 3 D SET 15 VAL 1 D SET 15 VAL 2 D SET 15 VAL 3 D SET 17 VAL 1 D SET 17 VAL 2 D SET 17 VAL 3
See 92.01 See 92.01 See 92.01 See 92.01 See 92.01 See 92.01 See 92.01 See 92.01 See 92.01 See 92.01 See 92.01
Interval: 2 ms Interval: 2 ms Interval: 4 ms Interval: 4 ms Interval: 4 ms Interval: 20 ms Interval: 20 ms Interval: 20 ms Interval: 20 ms Interval: 20 ms Interval: 20 ms
6 - 59
Chapter 6 Parameter
Group 94 Point to Point Communication
94
P2P CONNECTION
MASTER DRIVE #1 FOLLOWER 1 DRIVE #2 FOLLOWER 2 DRIVE #3 FOLLOWER 3 DRIVE #4 FOLLOWER 4 DRIVE #5
Node RDCO-0x 1 TXD CH2 RXD
Node RDCO-0x 2
RXD
CH0 or CH2
TXD
Node RDCO-0x 3
RXD
CH0 or CH2
TXD
Node RDCO-0x = 4.
RXD
CH0 or CH2
TXD
Node RDCO-0x =5
RXD
CH0 or CH2
TXD
Master sends broadcast message Master sends / receives point to point messages between the nodes 2 and 3. All nodes can receive broadcast message
Only nodes 2 and 3 can receive and send point to point messages
The master drive on DDCS channel CH2 can also communicate with two other follower drives via point to point communication service. When this is activated, a broadcast transmission is still active on 4 ms time interval. Without point-to-point communication it is 2 ms. The communication must be enabled in both ends and the node number of the follower(s) must be set to 2 and / or 3. The node number must be different between the followers. The transmitting / receiving time interval is 100 ms.
01
Index
ENABLE FOLLOWER 1
Description: Activates the point-to-point communication between the master and follower node 2. This parameter must be activated in both ends: Master and Follower 2. 0 = OFF Inactive 1 = ON Active Min: Max: Def: OFF Integer scaling:
unit:
type: B Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I Description:
02
Index
REC2 DW1
Received 16-bit data word 1 to / from the node 2. This signal is read on 100 ms time level. Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 0 Integer scaling:
unit:
03
Index
REC2 DW2
unit:
04
Index
REC2 DW3
unit:
05
Index
ENABLE FOLLOWER 2
Activates the point-to-point communication between the master and follower node 3. This parameter must be activated in both ends: Master and Follower 3. 0 = OFF Inactive 1 = ON Active Min: Max: Def: OFF Integer scaling:
unit:
type: B Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: type: I
06
Index
REC3 DW1
unit:
07
Index
REC3 DW2
unit:
08
Index
REC3 DW3
unit:
6 - 60
Group 95 LCU
95
LCU
Active Supply Unit parameters. This internal interface is used with ACS800 4Q drives. Main control word bit 0 control starts active supply unit. DC voltage reference and reactive power reference can be sent via inverter unit. With 4Q single drives parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE is set automatically to position INVERTER in active supply unit.
FIELDBUS
FIELDBUS ADAPTER
INVERTER UNIT
bit 0 LCU Q POW REF LCU DC REF 95.01 95.02 INTERNAL MCW CONTROL
ACTIVE SUPPLY UNIT

MAIN CONTROL WORD LCU Q POW REF LCU DC REF LCU STATUS WORD 8.23 LCU STATUS WORD
LINE CONVERTER DRIVE TYPE
3.32 3.31 LCU PAR 1 SEL LCU PAR 2 SEL 95.03 95.04
LCU ACT SIGNAL 2 LCU ACT SIGNAL 1
ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT OF DATA
01
Index
LCU Q POW REF

Description: type: I Description: type: I Description: Reactive power reference as percents of nominal power in active supply unit, sent every 10 ms. Min: -10000 Max: 10000 Def: 0 Integer scaling: 100 = 1%
unit: %
02
Index
LCU DC REF
DC voltage reference for the line-side converter, sent from inverter unit every 10 ms to active supply unit. Min: 0 Max: 1100 Def: 0 Integer scaling: 1 == 1 V
unit: V
03
Index
LCU PAR1 SEL

Address for LCU ACT SIGNAL 1 from the active supply unit. This parameter is used to select monitored signal from active supply unit. A selected actual value is monitored in signal 3.31 LCU ACT SIGNAL 1. The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x = Group, yy = Index. Min: 0 Max: 10000 Def: 0 Integer scaling:
unit:
04
Index
LCU PAR2 SEL

Address for LCU ACT SIGNAL 2 from the active supply unit. This parameter is used to select monitored signal from active supply unit. A selected actual value is monitored in signal 3.32 LCU ACT SIGNAL 2. The format is (x)xyy, where (x)x = Group, yy = Index. Min: 0 Max: 10000 Def: 0 Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I
6 - 61
Chapter 6 Parameter
Group 97 Drive
97
01
Index
DRIVE
DEVICE NAME
Description:
unit:
The name of the drive section can be typed here by the DriveWindow PC tool. This name is shown in the DriveWindow. The maximum number of characters is 32. type: String Min: 0 char Max: 32 char Def: 0 Integer scaling: no
Group 98 Option Modules
98
OPTION MODULES
The optional RTAC, RAIO and RDIO modules are connected to Slot 1 or Slot 2 of the RMIO board or via optional AIMA-01 I/O Module Adapter in a ring on channel CH1. Each of these modules is given an address using the DIP switches on them. ACS 600 fieldbus adapter modules are connected to channel CH0. ACS800 fieldbus adapter modules are connected only to the Slot 1.
01
Index
ENCODER MODULE 1
Description: Pulse encoder module 1 interface selection. The module is connected into the position marked Slot 1 or Slot 2 on the RMIO board or alternatively onto external I/O Module Adapter (AIMA-01) with DDCS communication module. The module is given the address 0 by setting the switch as shown below. Setting the node ID is not required when the module is mounted into Slot 1 or Slot 2 on the RMIO board. NTAC-02 pulse encoder module interface activated. 0 = NTAC No pulse encoder modules. 1 = NO 2 = RTAC-SLOT1 Pulse encoder module connected into Slot 1 on the RMIO board. 3 = RTAC-SLOT2 Pulse encoder module connected into Slot 2 on the RMIO board. Pulse encoder module connected with DDCS communication module 4 = RTAC-DDCS onto external I/O Module Adapter.
RDIO Switch S1
ADDRESS
89 A
BC D
S1
unit:
type: I
Note: See the parameter settings in group 50. Min: 0 Max: 4 Def: 1
6 - 62
2 34 5
67
F 1
Integer scaling:
98
02
Index
OPTION MODULES
COMM MODULE
This parameter defines the control mode and place in the REMOTE mode. The drive is controlled using the I/O. 1 = NO The drive is controlled through the fieldbus adapter or communication link (channel CH0) using data sets 1 and 2. This is a typical setting for use with Rxxx type of fieldbus adapter module. The drive is controlled through the Nxxx type of fieldbus adapter or 3 = ADVANT/N-FB communication link (channel CH0) using data sets 10 to 33 (for example AC800M, AC80, APC2, AC 70: also NPBA-02, NCSA-01). RMBA-0x Modbus interface module is used. See Modbus parameter 4 = STD MODBUS settings in the group 52. Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 3 Integer scaling: 2 = FIELDBUS
unit:
04
Index
DI/O EXT1 LOCATION

RDIO-01 Extension module 1 interfaces selection. The module is connected into the position marked Slot 1 or Slot 2 on the RMIO board or alternatively onto external I/O Module Adapter (AIMA-01) with DDCS communication module. The module is given the address 1 by setting the switch (S1) as shown below. Setting the node ID is not required when the module is mounted into Slot 1 or Slot 2 on the RMIO board. For faster input signal detection with a DC signal, the hardware filter of the digital input in question can be disabled using the configuration DIP switch (S2) on the circuit board of the module. Note: Always have the hardware filtering enabled with an AC input signal. NDIO-02 module connected to DDCS channel CH1 of RDCO module. 1 = NDIO No extension DIO board used. 2 = NOT IN USE RDIO-01 is connected into Slot 1. 3 = RDIO-SLOT1 RDIO-01 is connected into Slot 2. 4 = RDIO-SLOT2 RDIO-01 is connected onto external I/O Module Adapter with DDCS 5 = RDIO-DDCS communication module.
RDIO
Switch S1
ADDRESS
89 A
BC D
Switch S2
DI3 DI2 HW Filtering: DI1 ON
DI/O EXT1 address: 1

2 3 4
S1
unit:
Min: 1
05
Index:
DI/O EXT2 LOCATION

RDIO-01 Extension module 2 interfaces selection. See index 4. The module is given the address 2 by setting the switch (S1) as shown below. Setting the node ID is not required when the module is mounted into Slot 1 or Slot 2 on the RMIO board. Note: Always have the hardware filtering enabled with an AC input signal.
RDIO
Switch S1
ADDRESS
89 A
BC D
DI3
DI2
HW Filtering:
DI1
S1
unit:
type: I
Min: 1
2 34 5
67
2 34 5
67
F 1
E
ENAB LE D DIS ABLED

1
Note: Actuator no.4 is unused. Integer scaling:
Max: 4
Def: 1
Switch S2
ON

2 3 4
F 1
ENAB LE D DIS ABLED

1
Max: 4
Def: 1
6 - 63
Chapter 6 Parameter
98
06
Index:
OPTION MODULES
DI/O EXT3 LOCATION
RDIO-01 Extension module 3 interfaces selection. See index 4. The module is given the address 3 by setting the switch (S1). Setting the node ID is not required when the module is mounted into Slot 1 or Slot 2 on the RMIO board. Note: Always have the hardware filtering enabled with an AC input signal.
RDIO
Switch S1
ADDRESS
89 A
BC D
Switch S2
DI3 DI2 HW Filtering: DI1 ON

2 3 4
S1
unit:
Min: 1
07
Index:
DI/O EXT4 LOCATION

RDIO-01 Extension module 4 interfaces selection. See index 4. The module is given the address 4 by setting the switch (S1). Setting the node ID is not required when the module is mounted into Slot 1 or Slot 2 on the RMIO board. Note: Always have the hardware filtering enabled with an AC input signal.
RDIO
Switch S1
ADDRESS
89 A
BC D
DI3
DI2
HW Filtering:
DI1
S1
unit:
Min: 1
08
Index:
DI/O EXT5 LOCATION

RDIO-01 Extension module 5 interfaces selection. See index 4. The module is given the address 5 by setting the switch (S1). Setting the node ID is not required when the module is mounted into Slot 1 or Slot 2 on the RMIO board. Note: Always have the hardware filtering enabled with an AC input signal. Switch S2 RDIO Switch S1 HW
DI3 DI2
ADDRESS
89 A
BC D
Filtering: ENAB LE D DIS ABLED
ON
DI1
S1
unit:
Min: 1
09
Index
AI/O EXT1 LOCATION

RAIO-01 Extension module interface selection. The module is connected into the position marked Slot 1 or Slot 2 on the RMIO board or alternatively onto external I/O Module Adapter (AIMA-01) with DDCS communication module, channel CH1. The module is given the address A by setting the switch (S1) as shown below. Setting the node ID is not required when the module is mounted into Slot 1 or Slot 2 on the RMIO board. 1 = NAIO-DDCS NAIO module connected to DDCS channel CH1 RDCO module. 2 = NOT IN USE No extension AIO board used. 3 = RAIO-SLOT1 RAIO-01 is connected into Slot 1. 4 = RAIO-SLOT2 RAIO-01 is connected into Slot 2. 5 = RAIO-DDCS RAIO-01 is connected onto external I/O Module Adapter with DDCS communication module.
ADDRESS
89 A
BC D
RAIO
Node ID selection, Switch S1 type: I
S1
unit:
Min: 1
6 - 64
2 34 5
67
2 34 5
67
2 34 5
67
2 34 5
67
F 1
E
ENAB LE D DIS ABLED

1
Max: 4
Def: 1
Switch S2
ON

2 3 4
F 1
E
ENAB LE D DIS ABLED

1
Max: 4
Def: 1

2 3 4
F 1
E
Max: 4
Def: 1
AI/O EXT1 address: A

Max: 5 Def: 2 Integer scaling:
F 1
98
10
Index:
OPTION MODULES
AI/O EXT2 LOCATION
See index 9. The module is given the address B by setting the switch (S1) as shown below. Setting the node ID is not required when the module is mounted into Slot 1 or Slot 2 on the RMIO board.
ADDRESS
89 A
BC D
RAIO
Node ID selection, Switch S1 type: I Description:
AI/O EXT2 address: B

S1
unit:
Min: 1
11
Index:
AI/O EXT3 LOCATION

See index 9. The module is given the address C by setting the switch (S1) as shown below. Setting the node ID is not required when the module is mounted into Slot 1 or Slot 2 on the RMIO board.
ADDRESS
89 A
BC D
RAIO
S1
unit:
Min: 1
12
Index:
AI/O EXT4 LOCATION

See index 9. The module is given the address D by setting the switch (S1) as shown below. Setting the node ID is not required when the module is mounted into Slot 1 or Slot 2 on the RMIO board.
ADDRESS
89 A
BC D
RAIO
S1
unit:
Min: 1
13
Index:
AI/O EXT5 LOCATION

See index 9. The module is given the address E by setting the switch (S1) as shown below. Setting the node ID is not required when the module is mounted into Slot 1 or Slot 2 on the RMIO board.
ADDRESS
89 A
BC D
RAIO
S1
unit:
Min: 1
14
Index
FUSE SWITCH CNTR

ACS800 / ACS 600 MultiDrive section can be equipped with DC switch, which disconnects inverter from the common DC supply. Disabled check function is used with ACS800 112 x R8i inverter modules equipped with optional DC switches. A fuse switch controller AFSC-01 is used together with DC switch. A status of DC switch position and charging can be seen from the signal 8.20 INV ENABLED WORD. An alarm is indicated, if DC switch is opened at stop state of the drive and fault during the run. Fault / alarm text is INV DISABLED. ACS800 IGBT pulses are always blocked, when auxiliary contact of DC switch is opened. Thus this function guarantees no load situation for DC contacts of switch during switch off. 0 = OFFDC switch is not used in the drive section. 1 = ON DC switch is included in the drive section. See ACS800 MD HW drawings. Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
type: B
2 34 5
67
2 34 5
67
2 34 5
67
2 34 5
67
F 1
E
AI/O EXT2 address: C

F 1
E
AI/O EXT2 address: D

F 1
E
AI/O EXT2 address: E

F 1
6 - 65
Chapter 6 Parameter
98
15
Index
OPTION MODULES
ENCODER 2 MODULE
Second pulse encoder module interface selection. The NTAC-02 module can be used with Multi Block Programming Application as a second speed measurement unit and it is connected to channel CH2 on the RDCO DDCS communication option module. The NTAC02 module is given the address 17 by setting the DIP switches as shown below. RTAC type of pulse encoder module cannot be used as ENCODER 2 MODULE. See parameters 50.1550.19. Measured speed is shown at the signal 1.28 SPEED MEASURED 2. Note: No other modules are allowed to use on CH2, if this module is enabled. Second pulse encoder module interface activated. 0 = NTAC 1 = NO Second pulse encoder module interface not activated.
ON
NTAC-02 DIP switch settings

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
unit:
Note: See the parameter settings in group 50. Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: NO
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
16
Index
FAST AI
An interface activation for fast analogue input module. The NAIO-03F module can be used with Multi Block Programming Application as fast analogue inputs. It is connected to channel CH2 on the RDCO DDCS communication option module. The NAIO-03F module is given the address 1. Also bipolar mode must be used (S7 = ON). Note: No other modules are allowed to use on CH2, if FAST AI module is enabled. Not activated 0 = OFF Fast analogue module interface is activated. 1 = ON
ON
NAIO-03F DIP switch settings

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
unit:
type: B
Note: See the parameter settings in group 14. Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: NO
Integer scaling:
1 == 1
6 - 66
Group 99 Start Up Data
Note: The drive will not start if the Start-up Data parameters have not been changed from the factory settings, or the nominal current of the motor is too small compared to the nominal current of the inverter. WARNING! Running the motor and the driven equipment with incorrect start-up data can result in improper operation, reduction in control accuracy and damage to equipment. If several motors are connected to the drive, some additional instructions must be considered when setting the Start-up Data parameters. Please contact your local ABB representative for more information. Note: Changing any of the motor parameters in group 99, causes the cancellation of all existing Motor ID Run results!
99
01
Index
START UP-DATA
Parameters for setting up the motor information.
LANGUAGE
If English (Am) is selected, the unit of power used is HP instead of kW. 0 = ENGLISH 1 = ENGLISH AM not available 2 = DEUTSCH not available 3 = ITALIANO not available 4 = ESPAOL not available 5 = PORTUGUS not available 6 = NETHERLANDS not available 7 = FRANAIS not available 8 = DANSK not available 9 = SUOMI not available 10 = SVENSKA not available 11 = CESKY not available 12 = POLSKI not available 13 = PO-RUSSKI not available Min: 0 Max: 13 Def: 0 Integer scaling:
unit:
02
Index
MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE

Nominal voltage from the motor rating plate. It is not possible to start the drive without setting this parameter. Note: It is not allowed to connect a motor with nominal voltage less than 1/2 * UN or more than 2 * UN of the drive. Min: 207 V Max: 830 V Def: 0 V Integer scaling: 1 == 1V
unit: V
03
Index
MOTOR NOM CURRENT

Rated motor current. If several motors are connected to the inverter, enter the total current of the motors. Min: 0 A Max: Def: 0 A Integer scaling: 10 == 1A
unit: A
04
Index
MOTOR NOM FREQ

Nominal frequency from the motor rating plate. Note: If the nominal frequency of the motor is higher than 50 Hz, speed limits in DTC mode or frequency limits in scalar control mode must be set before an ID Run command. See parameter group 20 DTC mode or group 29 (SCALAR control mode). Min: 8 Hz Max: 300 Hz Def: 50 Hz Integer scaling: 100 == 1 Hz
unit: Hz
type: R
6 - 67
Chapter 6 Parameter
99
05 06
Index
Group name:
START UP-DATA
MOTOR NOM SPEED
Nominal speed from the motor rating plate. Min: 1 rpm Max: 18000 rpm Def: 1 rpm Integer scaling: 1 == 1 rpm
Index Description: unit: rpm type: R
MOTOR NOM POWER

Description: type: R Description: Nominal power from the motor rating plate. If several motors are connected to the inverter, enter the total power of the motors. Set also parameter 99.12 MOTOR NOM COS FII. Min: 0 kW Max: 9000 kW Def: 0 kW Integer scaling: 10 == 1 kW
unit: kW
07
Index
MOTOR ID RUN
This parameter is used to initiate the Motor Identification Run. During the run, the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. The ID Run takes about one minute. The ID Run cannot be performed if scalar control is selected (parameter 99.08 is set to SCALAR). Note: The ID Run (STANDARD or REDUCED) should be selected if: the operation point is near zero speed, and/or operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide speed range and without a pulse encoder is required. Note: Check the rotation direction of the motor by first start before starting the Motor ID Run. During the run the motor will rotate in the forward direction. Warning! The motor will run at up to approximately 50%80% of the nominal speed during the Motor ID Run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE MOTOR ID RUN. The Motor ID Run is not performed. 1 = NO If an ID Run has not been done yet, or any of the motor parameters have been changed, the motor will start the mode FIRST START after the start command has been given. The DC-magnetising phase lasts much longer than the normal start because the stator resistance and other electrical losses are first identified and stored into the FPROM memory. Performing the Standard Motor ID Run guarantees the best possible 2 = STANDARD control accuracy. The motor must be decoupled from the driven equipment before performing the Standard ID Run. Only to be selected if the motor cannot be decoupled from the driven 3 = REDUCED equipment. The Reduced Motor ID Run should be selected in applications where mechanical losses are higher than 20% (i.e. the load cannot be disconnected) or where flux reduction is not allowed (i.e. there are auxiliary devices connected in parallel with the motor) while the motor is running. 4 = CURRENT CAL Current offset and gain measurement calibration. Calibration is performed on next start. Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Integer scaling:
unit:
08
Index
MOTOR CTRL MODE

Motor control mode selection. 1 = SCALAR Scalar control mode. Direct Torque Control mode. 0 = DTC If several motors are connected to the inverter, there are certain restrictions on the usage of DTC. Please contact your local ABB representative for more information. Min: Max: Def: DTC Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
09
Index
APPLIC RESTORE
Restores either USER MACRO 1, USER MACRO 2 or FACTORY parameter values depending on the selection in parameter 99.11 APPLICATION MACRO except parameter group 99. 1 = YES Restoring 0 = NO No restoring Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
type: B
6 - 68
99
10
Index
Group name: Description: type: I Description:
START UP-DATA
DRIVE ID NUMBER
This parameter can be used by the overriding system to check the correct connections of the optical cables to the drive type. This parameter requires support from the overriding system. Min: 0 Max: 32767 Def: 0 Integer scaling:
unit:
11
Index
APPLICATION MACRO
This parameter selects the application macro to be used. In addition to the default settings (FACTORY), two user-definable parameter sets (USER) are available. In addition to the FACTORY setting there is a selection for saving the current settings as a User Macro (USER 1 SAVE or USER 2 SAVE), and recalling these settings (USER 1 LOAD or USER 2 LOAD). If User Macro 1 or 2 is in use, the parameter values are restored to the last saved values. In addition, the last saved results of the motor identification are restored. Exception: Settings of parameters 99.11 remain unchanged. Note: When user macros are saved to the PC with DrivwWindow, both macros must be saved separately. See section User macro save with DriveWindow on page 108. Note: Restoring of the DriveWindow backup file (.BPG) restores both macros. See section Backup and restore function with DriveWindow on page 107. Factory parameters (default values) are recalled and stored to the 1 = FACTORY FPROM memory. 2 = USER 1 LOAD Parameter set 1 (User Macro 1) is loaded to the RAM memory. 3 = USER 1 SAVE Parameter set 1 (User Macro 1) is saved to the FPROM memory. 4 = USER 2 LOAD Parameter set 2 (User Macro 2) is loaded to the RAM memory. 5 = USER 2 SAVE Parameter set 2 (User Macro 2) is saved to the FPROM memory. Min: 1 Max: 5 Def: 1 Integer scaling:
unit:
type: I Description: type: R Description:
12
Index
MOTOR NOM COS FII

Cos from the motor rating plate. Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0.7 Integer scaling: 100 == Cos 1
unit:
13
Index
POWER IS GIVEN
Selects whether the first start or ID run is be performed by using power or Cos of the motor. Cos is recommended. Use power selection if Cos is unknown. 0 = COSFII 1 = POWER Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Integer scaling: 1 == 1
unit:
type: B
6 - 69
Chapter 6 Parameter
6 - 70
Chapter 7 - Application Blocks

Overview Safety Instruction with Function Blocks General Rules
The chapter describes the function blocks. ABB Drives is not responsible for the operation of the custom-made function block program nor any damage or injury caused by the use of it. The use of first input is compulsory (it must not be left unconnected). Use of second and third input is voluntary for most blocks. As a rule of thumb, an unconnected input does not affect the output of the blocks. The blocks use three input formats: integer Boolean text string
Block Inputs
The used format varies depending on the block. For example, the ADD block uses integer inputs and the OR block Boolean inputs. Text string format is used only by EVENT blocks. Note: The inputs of the blocks are read when the execution of the block starts, not simultaneously for all blocks.
7-1
Chapter 7 Application Blocks
Function Blocks
ABS
Type Summary Illustration Arithmetic function ABS (ABSolute value) is used to obtain the absolute value of an integer number.
BLOCK x ABS INPUT MUL DIV OUT
Operation
Connections
The output is the absolute value of INPUT multiplied by input MUL and divided by input DIV. OUT = INPUT MUL / DIV Inputs INPUT, MUL and DIV: 24 bit integer values (23 bits + sign) Output (OUT): 24 bit integer (23 bits + sign)
ADD
Type Summary Illustration
Arithmetic function ADDer is used to calculate the sum of integers.

BLOCK x ADD ADD1 ADD2 ADD3 OUT
Operation
Connections
The output is the sum of the inputs. OUT = ADD1 + ADD2 + ADD3 This block is also used for subtraction. See SUB function. Input ADD1, ADD2 and ADD3: 24 bit integer values (23 bits + sign) Output (OUT): 24 bit integer (23 bits + sign)
7-2

Type Summary Illustration Logical function. AND is used to form a logical AND-function of Boolean input variables.
BLOCK x
AND
AND
I1 I2 I3 OUT
Operation
The output is true if all connected inputs are true. Otherwise the output is false. Truth table:
I1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
I2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
I3 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
OUT (binary) False (All bits 0) False (All bits 0) False (All bits 0) False (All bits 0) False (All bits 0) False (All bits 0) False (All bits 0) True (All bits 1)
OUT (value on display) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1
Connections
Input I1, I2 and I3: Boolean values Output (OUT): 24 bit integer value (packed boolean)
BSET
A bit setting of an integer word. Bit SET is used to change the state of one selected bit of an integer value. The integer usually contains packed Boolean data.
BLOCK x BITSET ENABLE BITNR INPUT OUT
Operation
Connections
If the input I1 is active (=1), the function sets the bit defined by the input I2 (0 = bit 0, 1 = bit 1, ), and if not active (=0), the function resets the bit defined by the input I2. VALUE: Boolean value, set bit = 1, reset bit = 0 BITNR: Bit number (0 = bit nr 015 = bit nr 15) INPUT: Input word for chaining several blocks or for masking bit pattern Input ENABLE: Boolean value Inputs BITNR and INPUT: 24 bit integer values (23 bits + sign) Output (OUT): 24 bit integer (23 bits + sign)
7-3

Type Comparative function. Comparator is used to COMPARE two integers.
BLOCK x COMPARE I1 I2 HYS OUT
COMPARE Summary
Illustration
Operation
Output bits 0, 1 and 2: If I1 > I2, O = 001 (Output bit 0 is set.), If I1 = I2, O = 010 (Output bit 1 is set.), If I1 < I2, O = 100 (Output bit 2 is set.) Output bit 3: If I1 > I2, O = 1xxx (Output bit 3 is set and remains set until I1 < I2 - I3, after which bit 3 is reset.) Output bit 4: If I1 - I2 - I3 0 O4 = 1, If I1 - I2 + I3 < 0 O4 = 0 Output bit 5: If I3 I1 - I2 O5 = 1, NB! I3 must be 0, If I3 < I1 - I2 O5 = 0 When this output is connected to a logic input, it is true if any bit is true.
I2
I3 I3 I1 O4 (hysteresis)
O5 (window)
Connections
Output bits (if many conditions come true, several bits are set): Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 OUT (value on display) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 1 0 16 0 0 0 0 0 1 32 Input I1, I2 and HYS: 24 bit integer values (23 bits + sign) Output (OUT): 24 bit integer (packed boolean)
7-4

Type Summary Illustration Counter function. COUNTer is reset counter with maximum value limit.
BLOCK x COUNT TRIGG RESET MAX OUT
COUNT
Operation
The counter function counts rising edges of the input TRIGG. The counter is reset by the input RESET and limited to the value set with the input MAX. TRIGG: Trigger input RESET: Resets output Maximum limit of output MAX: Note: If pin 3 is left unconnected, the maximum count value is zero. Input TRIGG and RESET: Boolean values Input MAX: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign) Output (OUT): 24 bit integer (23 bits + sign)
Connections
DPOT
Up / down counter Digitally controlled POTentiometer function.

BLOCK x DPOT POS DIR NEG DIR RAMP STEP OUT
Operation
Connections
The digitally controlled ramp function increments or decrements the output according to control inputs POS DIR and NEG DIR. The input POS DIR ramps the output to positive direction and NEG DIR to negative direction. If both inputs are active, nothing happens. The step is defined by the input RAMP STEP. Control to positive direction POS DIR: Control to negative direction NEG DIR: RAMP STEP: Ramp step on program cycle Input POS DIR and NEG DIR: Boolean values Input RAMP STEP: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign) Output (OUT): 24 bit integer (23 bits + sign)
7-5
EVENT
Event function. Application based alarm or fault EVENT.

BLOCK x EVENT INPUT TEXT PAR TYPE OUT
Operation
The EVENT block is used to write an event to the alarm or fault logger. A fault event will trig a drive fault and trip the drive. Alarm events are reflected in the drive status word alarm bit. INPUT triggers the event. Input TEXT PAR selects the parameter index from which the event message (text string) is read. Selects the parameter index from which the event message (text string) is read. Use text parameters 53.11...53.24 for user's application specific texts. Type the respective text by clicking the pin with shift pressed. Input TYPE selects the type of the event (warning or fault)
INPUT 0->1 0 TEXT PAR 0 1 TEXT PAR TYPE Cause block activates the event block deactivates the event contents of the event message type of event: warning type of event: fault
Connections
Inputs INPUT, TEXT PAR: 24 bit integer values (23 bits + sign) Input TYPE: String (compulsory)
FILTER
Filtering function. The FILTER block is used as a first order low pass filter for integer values.
BLOCK x FILTER INPUT OUT TIME
Operation
The output is the filtered value of INPUT. Input TIME is the filtering time constant. -t/TIME OUT = INPUT * (1 - e ) Note: The internal calculation uses 48 bits accuracy to avoid offset errors. INPUT: TIME: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign) 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign). One corresponds to 1 ms.
Connections
Output (OUT): 24 bit integer (23 bits + sign)
7-6
MAX
Comparative function: maximum selector MAX (MAXimum selector) is used to select the highest value of inputs to the output.
BLOCK x MAX I1 I2 I3 OUT
Operation
Connections
The values at the inputs I1, I2 and I3 are compared and the highest value is written to the output OUT. OUT = MAX (I1, I2, I3) Input I1, I2 and I3: 24 bit integer values (23 bits + sign) Output (OUT): 24 bit integer (23 bits + sign)
MIN
Comparative function: minimum selector MIN (MINimum selector) is used to select the lowest value of inputs to the output.
BLOCK x MIN I1 I2 I3 OUT
Operation
Connections
The values at the inputs I1, I2 and I3 are compared and the lowest value is written to the output OUT. OUT = MIN (I1, I2, I3) Input I1, I2 and I3: 24 bit integer values (23 bits + sign) Output (OUT): 24 bit integer (23 bits + sign)
MULDIV
Arithmetic function MULtiplayer DIVider element is used to scale an integer value by dividing the product of two integers with third value.
BLOCK x MULDIV INPUT MUL DIV OUT
Operation
The output is the product of INPUT multiplied by MUL and divided by DIV. OUT = (INPUT * MUL) / DIV Inputs INPUT, MUL and DIV: 24 bit integer values (23 bits + sign) Output (OUT): 24 bit integer (23 bits + sign)
Connections
7-7

Type Summary Illustration Logical function OR is used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean variables.
BLOCK x OR I1 I2 I3 OUT
OR
Operation
The output is true if any of the inputs is true. Truth table:

I1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 I2 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 I3 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 OUT (binary) False (All bits 0) True (All bits 1) True (All bits 1) True (All bits 1) True (All bits 1) True (All bits 1) True (All bits 1) OUT 0 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 (value on display)
Connections
Input I1, I2 and I3: Boolean values Output (OUT): 24 bit integer value (packed Boolean)
7-8

Type Summary Illustration PI controller Proportional Integrating block is used as a standard PI-regulator for serial compensation in closed loop systems.
BLOCK x PI INPUT K I OUT
PI
Operation
The output is INPUT multiplied by input K/100 plus integrated INPUT multiplied by input I/100. OUT = INPUT * K / 100 + ( I / 100 ) * INPUT Note: The internal calculation uses 48 bits accuracy to avoid offset errors.
Connections
INPUT: Input K: Input I:
24 bit integer value (23 bit + sign) -24 bit integer value (23 bit + sign) - Gain factor 100 correspond to 1. 10 000 corresponds to 100. - Integrator coefficient. 100 correspond to 1. 10 000 corresponds to 100.
Output (OUT): 24 bit integer (23 bits + sign). The range is limited to 1000010000. Type Illustration Initialisation block for the PI controller.
BLOCK x PI-BAL BAL BAL REF
PI-BAL
Operation
The block initialises the PI block first. When input BAL is true, the block writes the value of BAL REF to the output of the PI block. When input BAL becomes false, the block releases the output of the PI controller block which continues normal operation from the set output. Note: The block may be used only with the PI block. The execution of block must be after the PI block. Input BAL: Boolean value
Connections
Input BAL REF: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign)
7-9
RAMP
Ramp function The ramp (RAMP generator) function is used to limit the rate of change of a signal.
BLOCK x RAMP INPUT STEP+ STEPOUT
Operation
Connections
The step value is added every program cycle to the OUT value as long as: INPUT - OUT >= STEP+ (positive direction) INPUT - OUT <= -STEP- (negative direction) The ramp step is defined: Input STEP+: positive direction (INPUT + STEP+) Input STEP-: negative direction (INPUT STEP-) Inputs INPUT, STEP+ and STEP-: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign) Output (OUT): 24 bit integer (23 bits + sign)
SR
Logical function The memory block SR (Set Reset memory) is used as a memory for Boolean variables.
BLOCK x SR SET RESET RESET OUT
Operation
Input SET sets and RESET inputs reset the output. If input SET and both RESET inputs are false, the current value remains at the output. If input SET is true and both RESET inputs are false, the output is true. If one or both of the RESET inputs is true, the output is false.
SET RESET RESET 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 OUT (binary) Output False (All bits 0) False (All bits 0 False (All bits 0) True (All bits 1) False (All bits 0 False (All bits 0) False (All bits 0) OUT Output 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0 (value on display)
Connections
Inputs SET and both RESET: Boolean values Output (OUT): 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign)
7 - 10

Type Logical function Changeover SWITCH for Boolean type of data.
BLOCK x SW-CB ACT NO NC OUT
SWITCH-B Summary
Illustration
Operation
The OUT is equal to input NO (Normally Open) if input ACT is true and equal to input NC (Normally Closed) if input ACT is false.
ACT 0 1
NO I2 I2
NC I3 I3
OUT I3 I2
OUT
(value on display) True = -1 False = 0
Connections
NO = normally open, NC = normally closed Input ACT, NO and NC: Boolean values Output (OUT): 24 bit integer value (packed Boolean)
SWITCH-I
Logical function Changeover SWITCH for Integer type of data.

BLOCK x SW-IL ACT NO NC OUT
Operation
The OUT is equal to input NO if input ACT is true and equal to input NC if input ACT is false.
ACT 0 1 NO NO NO NC NC NC OUT NC NO
Connections
NO = normally open, NC = normally closed Input ACT: Boolean value Input NO and NC: Output (OUT): 24 bit integer values (23 bits + sign) 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign)
7 - 11
TOFF
Timing function Time delay OFF (TOFF) is used for Boolean off state delay.
BLOCK x TOFF INPUT OUT TD
Operation
The output OUT is true when INPUT is true. The output is false when INPUT has been false for a time equal or longer than input TD.
INPUT 1 0 OUT All bits 1 All bits 0 t Values on display: True = -1, false = 0
Connections
Input TD
Input TD
INPUT: Input TD:
Boolean value 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign). One corresponds to 1 ms.
Output (OUT): 24 bit integer value (packed Boolean)
7 - 12

TON
Timing function Time delay ON (TON) is used for Boolean on state delay.
BLOCK x TON INPUT OUT TD
Operation
The output OUT is true when INPUT has been true for a time equal or longer than input TD. The output is false when the INPUT is false.
INPUT
1 0
OUT time
Input TD
Input TD
All bits 1 All bits 0 Values on display: True = -1, false = 0.

Connections
time
INPUT: Input TD:
Boolean value 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign). 1 corresponds to 1 ms.
Output (OUT): 24 bit integer value (packed Boolean)
7 - 13

TRIGG
Timing function This block is used for reducing impulse times at the start of automatic procedures and for calculating functions.
BLOCK x TRIGG I1 I2 I3 OUT
Operation
The rising edge of input I1 sets the output bit 0 for one program cycle. The rising edge of input I2 sets the output bit 1 for one program cycle. The rising edge of input I3 sets the output bit 2 for one program cycle.
Example Input I1 1 0 Output, Bit 0 1 0 Tc Tc t t Tc = Program cycle time
Connections
Input I1, I2 and I3: Boolean values Output (OUT): 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign)
7 - 14

Type Illustration
WR-I
Write integer value to the parameter in the RAM memory of the control board.
BLOCK x WR-I GROUP INDEX IN OUT
Operation
Connections
This function writes an integer value to the integer type of AMC-table index. Note: The function does not take care if another device e.g. field bus is writing to the same place. This causes oscillation of signal. It is not possible to write into the middle of the reference chain. Check the parameter type (I or PB) from the Firmware manual Inputs GROUP, INDEX and IN: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign) Input GROUP: Parameter group number Input INDEX: Parameter index number Data input pin to read new value for the parameter Input IN: Output (OUT): Error code (24 bit integer value ) Error codes: 0 Successful write 131073 Group protected 131074 Index protected 131075 Illegal group 131076 Undefined group 131077 Illegal index 131078 Undefined index 131079 Illegal format 131080 Min max limitation 131088 Illegal selection For example parameter 20.05 MAXIMUM CURRENT - group is 20 - index is 05
7 - 15

Type Illustration
WR-PB
Write packed Boolean value to the parameter in the RAM memory of the control board.
BLOCK x WR-PB GROUP INDEX IN OUT
Operation
Connections
Writes a packed Boolean value to the packed Boolean type of AMC-table index e.g. command word. Note: The function does not take care if another device e.g. field bus is writing to the same place. This causes oscillation of signal. Check the parameter type (I or PB) from the Firmware manual. Inputs GROUP, INDEX and IN: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign) Input GROUP: Parameter group number Input INDEX: Parameter index number Data input pin to read new value for the parameter Input IN: Output (OUT): Error code (24 bit integer value) Error codes: 0 Successful write 131073 Group protected 131074 Index protected 131075 Illegal group 131076 Undefined group 131077 Illegal index 131078 Undefined index 131079 Illegal format 131080 Min max limitation 131088 Illegal selection For example parameter 7.01 MCW - group is 7 - index is 01
7 - 16

XOR
Logical function. XOR (eXclusive OR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with Boolean variables.
BLOCK x XOR I1 I2 I3 OUT
Operation
The output is true if only one or all connected inputs are true. Otherwise the output is false. Truth table:
I1 I2 I3 OUT (binary) OUT (value on display)
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Connections
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
False (All bits 0) True (All bits 1) True (All bits 1) False (All bits 0) True (All bits 1) False (All bits 0) False (All bits 0) True (All bits 1)
0 -1 -1 0 -1 0 0 -1
Input I1, I2 and I3: Boolean values Output (OUT): 24 bit integer value (packed Boolean)
7 - 17
I/O and Communication Blocks

A/F WORD Summary
Illustration Type
Execution time interval of these blocks has not relation with execution time of Function blocks. See section The Master / Follower Link in chapter Software Description.
A/F WORD Application based alarm and fault word. Execution interval is 560 ms.
A/F WORD
IN
Operation
Connections
This block is used to collect application specific alarms and faults to packed boolean type of word A/F WORD further to be read e.g. by overriding system from the signal 9.19 AP AFW. Use e.g. BSET function blocks to set desired bits of A/F WORD according to application needs. IN: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign)
AI1
Type Summary
Analogue input 1 This block is used to read analogue input 1 (AI1) of RMIO motor control- and I/O board. Resolution is 10 bits + sign, voltage type of input. Updating interval is 10 ms or 20 ms according to Parameter 56.04 TIME LEVEL SEL.
AI1 13.01 13.02 CONV MODE FILTER ms X21:3-4 5.01
Illustration
Operation
CONV MODE:
See parameter 13.01 AI1 CONV MODE.
The conversion mode for the analogue input AI1. Different modes are: 1 = NORMAL 2 = Pt-100: scale 10 V0+10V = -200000+20000 supply from any AO, scale 200 C = 20000 1xPt-100: supply 10 mA 2xPt-100: supply 5 mA 3xPt-100: supply 3.3 mA supply 2 mA from any AO; scale 100 C = 10000
3 = KTY84
Set these values to AO according to number of sensors connected to series.

FILTER ms: See parameter 13.02 AI1 FILTER ms. A filtering time constant for AI1. OUT: See signal 5.01 BASIC AI1 Input CONV MODE: Integer value 13 Input FILTER ms: Integer value 030000 Output (OUT): Integer value on range 2000020000
Connections
7 - 18

Analogue input AI2. This block is used to read analogue input 2 (AI2) of RMIO motor control- and I/O board. Resolution is 10 bits + sign, current type of input 0(4)20 mA.
AI2
Operation
See parameter 13.03 AI2 CONV MODE. CONV MODE: The conversion mode for the analogue input AI2. Different modes are: 1 = NORMAL 2 = 4 mA
FILTER ms: OUT:
scale -20 mA.0+20mA = -200000+20000 scale 420 mA = 020000 See parameter 13.04 AI2 FILTER ms. A filtering time constant for AI2. See signal 5.02 BASIC AI2 Integer value 12 Integer value 030000 Integer value on range 2000020000
Connections
Input CONV MODE: Input FILTER ms: Output (OUT):
AI3
Analogue input AI3. This block is used to read analogue input 3 (AI3) of RMIO motor control- and I/O board. Resolution is 10 bits + sign, current type of input 0(4)20 mA.
Operation
See parameter 13.05 AI3 CONV MODE. CONV MODE: The conversion mode for the analogue input AI2. Different modes are: 1 = NORMAL 2 = 4 mA
FILTER ms: OUT:
scale -20 mA0+20mA = -200000+20000 scale 420 mA = 020000 See parameter 13.06 AI3 FILTER ms. A filtering time constant for AI3. See signal 5.03 BASIC AI3 Integer value 12 Integer value 030000 Integer value on range 2000020000
Connections
Input CONV MODE: Input FILTER ms: Output (OUT):
7 - 19

Type Summary
AO1
Analogue output This block is used to write data to the analogue output 1 (AO1) of RMIO motor control- and I/O board. Execution interval is 20 ms.
AO1 15.01 15.02 66.11 OFFSET SCALE IN X21:9-10
Illustration
Operation
OFFSET: See parameter 15.01 AO1 OFFSET in the Firmware manual of Multi Block Programming Application. Analogue ouput offset in milliamperes. SCALE: See parameter 15.02 AO1 SCALE, the scaling of analogue output AO1 signal. The value of this signal corresponds the maximum output current 20 mA at the HW. Input pin to control analogue output AO1. IN:
Connections
Input OFFSET: Integer value 020000 = 020 mA Input SCALE: Integer value 030000 IN: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign) HW settings See the Analogue I/O Extension Users Manual RAIO-01 (3AFE 64484567 English). Analogue output This block is used to write data to the analogue output 2 (AO2) of RMIO motor control- and I/O board. Execution interval is 20 ms.
AO2 15.03 15.04 OFFSET SCALE IN X21:11-12
AO2
Type Summary
Illustration
Operation
OFFSET: See parameter 15.03 AO2 OFFSET in the Firmware manual of Multi Block Programming Application. Analogue ouput offset in milliamperes. SCALE: See parameter 15.04 AO2 SCALE The scaling of analogue output AO2 signal. The value of this signal corresponds the maximum output current 20 mA at the HW. Input pin to control analogue output AO2. IN:
Connections
Input OFFSET: Integer value 020000 = 020 mA Input SCALE: Integer value 030000 IN: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign) HW settings See the Analogue I/O Extension Users Manual RAIO-01 (3AFE64484567 English).
7 - 20

Type Summary
CW
Control Word in block application. This block is used to control the drive from the application. See also parameter 7.05 MAIN CONTROL W MASK, if there is a need to share control bits between the fieldbus control word 7.01 MAIN CTRL WORD and CW. Execution interval is 20 ms.
CW CONTROL WORD
Illustration
IN
Operation
Connections
See the Chapter 6 - Parameters 66.06 CW (Control Word) bits: Bit Signal name Function 0 ON 1= normal, 0 = Emergency stop by ramp 1 OFF2 1= normal, 0 = Emergency Coast Stop 2 OFF3 1= normal, 0 = Emergency Ramp Stop 3 COAST 1= normal, 0 = coast stop 4 RAMP OUT ZERO 1= normal, 0 = output of speed ref. ramp is forced to zero 5 RAMP HOLD 1= normal, 0 = output of speed ref. ramp is frozen 6 RAMP IN ZERO 1= normal, 0 = input of speed ref. ramp is forced to zero 7 RESET 1= reset, 0 = reset of fault 8 INCHING 1 1= acceleration to CONST SPEED 1, 1->0 = deceleration to zero speed Note: bits 4,5 and 6 must be 0 before inching control 1= acceleration to CONST SPEED 2, 9 INCHING 2 1->0 deceleration to zero speed Note: bits 4,5 and 6 must be 0 before inching control 1= Overriding computer is requesting to control 10 REMOTE CMD the drive. 0= No control from the overriding system, except OFF1, OFF2 and OFF3. 11 START 1= Normal start, 0 = Stop by ramp Operation, use e.g. BSET function blocks to set needed bits of A/F WORD according to the requirements of the application. IN: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign)
Figure below is an example, how to use 7.05 MAIN CONTROL W MASK. Emergency stop OFF3 is programmed to work either through the fieldbus or from the I/O.

Note: Also in LOCAL control OFF2 and OFF3 bits must be set using CW block.
OFF3 from the digital input is also active with LOCAL control in this example.
LOCAL CONTROL LOCAL CW CW Bits 1 and 2 OFF2, OFF3 BIT OR BIT OR
Multi Block Programming Application
BIT OR MCW FINAL
FIELDBUS MCW 7.01 MCW MASK 7.05
BIT AND
&
7 - 21
Figure 7 - 1 Block Diagram.
7 - 22

Type Summary
DI1DI6, DI IL
Digital input These blocks are used to read the status of the digital input DI1DI6 and DI IL (DI7) of RMIO motor control- and I/O board.
Execution interval is 10 ms or 20 ms according to parameter 56.04 TIME LEVEL SEL.

Illustration
DI6 8.05.6
OUT
X22:6
Example: View of DI6

Operation
Output of the blocks corresponds 8.01 DI STATUS WORD. bit 0 = not in usebit 1 = Status of DI1 bit 2 = Status of DI2 bit 3 = Status of DI3 bit 4 = Status of DI4 bit 5 = Status of DI5 bit 6 = Status of DI6 bit 7 = Status of DI IL OUT: 16 bit packed boolean value.
Connections
DC SWITCH Summary
Illustration
Type
Charging control of DC circuit This block is used to control DC charging software with DC switch option in the multidrive systems. Execution interval is 20 ms.
DC SWITCH
IN
Operation
Following is valid with ACS 600 R2iR7i and ACS800 R2iR7i inverter modules. This block must be used, if DC switch exists at the DC input of the inverter unit. A feedback signal of DC switch must be wired to one of the digital input (e.g. DI IL) on the RMIO board. DC switch open -> DC switch closed -> digital input state is FALSE digital input state is TRUE
Connections
The output of the digital input is connected to the input of this block in the software. When this connection has been performed in HW and SW, the DC switch can be opened. IN: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign)
7 - 23

DO1
DO1
Digital output DO1 This block is used to control relay output RO1 of RMIO motor control and I/O board.
Execution interval is 20 ms.
IN
X25
Operation
INPUT: State TRUE energises relay output RO1 and state FALSE de-energises the relay. INPUT: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign).
Connections
DO2
Digital output This block is used to control relay output RO2 of RMIO motor control and I/O board.

DO2
IN
X26
Operation
INPUT: State TRUE energises relay output RO2 and state FALSE de-energises the relay. INPUT: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign).
Connections
DO3
Digital output DO3 This block is used to control relay output RO3 of RMIO motor control- and I/O board.

DO3
IN
X27
Operation
INPUT: State TRUE energises relay output RO3 and state FALSE de-energise the relay. INPUT: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign).
Connections
7 - 24
EXT1 DIDI3
Type Summary
Extension module 1 digital inputs. This block is used to read status of the digital inputs DI1DI3 of digital extension module 1 (DI/O EXT1). Execution interval is 40 ms.
EXT1 DI1 8.06.1 EXT1 DI2 8.06.2 EXT1 DI3 8.06.3
Illustration
OUT
X11:1-2 X12:1-2
OUT
X11:3-4
OUT
Operation
Connections
Output is same as 8.06 EXT DI STATUS WORD bits 13. bit 0 = not in usebit 1 = Status of EXT1 DI/O DI1 bit 2 = Status of EXT1 DI/O DI2 bit 3 = Status of EXT1 DI/O DI3 OUT: 16 bit packed boolean value.
EXT2 DIDI3
Type Summary
Extension module 2 digital inputs: EXT2 DI1, EXT2 DI2 and EXT2 DI3. This block is used to read status of the digital inputs DI1DI3 of digital extension module 2 (DI/O EXT2).

Illustration
OUT
X11:1-2 X12:1-2
OUT
X11:3-4
OUT
Operation
Connections
Output is same as 8.06 EXT DI STATUS WORD bits 46. bit 4 = Status of EXT2 DI/O DI1 bit 5 = Status of EXT2 DI/O DI2 bit 6 = Status of EXT2 DI/O DI3 OUT: 16 bit packed boolean value.
7 - 25
EXT3 DIDI3
Type Summary

Illustration
OUT
X11:1-2 X12:1-2
OUT
X11:3-4
OUT
Operation
Connections
Output is the same as 8.06 EXT DI STATUS WORD bits 68. bit 6 = Status of EXT3 DI/O DI1 bit 7 = Status of EXT3 DI/O DI2 bit 8 = Status of EXT3 DI/O DI3 OUT: 16 bit packed boolean value.
EXT4 DIDI3
Type Summary

Illustration
OUT
X11:1-2 X12:1-2
OUT
X11:3-4
OUT
Operation
Connections
7 - 26
EXT5 DIDI3
Type Summary

Illustration
OUT
X11:1-2 X12:1-2
OUT
X11:3-4
OUT
Operation
Connections
EXT DO
Extension Digital Output control This block is used to control relay outputs of RDIO digital extension modules 15. Execution interval is 20 ms.
EXT DO
IN
Operation
This block writes packed boolean value to parameter 66.10 EXT DO. State TRUE of each bit energises relay output and state FALSE de-energises the relay. Bit 0: Bit 1: Bit 2: Bit 3: Bit 4: Bit 5: Bit 6: Bit 7: Bit 8: Bit 9: EXT1 DO1 control EXT1 DO2 control EXT2 DO1 control EXT2 DO2 control EXT3 DO1 control EXT3 DO2 control EXT4 DO1 control EXT4 DO2 control EXT5 DO1 control EXT5 DO2 control
Connections
Use BSET blocks connected to series to set each bit of the EXT DO word. INPUT: 16 bit packed boolean value.
7 - 27

Type Summary
EXT15 AI1AI2
Extension analogue inputs This block is used to read analogue input 1 and 2 (AI1, AI2) of analogue extension module (AI/O EXT1AI/O EXT5). Execution interval is 40 ms.
EXT1 AI1 X21:3-4 HW MODE CONV MODE FILTER ms 5.04 EXT1 AI2 X1:3-4 HW MODE CONV MODE FILTER ms 5.05 Example:
Illustration
13.15 13.17 13.19
13.16 13.18 13.20
EXT1 AI1 and
Operation
EXT1 AI2 HW MODE:
See parameters 13.xx EXTx AIx HW MODE in chapter Parameters.
1 = UNIPOLAR unipolar input mode 2 = BIPOLAR bipolar input mode CONV MODE: See parameters 13.xx EXTx AIx CONV MODE in chapter Parameters. The modes are: 1 = NORMAL Scale 20 mA, -2 V, -10 V0+10 V, +2 V, -20 mA = -20000+20000 2 = 4 mA Scale 420 mA = 020000 3 = PT 100 Supply from any AO, scale 200 C = 20000 1XPT 100: supply 10 mA 2XPT 100: supply 5 mA 3xPT 100: supply 3.3 mA Supply 2 mA from any AO; scale 200 C = 20000
4 = KTY84
FILTER ms:
Connections
See parameter 13.xx EXTx AI1 FILTER ms. A filtering time constant for AIx. See signal 5.xx EXTx AIx OUT: Input HW MODE: Integer value 12 Input CONV MODE: Integer value 14 Input FILTER ms: Integer value 030000 Output (OUT): Integer value on range 2000020000 HW settings See Analogue I/O Extension Users Manual RAIO-01 (3AFE 64484567 English).
7 - 28

Type
EXT15 Summary AO1AO2

Illustration
Extension analogue outputs EXT15 AO1, AO2 (AI/O EXT1AI/O EXT5). This block is used to write data to the analogue output 1 and 2 (AO1, AO2) of analogue extension module. Execution interval is 40 ms.
EXT5 AO1 15.21 15.23 OFFSET SCALE IN X2:1-2 15.23 15.24 EXT5 AO2 OFFSET SCALE IN X2:3-4
Example: EXT5 AO1 and EXT5 AO2

Operation OFFSET: See parameter 15.xx EXTx AOx OFFSET Analogue output offset in milliamperes. SCALE: See parameters 15.xx EXTx AOx SCALE in chapter Parameters. The scaling of analogue output AOx signal. The value of this signal corresponds the maximum output current 20 mA at the HW. Input pin to control analogue output AO1. IN:
Connections
Input OFFSET: integer value 020000 = 020 mA Input SCALE: integer value 030000 IN: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign) HW settings: See the Analogue I/O Extension Users Manual RAIO-01 (3AFE64484567 English). Function generator input This block is a part of an internally built 5-step function generation and executed every 100 ms.
FUNG IN
FUNG IN
IN
Operation
Input for function generator. See parameter group 37 FUNCTION GENERATOR. Function generator is enabled by parameter 37.01 ENABLE and it includes: IN: Function block FUNG IN
A function curve is set by parameters: 37.04 X1 37.05 Y1 37.06 X2 37.07 Y2 37.08 X3 37.09 Y3 37.10 X4 37.11 Y4 37.12 X5 37.13 Y5
Connections
OUT: Function block FUNG OUT IN: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign)
7 - 29

Type
FUNG OUT Summary

Illustration
Function generator output This block is a part of internally built 5 step function generation and executed every 100 ms.
FUNG OUT
OUT
Operation
Output of the function generator. See parameter group 37 FUNCTION GENERATOR. Function generator is enabled by parameter 37.01 ENABLE and it includes: IN: Function block FUNG IN A function curve is set by parameters: 37.04 X1 37.05 Y1 37.06 X2 37.07 Y2 37.08 X3 37.09 Y3 37.10 X4 37.11 Y4 37.12 X5 37.13 Y5
Connections
OUT: Function block FUNG OUT OUT: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign)
I/O N REF
Type Summary
I/O speed reference block This block is used to write I/O speed or frequency (scalar) reference to input 66.02 N REF and executed only in I/O mode (parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE = NO). Execution interval is 20 ms.
I/O N REF
Illustration
IN
Operation
Connections
Speed reference from the application is connected to input IN (66.02 N REF). Note: With fieldbus the speed reference is written directly to 23.01 SPEED REF without this block when 98.02 COMM MODULE has selection FIELDBUS or ADVANT/N-FB. IN: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign)
7 - 30

Type Summary
I/O T REF
I/O torque reference block This block is used to write I/O torque reference to input 66.04 T REF and executed only in I/O mode (parameter 98.02 COMM MODULE = NO). Execution interval is 20 ms.
I/O T REF
Illustration
IN
Operation
Torque reference from the application is connected to input IN (66.04 T REF).
Connections
IN: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign)
PZD3 OUT Summary
Type
Communication input block This block is used with RPBA type of field bus module to read PZD3 OUT Profibus data word for block application program.
Execution interval: see Figure Timing diagrams in Chapter Software Description.

Illustration
PZD3 OUT
OUT PROFIBUS
19.01
Operation
When this block is inserted, it automatically writes data value 1901 to field bus parameter 51.05 PZD3 OUT. A sent data (PZD3 OUT) from the master device is readable at the output pin of block (19.01). When this block is deleted, it automatically writes the value of zero to parameter 19.01 once. If this block is not activated, parameter 19.01 can be used for other purposes. In On-line mode PZD3 OUTPZD10 OUT blocks are available only if RPBA module is connected to SLOT1. In Off-line mode, use the Profibus template file. Output (OUT): 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
Connections
7 - 31

Type
PZD4 OUT Summary

Illustration
Execution interval: see Chapter 4 Figure 49 Timing diagrams.

PZD4 OUT
OUT PROFIBUS
19.02
Operation
When this block is inserted, it automatically writes data value 1902 to field bus parameter 51.07 PZD4 OUT. A sent data (PZD4 OUT) from the master device is readable at the output pin of block (19.02). When this block is deleted, it automatically writes the value zero to parameter 19.02 once. If this block is not activated, parameter 19.02 can be used for other purposes. In On-line mode PZD3 OUTPZD10 OUT blocks are available only if RPBA module is connected to SLOT1. In Off-line mode, use the Profibus template file. Output (OUT): 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
Connections
PZD5 OUT Summary
Type
Execution interval: see Figure Timing diagrams in chapter Software Description.

Illustration
PZD5 OUT
OUT PROFIBUS
19.03
Operation
Connections
7 - 32
PZD6 OUT Summary
Type

Illustration
PZD6 OUT
OUT PROFIBUS
19.04
Operation
Connections
PZD7 OUT Summary
Type

Illustration
PZD7 OUT
OUT PROFIBUS
19.05
Operation
When this block is inserted, it automatically writes data value 1905 to field bus parameter 51.13 PZD7 OUT. A sent data (PZD7 OUT) from the master device is readable at the output pin of block (19.05). When this block is deleted, it automatically writes the value zero to parameter 19.05 once. If this block is not activated, parameter 19.05 can be used for other purposes. In On-line mode PZD3 OUT...PZD10 OUT blocks are available only if RPBA module is connected to SLOT1. In Off-line mode, use the Profibus template file. Output (OUT): 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
Connections
7 - 33
PZD8 OUT
Type Summary

Illustration
PZD8 OUT
OUT PROFIBUS
19.06
Operation
Connections
PZD9 OUT
Type Summary

Illustration
PZD9 OUT
OUT PROFIBUS
19.07
Operation
Connections
7 - 34

Type
PZD10 OUT Summary

Illustration
PZD10 OUT
OUT PROFIBUS
19.08
Operation
Connections
PZD3 IN
Type Summary
Communication output block from the drive. This block is used with RPBA type of field bus module to write data value of PZD3 OUT to the Profibus master device.

Illustration
PZD3 IN
INPUT PROFIBUS
Operation
INPUT: Source signal is connected to INPUT and sent to the Profibus master. Assignment of source signal is written automatically to parameter 51.06 PZD3 IN during the input connection.
Note: The maximum index number to Profibus is 99. Use blocks 119 as a source from the block application to the Profibus. Note: the difference between the function block outputs (24 bit) and Profibus (16 bit). In On-line mode PZD3 INPZD10 IN blocks are available only if RPBA module is connected to SLOT1. In Off-line mode, use the Profibus template file. INPUT: 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
Connections
7 - 35
PZD4 IN
Type Summary

Illustration
PZD4 IN
INPUT PROFIBUS
Operation
Note: The maximum index number to Profibus is 99. Use blocks 119 as a source from the block application to the Profibus. Note the difference between the function block outputs (24 bit) and Profibus (16 bit). In On-line mode PZD3 IN...PZD10 IN blocks are available only if RPBA module is connected to SLOT1. In Off-line mode, use the Profibus template file. INPUT: 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
Connections
PZD5 IN
Type Summary

Illustration
PZD5 IN
INPUT PROFIBUS
Operation
Note: The maximum index number to Profibus is 99. Use blocks 1...19 as a source from the block application to the Profibus. Note the difference between the function block outputs (24 bit) and Profibus (16 bit). In On-line mode PZD3 INPZD10 IN blocks are available only if RPBA module is connected to SLOT1. In Off-line mode, use the Profibus template file. INPUT: 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
Connections
7 - 36

Type Summary
PZD6 IN

Illustration
PZD5 IN
INPUT PROFIBUS
Operation
Note: The maximum index number to Profibus is 99. Use blocks 119 as a source from the block application to the Profibus. Note the difference between the function block outputs (24 bit) and Profibus (16 bit). In On-line mode PZD3 INPZD10 IN blocks are available only if RPBA module is connected to SLOT1. In Off-line mode, use the Profibus template file. INPUT: 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
Connections
PZD7 IN
Type Summary

Illustration
PZD7 IN
INPUT PROFIBUS
Operation
Note: The maximum index number to Profibus is 99. Use blocks 119 as a source from the block application to the Profibus. Note the difference between the function block outputs (24 bit) and Profibus (16 bit). In On-line mode PZD3 IN...PZD10 IN blocks are available only if RPBA module is connected to SLOT1. In Off-line mode, use the Profibus template file. INPUT: 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
Connections
7 - 37
PZD8 IN
Type Summary

Illustration
PZD8 IN
INPUT PROFIBUS
Operation
Connections
PZD9 IN
Type Summary

Illustration
PZD9 IN
INPUT PROFIBUS
Operation
Connections
7 - 38

Type Summary
PZD10 IN

Illustration
PZD10 IN
INPUT PROFIBUS
Operation
Connections
REC1 M/F1 Summary

Illustration
Type
Communication receive block This block is used to receive data of REC2 DW1 between the master and follower drive via optic fibre link.

REC1 M/F1 ENABLE CH2 NODE CH2 MODE 94.02 OUT
Operation
ENABLE:
Communication is enabled (parameter 94.01 FOLLOWER 1)
CH2 NODE: Node address of follower drive 1 must be 2 on DDCS channel CH2 (parameter 70.07 CH2 NODE ADDR) Note: Master's node address is always 1. M/F MODE: Communication configuration of DDCS channel CH2. See parameter 70.08 M/F MODE.
1 = NOT IN USE 2 = MASTER 3 = FOLLOWER Received data is readable at the pin OUT 94.02.
Connections
ENABLE: CH2 NODE: M/F MODE: OUT:
Boolean type of parameter (0 = false, 1 = true) Integer value 1125 Integer value 13 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
7 - 39

Type
REC2 M/F1 Summary

Illustration
Communication receive block This block is used to receive data of REC2 DW2 between the master and follower drive via optic fibre link. Execution interval is 200 ms.
REC2 M/F1
94.03 M-NODE2 OUT
Operation
Received data is readable at the pin OUT 94.03. Note: Communication is enabled by parameter 94.01 FOLLOWER 1. OUT: 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
Connections
REC3 M/F1 Summary

Illustration
Type
REC3 M/F1
94.04 M-NODE2 OUT
Operation
This block is used to receive data of REC2 DW3 between the master and follower drive via optic fibre link. Received data is readable at the pin OUT 94.04.
Note: Communication is enabled by parameter 94.01 FOLLOWER 1.
Connections
OUT: 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
7 - 40
REC1 M/F2 Summary

Illustration
Type
REC1 M/F2 ENABLE CH2 NODE CH2 MODE 94.06 OUT
Operation
ENABLE:
Communication is enabled (parameter 94.05 FOLLOWER 2)
CH2 NODE: Node address of follower drive 2 must be 3 on DDCS channel CH2. See parameter 70.07 CH2 NODE ADDR. Note: Master's node address is always 1. M/F MODE: Communication configuration of DDCS channel CH2. See parameter 70.08 M/F MODE.
1 = NOT IN USE 2 = MASTER 3 = FOLLOWER Received data is readable at the pin OUT 94.06.
Connections
ENABLE: CH2 NODE: M/F MODE: OUT:
Boolean type of parameter (0 = false, 1 = true) Integer value 1125 Integer value 13 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
REC2 M/F2 Summary

Illustration
Type
REC2 M/F2
94.07 M-NODE3 OUT
Operation
Received data is readable at the pin OUT 94.07.

Note: Communication is enabled by parameter 94.05 FOLLOWER 2.
Connections
OUT: 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
7 - 41
REC3 M/F2
REC3 M/F2
94.08 M-NODE3 OUT
Operation
Received data is readable at the pin OUT 94.08. Note: Communication is enabled by parameter 94.05 FOLLOWER 2. OUT: 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
Connections
RUN ENA
RUN ENABLED block This block is used to interlock run command. Execution interval is 500 ms.
RUN ENA
66.32
IN
Operation
Input state: FALSE RUN is disabled with coast stop and an alarm "RUN DISABLED (FF54)" is indicated in the alarm and fault logger. A bit 14 of 9.05 Alarm Word 2 is set. Input state: TRUE RUN is enabled. A drive is started immediately, if start command is active.
Note: Activation of run disabled do not reset start command. Connections
Input IN 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign)
7 - 42

SPEED1 FILTER ms 1.03 OUT
SPEED 1
Speed measurement block This block is used to read signal SPEED MEASURED 1. Execution interval is 2 ms.
50.06
Operation
Measured speed is readable at the output pin OUT 1.03. FILTER ms: See parameter 50.06 SP ACT FILT TIME.
Connections
FILTER ms: integer value 1999999 OUT: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign)
SPEED 2
Speed measurement block This block is used to read signal SPEED MEASURED 2. Execution interval is 2 ms.
SPEED2 FILTER ms 1.28 OUT
50.18
Operation
Measured speed is readable at the output pin OUT 1.28. FILTER ms: See parameter 50.18 ENC2 FILTER TIME. FILTER ms: Integer value 1999999 OUT: 24 bit integer value (23 bits + sign)
Connections
7 - 43
SUB
Arithmetic subtraction function.

BLOCK x ADD ADD1 ADD2 ADD3 OUT
Operation
Subtraction can be implemented by using ADD block in which the subtracter input is inverted (multiplied by -1). OUT = ADD1 + (-ADD2) + (-ADD3) Example ADD1 = 3000 ADD2 = 1000 ADD3 = 0 (inverted in Connect Pin window of DriveAP) (inverted in Connect Pin window of DriveAP)
OUT = ADD1 + (-ADD2) + (-ADD3) 2000 = 3000 + (-1000) + (-0) Input ADD1, ADD2 and ADD3: 24 bit integer values (23 bits + sign) Output (OUT): 24 bit integer (23 bits + sign)
Connections
TRA M/F1
Type Summary
Communication block Communication is enabled in both end by parameter 94.01 FOLLOWER 1. See block REC1M/F 1. Execution interval is 100 ms.
TRA M/F 1 M-NODE2 TRANSMIT 1 TRANSMIT 2 TRANSMIT 3
Illustration
Operation
Communication is enabled in both end by parameter 94.01 FOLLOWER 1. See block REC1M/F 1 TRANSMIT 1: TRANSMIT 2: TRANSMIT 3: Input for transferred data word 1 Input for transferred data word 2 Input for transferred data word 3
Connections
Parameter 70.07 CH2 NODE ADDR must be 2 in the follower 1. See block REC1M/F 1. TRANSMIT 13: 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
7 - 44
TRA M/F2
Type Summary
Communication block Communication is enabled in both end by parameter 94.05 FOLLOWER 2. See block REC1M/F 2. Execution interval is 100 ms.
TRA M/F 2 M-NODE3 TRANSMIT 1 TRANSMIT 2 TRANSMIT 3
Illustration
Operation
Communication is enabled in both end by parameter 94.05 FOLLOWER 2. See block REC1M/F 1 TRANSMIT 1: TRANSMIT 2: TRANSMIT 3: Input for transferred data word 1 Input for transferred data word 2 Input for transferred data word 3
Connections
Parameter 70.07 CH2 NODE ADDR must be 3 in the follower 2. See block REC1M/F 2. TRANSMIT 13: 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
Factory Connections of Blocks
Multi Block Programming Application is always delivered with factory settings. It includes speed reference from the analogue input 1 (AI1) connected to I/O N REF block. On 100 ms time level: DI1 DI2 START=1, STOP = 0 RESET 0->1
Drive will restart automatically after power reconnection, if digital input START is already active. This must be noticed in the application in safety point of view. This connection can be further modified or disconnected and application engineer can design his or her own one.
7 - 45
Figure 7 - 2 Factory connection
7 - 46
Chapter 8 Fault Tracing

This chapter describes the protections and fault tracing of drive.
Protections
I/O- Monitoring
If the RMIO board cannot read its I/O, or with an I/O Extension Module connected to the Slot 1, Slot 2 or I/O Extension Link, the following alarms are given:
DIGITAL IO ANALOG IO EXT DIGITAL IO EXT ANALOG IO bit 7 in ALARM WORD_1 (9.04) bit 8 in ALARM WORD_1 (9.04) bit 9 in ALARM WORD_1 (9.04) bit 10 in ALARM WORD_1 (9.04)
I/O COMM ERR fault is indicated, if SW selections do not match with HW configuration.
I/O COMM ERR bit 6 in FAULT WORD_2 (9.02)
Communication Monitoring
Messages received from the overriding system are monitored in the RMIO diagnostics program. The monitoring function is activated by parameter 70.4 CH0 TIME OUT. This parameter defines the delay before the communication fault is indicated. By entering the value zero, this function is disabled. In case of a communication fault the action is defined in the parameter 70.05 CH0 COM LOSS CTRL. In a communication fault, bit 12 (fault COMM MODULE) in 9.02 FAULT WORD 2, is set to 1. This parameter is also in use with Rxxx type of fieldbus modules. The drive supervises the inverter power plate module temperature. If a temperature exceeds an alarm limit, a warning ACS 800 TEMP is given and 9.04 ALARM WORD 1 bit 4 is set to 1. ACS800: Alarm temperatures are type-specific. If the power plate module temperature exceeds a trip limit, a fault ACS 800 TEMP is given and 09.01 FAULT WORD 1 bit 3 is set to 1. Trip temperatures are type-specific. The drive measures the ambient temperature on the surface of the RMIO board. The drive will not start if the temperature is below -5C or above 73 to 82C (depending on the converter type). Also a fault CONTROL B TEMP is given and 9.02 FAULT WORD 2 bit 7 is set to1. The overcurrent trip limit is 3.5 * Ihd (nominal motor current for heavy duty use). There are several sources of overcurrent trip: Software trip (time level 100 s, level = 97% of measurement scale) Hardware level trip (97% of measurement scale for 35 s)
8-1
ACS 600/ACS800 Inverter
Overtemperature Fault Ambient Temperature
ACS 600/ ACS800 Overcurrent
Hardware derivative trip (12.5% of measurement scale for 75 s) Hardware level trip in parallel connected units by xPBU logic (94% of measurement scale for 75 s)
A fault OVERCURRENT is given and 09.01 FAULT WORD 1 bit 1 is set to 1. The current measurement is calibrated automatically during the start procedure. With parallel connected inverters the overcurrent fault indication is OVERCURR x.
DC Overvoltage
The DC Overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 * 1.35 * U1max, where U1max is the maximum value of the mains voltage range.
Nominal Voltage of Inverter Unit 400 V 500 V 690 V U1max(AC) 415 V 500 V 690 V UDC Overvoltage Trip Limit 730 V 880 V 1210 V
A fault DC OVERVOLT is given and 09.01 FAULT WORD 1 bit 2 is set to 1.

HIGH VOLTAGE TRIP LIMIT: 130% HIGH VOLTAGE CONTROL LIMIT: 124% BRAKE CHOPPER LIMIT: 120%
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL LIMIT: 82% CHARGING LIMIT: 79% LOW VOLTAGE TRIPPING LIMIT: 60%
Figure 8 - 1 DC Voltage Control and Tripping Limits
DC Undervoltage
The DC Undervoltage trip limit is 0.60 * 1.35 * U1min, where U1min is the minimum value of the mains voltage range.
Nominal Voltage of Inverter Unit 400 V 500 V 690 V U1min 380 V 380 V 525 V (AC) UDC Undervoltage Trip Limit 307 V 307 V 425 V
A fault DC UNDERVOLT is given and 09.02 FAULT WORD 2 bit 2 is set to 1.

8-2 ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x
PPCC Link Diagnostics
PPCC link is 8 Mbit/s communication link between the RMIO control board and xINT Main Circuit Interface board. A fault indication in case of error is PPCC LINK and 9.02 FAULT WORD 2 bit 11 is 1 with non-parallel connected drive and also with parallel connected drive, if the communication fault exists between the RMIO and APBU-44 (NPBU-42) branching unit. Fault is indication is PPCC x with parallel connected drives, where x means the inverter module number. The status of the found ACS800 modules is indicated in signal 8.22 INT CONFIG WORD.
Panel loss Function
Panel loss function defines the operation of the drive if the control panel or DriveWindow selected as control location for the drive stops communication (toggle bit). Settings: Par. 30.21 PANEL LOSS. Panel loss is indicated in 9.05 ALARM WORD 2 bit 13 and 9.02 FAULT WORD 2 bit 13. There are separate protection circuits for supervising the motor cable and the short circuits at the inverter output. If a short circuit occurs, the drive will not start, a fault SHORT CIRC is given and 09.01 FAULT WORD1 bit 0 is set to 1. See also 9.15 SHORT CIRC FAULT for parallel connected inverter modules, where a fault text is SC INV xy. Input phase loss protection circuits supervise the status of the mains in the supply section by detecting the intermediate current ripple. If an input phase is lost, the intermediate circuit current ripple increases. If the ripple exceeds 13% the drive is stopped and a fault SUPPLY PHASE is given. 09.02 FAULT WORD 2 bit 0 is set to 1. If the drive output frequency exceeds the pre-set level (e.g. in the case of overshooting in speed control), the drive is stopped and a fault OVER FREQ is given. 09.01 FAULT WORD 1 bit 9 is set to 1. The trip level frequency margin is adjustable by Parameter 20.11 FREQ TRIP MARGIN at the output circuit of inverter. The protection is based on the sum current measurement on 100 us time level. A fault function can be selected with non-parallel connected drive by Par. 30.20 EARTH FAULT. In case of fault, EARTH FAULT is indicated and 09.01 FAULT WORD 1 bit 4 is set to 1. If NO is selected, an alarm EARTH FAULT is given and 09.04 ALARM WORD 1 bit 14 is set to 1. For parallel connected ACS800 inverter modules each module monitors current unbalance at the output and the fault indication is CUR UNBAL x, where x is the inverter number.
Short Circuit
Intermediate DC Link Current Ripple Fault
Overspeed Fault
Earth Fault The earth fault protection detects faults in the motor, motor cable or
8-3
ACS 600 Earth Fault The tripping level of inverter sizes R10iR12i can be selected by parameter 30.25 EARTH FAULT LEVEL. The parameter defines the level set unbalance t
rip level of sum current measured by the NINT board.
ACS 600 Earth/ This section describes how to track the cause of earth fault in Fault Logics ACS 600 MultiDrive R2i-R12i, 2xR11i/R12i and 4xR11i/R12i modules.
Earth fault notification of inverter module does not always indicate actual earth fault. Failure can sometimes be in IGBTs or NGDRs.
8-4
Earth fault notification
R8-4xR12:
Are mains grounded? yes Measure: Earth leakage on motor or cabling? no Check that currents U and I IW 0A when UDC is on no
Change: 1. NINT-XX 2. Earth fault current transducer
R2-R7:
yes
no
Set Earth fault limit = 4
Change: 1. NINT-XX 2. Current transducers 3. Cabling (40 pin / 3 pin) 4. NXPP-XX
yes Change: Damaged motor, switchgear or cabling Check the LEDs of the hottest INU (See Chart 1). Which is the hottest Phase / Power Plate? Change: 1. NGDR of the hottest Power Plate no Fault fixed? yes yes NGDR-XX damaged. Breakthrough fault Change: 1. NGDR-XX of the adjacent Power Plate(s) no
Fault fixed? yes
no
Are the inverters connected parallel? Fault fixed? yes no
Are the Power Plate temperatures within 5 C? yes
no
Fault fixed? Is the fibre between NINT and NPBU damaged? Contact ABB Helsinki. Set limit = 5 yes NGDR-XX damaged. No control
no
no
yes Change: 1. Fibre between NINT and NPBU
Fault fixed? yes
no
Contact ABB Helsinki. Set limit = 6
Fault fixed? yes OK
no
Change: Cabling to less capacitive one
Figure 8 - 2 This Flowchart can be used to Trace the Cause of Earth Fault and to Find Faulty Parts.
ACS 600 Indicator LEDs in the NINT Board
Following figure describes how to find the hottest phase or power plate by checking the LEDs of NINT-XX and NXPP-0X boards. This applies only to parallel connected phase modules and power plates of R8iR12i modules.
8-5
R8i...R9i
PHASE and POWER PLATE
NINT-67 U V W
R10i...R11i NINT-68 NXPP-02

U-PHASE PHASE V-PHASE
NXPP-02 TW
W-PHASE
TU T2
POWER PLATE
TV T2
T1
POWER PLATE
T1
T1
POWER PLATE
T2
R12i NINT-70 NXPP-03

U-PHASE PHASE V-PHASE
NXPP-03 W
W-PHASE
U 3
POWER PLATE
1
POWER PLATE
1
POWER PLATE
Figure 8 - 3 LED Indicators of NINT Boards.
Interpretation of the LEDs in ACS 600
All LEDs are unlit on NINT-XX or NXPP-0X board: No DC-voltage connected. Possibly burned fuse on the NPOW-62 board. Connection between NRED-61 and NPOW-62 is faulty. Connection between NPOW-62 (X32) and NINT-XX (X42) is faulty.
Only one LED is lit on NINT-XX or NXPP-0X board: That phase or power plate is hotter than the other ones. One LED is brighter than other ones on NINT-XX or NXPP-0X board: That phase or power plate is hotter than the other ones. All LEDs are lit on NINT-XX or NXPP-0X board: That phase or power plate is hotter than the other ones. R8iR9i modules: The three LEDs of NINT-XX tell the hottest phase and also the hottest power plate, because on each phase there is only one power plate. R10iR11i modules: The upper three LEDs of NINT-XX board show, which phase is the hottest. The lower two LEDs of NINT-XX indicate the hottest power plate on V-phase and the two LEDs of NXPP-0X indicate the hottest power plate on U-phase (left NXPP-0X) and W-phase (right NXPP-0X). Two power plates are connected parallel in each phase module.
8-6
R12i module: The upper three LEDs of NINT-XX board show, which phase is the hottest. The lower three LEDs of NINT-XX tell the hottest power plate on V-phase and the three LEDs of NXPP-0X tell the hottest power plate on U-phase (left NXPP-0X) and W-phase (right NXPP-0X). Three parallel connected power plates are placed in each phase module. The causes of overheated power plate are usually faulty NGDR-XX boards, damaged power plates or badly installed power plates (greasing or quality of the surface). The colours of the three LEDs and the matching phases or power plates are: U-phase / power plate 1 V-phase / power plate 2 W-phase / power plate 3 Green (left) Yellow (middle) Red (right)
For two power plates per phase (R10iR11i): Power plate T1 Yellow (left) Power plate T2 Green (right)
Speed Measurement Fault of Encoder 1
Speed measurement 1 Fault is activated, if No pulses are received within the time of Parameter 50.11 ENCODER DELAY and the drive is simultaneously at the current or torque limit. There is a 20% difference between the estimated and measured speed received from the pulse encoder (parameter 50.03 = SPEED FB SEL = ENCODER). There is no communication between the pulse encoder module and RMIO board. The pulse frequency of the pulse encoder changes considerably during a time interval of 1 ms.
The Fault/Alarm function is activated by Parameter 50.05 ENCODER ALM/FLT. In case of a fault, 09.02 FAULT WORD 2 bit 5 is set to 1 and a fault ENCODER ERR1 is given.
Speed Measurement Fault of Encoder 2
Speed Measurement 2 Fault is activated, if There is no communication between the pulse encoder module and RMIO board.
The Fault/Alarm function is activated by parameter 50.17 ENCODER 2 ALM/FLT. In case of a fault, 09.02 FAULT WORD 2 bit 10 is set to 1 and a fault ENCODER2 ERR is given. If an alarm function has been selected, 9.04 ALARM WORD 1 bit 6 is set.
8-7
Switching from Measured Speed to Estimated Speed
In case of an alarm, 9.04 ALARM WORD 1 bit 5 is set to 1 and an alarm ENCODER ERR1 is given. If an alarm function has been selected and the speed measurement error is detected based on derivation term of speed the drive automatically starts to use estimated speed. Drive uses estimated speed as long as the difference between estimated and measured speed is bigger than 1%. The difference is checked every five seconds. When the difference is smaller than 1% drive turns back to use measured speed. The status of the used actual speed can be seen from the 8.02 AP STATUS WORD bit 12. If the inner control loop exceeds the maximum switching frequency, a fault OVER SWFREQ is given and 9.02 FAULT WORD 2 bit 9 is set to 1. If the program on the RMIO board has failed and causes an interruption, 09.01 FAULT WORD 1 bit 7 (SYSTEM_FAULT) is set to 1. See ACS800 catalogue for light-overload and heavy-duty use ratings. The inverter section of the ACS 600 MultiDrive incorporates an IGBTtransistor power stage. Duty Cycles A and B are presented for each inverter type in the ACS 600 MultiDrive catalogue (code 3BFE63981915). See also the environmental limits. IAC_NOMIN
AL
Overswitching Frequency Fault System Fault ACS800 Short Time Overloading ACS 600 Short Time Overloading
= nominal current (continuous)
IAC_4/5 min IAC_1/5 min IAC_50/60 s IAC_10/60 s
= I2 base current for Duty Cycle A = I2 max current for Duty Cycle A (150% of the base current IAC_4/5 min) = I2 base current for Duty Cycle B = I2 max current for Duty Cycle B (200% of the base current IAC_50/60 s)
If the overload cycle is longer than described for Duty Cycle A or B, the inverter section is protected against the overload with a temperature measurement sensor and a software algorithm. Overloading between I AC_Nominal and I AC_1/5 min If the load current is continuously between I AC_Nominal and I AC_1/5 min, the temperature of the IGBT power plate(s) and the heat sink will increase further. The overloading time is limited by means of the temperature sensor.
8-8

I/(A)
4000
ACA 610 2340-3 Duty Cycle A

IAC_1/5 min IAC_Nominal
3000
2000
1000
t/(min)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 8 - 4 Overloading Range between I AC_Nominal and I AC_1/5 min in ACA 6102340-3
If the measured temperature exceeds 115C, a warning ACS 800
TEMP is given and 9.04 ALARM WORD 1 bit 4 is set to 1. If the power plate module temperature exceeds 125C, a fault ACS 800 TEMP is given and 9.01 FAULT WORD 1 bit 3 is set 1. The inverter pulses are blocked and the drive stops by coasting (zero torque). Overloading between the I AC_1/5 min and Maximum Current The maximum current is limited by parameter 20.04 MAXIMUM CURRENT. If the actual current exceeds the I AC_1/5 min level, a software algorithm is also activated. The load cycle between I AC_1/5 min and the maximum current is time-limited as a function of current by means of a software integrator and thus the areas of the A1, A2 and A3 are equal. A1 = 10 s * (l AC_10/60s - AC_1/5 min.).
I/(A)
ACA 610 2340-3 Duty Cycle B examples

overloading is limited by the inverter software IAC_10/60s A1 = A2 = A3
5000
4000 3796 3374 3000
A1
A2
A3
IAC_1/5 min IAC_Nominal
2402 2000
Forced Cooling Cycle
IAC_50/60s
Short time Overload Cycle

1000
t/(s)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240
Figure 8 - 5 Overloading example when the Load Current is > I AC_1/5 min
8-9
At the beginning of a forced cooling cycle, 9.05 ALARM WORD 2 bit 2 is set to 1 and an alarm INV OVERLOAD is given.
Motor Protections
Motor Thermal Protection Functions
The motor can be protected against overheating by: activating the DTC motor thermal model or User Mode measuring motor temperature by PT 100, PTC or KTY84-1xx sensors by block programming.
The motor thermal model can be used parallel with other temperature protections (PTC, PT100, KTY84-1xx, KLIXON).
C
180 155 130 120 80 40
Maximum ambient temperature Insulation class Maximum winding temperature 40 B 130 C 40 F 155 C 40 H 180 C Hot spot temperature margin
Permissible temperature rise 80 10 10
15
105
125
Figure 8 - 6 Motor Insulation Classes According to IEC 85 Motor Thermal Model The drive calculates the temperature of the motor based on the following assumptions: 1. By default the motor ambient temperature is 30C (see parameter 30.31 AMBIENT TEMP). 2. Motor temperature is calculated using either the user-adjustable or automatically calculated Motor Thermal Time and Motor Load Curve. The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature is higher than 30 C. See parameters 30.0130.12. The thermal model provides protection equivalent to standard class 10, 20, or 30 overload relays by setting the Motor Thermal Time to 350, 700, or 1050 seconds respectively and parameter 30.29 THERM MOD FLT L to value 110C. There are two levels of temperature monitoring: alarm MOTOR TEMP is activated when the alarm temperature limit defined by Parameter 30.28 THERM MOD ALM L is reached and 09.04 ALARM WORD 1 bit 3 is set to 1.
8 - 10
fault MOTOR TEMP is activated when the trip temperature limit defined by Parameter 30.29 THERM MOD FLT L is reached, 09.01 FAULT WORD 1 bit 6 is set to 1.
Usage of PT100, PTC or KTY84-1xx Temperature Sensors
Motor temperature can be measured by using the analogue inputs and outputs of the drive. WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the thermistor to the analogue I/O (RMIO or RAIO) or to digital input DI6 of the RMIO requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the thermistor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage of 8 mm (400/500 VAC equipment). If the thermistor assembly does not fulfil the requirement, the other I/O terminals of drive must be protected against contact, or a thermistor relay must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input.
AO+ AOAI+ AI-
Motor
Figure 8 - 7 Thermistor connection example using Analogue I/O. Motor overtemperature can be detected by connecting 1...3 PTC thermistors, 1...3 PT100 elements or silicon temperature sensor (KTY84-1xx). Note: The thermistor can also be connected to digital input DI6 on the RMIO board according to the following figure. If direct thermistor connection is used, digital input DI6 goes to 0 false when resistance rises higher than 4 k. By means of block programme it is possible to cause trip (EVENT block).
RMIO X22: 6 DI6 7 +24 VDC
Thermistor relay
Motor
8 - 11
Stall Function
The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision limits (torque, frequency, time) and choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition (warning indication fault indication & stop; no reaction). The protection is activated if all the following conditions are fulfilled at the same time: 1. The drive output frequency is below the Stall Frequency limit set by the user. 2. The application is at a stall limit set by user (defined by parameters 20.0420.10) 3. Conditions 1 and 2 have been fulfilled longer than the period set by the user (Stall Time Limit). An alarm or fault function can be selected by Parameter 30.13 STALL FUNCTION. If FAULT is selected, a stall situation produces a fault MOTOR STALL and sets 9.02 FAULT WORD 2 bit 14 to 1. If WARNING is selected, a stall situation produces a warning MOTOR STALL and sets 9.05 ALARM WORD 2 bit 9 to 1.
Underload Function
The loss of motor load may indicate a process malfunction. The drive drive provides an Underload Function to protect the machinery and process in such a fault condition. The supervision limits (Underload Curve and Underload Time) can be chosen as well as the drive operation in an underload condition (warning indication; fault indication & stop; no reaction). The protection is activated if all the following conditions are fulfilled at the same time: 1. The motor load is below the Underload Curve selected by the user. 2. The motor load has been below the selected Underload Curve longer than the time set by the user (Underload Time). 3. The drive output frequency is more than 10% of the motor nominal frequency. An alarm or fault function can be selected by Parameter 30.16 UNDERLOAD FUNC. If FAULT is selected, an underload situation produces a fault UNDERLOAD and sets 9.01 FAULT WORD 1 bit 8 to 1. If WARNING is selected, an underload situation produces a warning UNDERLOAD and sets 9.05 ALARM WORD 2 bit 1 to 1.
Motor Phase Loss Function
The Motor Phase Loss function monitors the status of the motor cable connections. The function is most useful during motor start. The drive detects if any of the motor phases have not been connected and refuses to start. The Phase Loss function also supervises the motor connection status during normal operation.
8 - 12
The user can define the operation upon motor phase loss. The alternatives are either a fault indication and Stop, or no reaction. The fault indication is MOTOR PHASE. 09.02 FAULT WORD 2 bit 15 is simultaneously set to a 1.
8 - 13
Fault Message Table
FAULT MESSAGES
Alarm / Fault Text
ACS 800 TEMP 9.01 FW_1, bit 3 Fault code: 4210 ACS TEMP x y 9.13 OVERTEMP WORD Fault code: 4210 BACKUP ERROR Fault code: FFA2 BC OVERHEAT Fault code: 7114
(in alphabetical order) What to do

Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against unit power. Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against unit power. Retry. Check connections. Check that parameters are compatible with drive. Stop drive. Let chopper cool down. Check parameter settings of resistor overload protection function (see parameter group 34 BRAKE CHOPPER). Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits. Check that the supply AC voltage of the drive is not excessive.
Cause
The drive internal temperature is excessive. A fault is given if inverter module temperature exceeds the trip level. The drive internal temperature is excessive in inverter module x phase y. This diagnostics is valid with parallel connected inverters. (x = 112, y = U, V and W) Failure when restoring PC-stored backup of drive parameters.
Brake chopper overload.
BR BROKEN Fault code: 7110
Brake resistor is not connected or it is damaged. The resistance rating of the brake resistor is too high. Overload of the brake resistor.
Check the resistor and the resistor connection. Check that the resistance rating meets the specification. See the Brake Chopper Users Manual (code: 3AFE64273507 [English]). Stop drive. Let the resistor cool down. Check parameter settings of the resistor overload protection function (see parameter group 34 BRAKE CHOPPER). Check that braking cycle meets the allowed limits. Check that the supply AC voltage of the drive is not excessive.
BR OVERHEAT Fault code: 7112
BC SHORT CIR Fault code: 7113 BR WIRING Fault code: 7111 CONTROL B TEMP Fault code: 4110 9.02 FW_2, bit 7 CABLE TEMP Fault code: 4080 9.02 FW_2 bit 3
Short circuit in brake chopper IGBT(s). Wrong connection of brake resistor. Cabinet over- or undertemperature detected on the RMIO board (thermistor). Environment temperature is too high (>80C).
Replace brake chopper. Ensure brake resistor is connected and not damaged. Check resistor connection. Ensure brake resistor is not damaged. Boost the cooling of air.
Check the motor load. Motor cable overtemperature trip. Thermal model of cable has reached Check the motor cable and its type. Verify with 100% temperature level. the cable thermal model parameters in parameter group 36.
8 - 14
FAULT MESSAGES
Alarm / Fault Text
COMM MODULE Fault code: 7510 9.02 FW_2, bit 12

Check the connections of fieldbus adapter module. With an ABB Advant overriding system check channel CH0 optical fibres between the RMIO board and overriding system (or Nxxx type of fieldbus adapter). Test with new optical fibres. Check the earthings of fieldbus cables. Check that the node address is correct in the drive. Check the status of the fieldbus adapter. See appropriate fieldbus adapter manual. Check parameter settings of Group 51, if a fieldbus adapter is present. Check the connections between the fieldbus and the adapter. Check that the bus master is communicating and correctly configured.
Cause
Fieldbus communication break detected on fieldbus module or on communication channel CH0 receive. (Programmable fault, see parameter 70.04)
M/F COM LOSS Fault code: 7520 9.01 FW_1, bit 11 CTRL B TEMP Fault code: 4110 CURR MEAS Fault code: 2211 CUR UNBAL x Fault code: 2330 9.10 CURRENT UNBALANCE
Communication break detected on follower drive. (Programmable fault or alarm, see parameter 70.14) Control board temperature is lower than 5 0 C or exceeds +73 82 C. Current transformer failure in output current measurement circuit. The current unbalance detected at the output of inverter module x. Tripping level setting is too sensitive in the non parallel connected ACS600 R10iR12i inverters. Check Parameter 30.25. Drive supply voltage is excessive. DC voltage rises too fast for overvoltage controller (if used) to react. When supply voltage is over 124% of unit voltage rating (415, 500 or 690 V), motor speed rushes to trip level (40% of nominal speed)
Check the optical fibres between the RMIO boards. Check that the optical fibre loop is closed. Test with new optical fibres. Check air flow and fan operation.
Check current transformer connections to Main Circuit Interface Board, INT. Check motor. Check motor cable. Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in the motor cable. Check supply voltage level, rated voltage of the drive and allowed voltage range of the drive.
DC HIGH RUSH Fault code: FF80 9.06 FW_3, bit 11
8 - 15
FAULT MESSAGES
Alarm / Fault Text
DC OVERVOLT Fault code: 3210 9.01 FW_1, bit 2

Check the functioning of the braking chopper.
Cause
Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive. This can be caused by
If using a regenerative incoming section check 1. Static or transient overvoltages in that the diode mode is not forced during deceleration. the mains. 2. Faulty braking chopper or resistor (if used). 3. Deceleration time being too short, if there is no braking chopper or regenerative incoming section. 4. Internal fault in the inverter unit. Check the level of DC voltage and inverter nominal voltage. Replace the NINT-xx board (its voltage measurement circuit is faulty).
DC UNDERVOLT Fault code: 3220 9.02 FW_2, bit 2 DDF FORMAT 9.03 SFW, bit 3 EARTH FAULT Fault code: 2330 9.01 FW_1, bit 4
Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient. This can be caused by a missing mains phase in the diode rectifying bridge. File error in FLASH memory. The load on the incoming mains system is out of balance. This can be caused by a fault in the motor, motor cable or an internal malfunction. (Programmable fault, see parameter 30.20) Tripping level setting is too sensitive in the non parallel connected R10iR12i inverters. Check Parameter 30.25.
Checks mains supply and inverter fuses. With MultiDrive HW and DC switch option, check the feedback circuit to the input of DC switch block. Replace the RMIO board. Check motor. Check motor cable. Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in the motor cable.
ENCODER A<>B Fault code: 7302 9.06 FW_3 bit 10 ENCODER1 ERR Fault code: 7301 9.02 FW_2 bit 5
Interchange the connection of pulse encoder Pulse encoder 1 phasing is wrong: Phase A is connected to the terminal phases A and B. of phase B and vice versa. Speed measurement 1 fault detected. This can be caused by loose cable connection, communication time-out, faulty pulse encoder, or too great a difference between the internal and measured actual speeds. (Programmable fault or alarm, see parameter 50.05) Check parameter group 50 SPEED MEASUREMENT settings. Check pulse encoder and its cabling including Ch A and Ch B phasing. Sign of signal 1.03 SPEED MEASURED 1 must be same as internal actual speed 1.02 MOTOR SPEED when rotating the motor. If not, exchange channels A and B. Check the installation between the RMIO and RDCU DDCS option board. Check fibre optic connection between the RMIO board and the RTAC pulse encoder module. Check the proper earthing of equipment. Check for highly emissive components nearby.
8 - 16
FAULT MESSAGES
Alarm / Fault Text
ENCODER2 ERR Fault code: 7301 9.02 FW_2 bit 10

Check the configuration. Check the pulse encoder module. Check the pulse encoder 2 and its cabling. Check optic fibre connection between the RMIO board and the NTAC-02 pulse encoder module. Check the proper earthing of equipment. Check the auxiliary power supply of pulse encoder module.
Cause
Communication break detected between the encoder module 2 and RMIO. This can be caused by a loose cable connection or faulty pulse encoder. (Programmable fault or alarm, see parameter 50.17)
FACTORY FILE 9.03 SFW bit 0 FLT (xx) 8.01 MSW bit 3 ID RUN FAIL Fault code: FF84 8.01 MSW bit 3
Factory macro parameter file error. There is an internal fault in the drive.
Replace the RMIO board. Check for loose connections inside of frequency converter cabinet. Write down the Fault code (in brackets). Contact ABB Service.
Motor ID Run not possible due to the Check that no overriding system is connected limits or locked rotor. to the drive. Switch off the auxiliary voltage supply from the RMIO board and power up again. Check the parameter values in Group 20. Check that no limits prevent the ID Run. Restore factory settings and try again. Check that the motor shaft is not locked.
INT CONFIG Fault code: 5410 9.06 FW_3 bit 7
Number of found ACS800 R8i inverter modules is not equal with original configuration.
Check the status of not found inverter modules. See signals 8.20 INV ENABLED WORD. Check the fibre optic connections between the APBU and R8i inverter modules. In case of Reduced Run function, isolate faulted inverter module from the main circuit and type the number of existing inverter modules to parameter 16.10 INT CONFIG USER. Reset the drive.
INV DISABLED Fault code: 3200 9.02 FW_1 bit 4 Status: 8.20 INV ENABLED WORD
DC switch has been opened during running or start command has been given, when DC switch is open. This diagnostics is valid in ACS800 R8i modules with AFSC-0x Fuse Switch Controller unit.
Close the DC switch before attempting a start between the inverter DC supply terminals and common DC busbars. A DC switch status of each parallel connected inverter module can be seen from the signal 8.20 INV ENABLED WORD. If a DC switch is not included to the HW configuration, deactivate this function by Parameter 98.12 FUSE SWITCH CNTR.
8 - 17
FAULT MESSAGES
Alarm / Fault Text
IO COMM ERR

Option slot installation RAIO, RDIO, RTAC: Check the status LED (WD/INIT, yellow) in the extension module. The LED is lit when the drive is configuring the module at power-up. If the LED does not go out after one second, the configuration has failed. - Cycle the power supply of the drive - Change the option module. - Check for loose connections between the extension module and RMIO board. I/O Module Adapter installation Test with new optic fibre cables. Check the module node IDs of extension I/O modules with AIMA-01I/O adapter module. Check the intensity level of optic transmitters with AIMA-01. See rotary HEX switch, setting. If the fault is still active, replace the I/O board/extension unit(s).
Cause
I/O communication fault or error detected. This can be caused by a fault in the I/O unit, a fibre optic cable connection problem or incorrect module identification number (if I/O extension modules are present via optic link).
Fault code: 7000 9.02 FW_2 bit 6
LINE CONV Fault code: FF51 9.06 FW 3 bit 3 MOD BOARD T Fault code: FF88 9.06 FW_3 bit 14 MOD CHOKE T Fault code: FF89 9.06 FW_3 bit 13 MOTOR PHASE Fault code: FF56 9.02 FW_2 bit 15
Fault on the line side converter.
Shift panel from motor-side converter control board to line-side converter control board. See line side converter manual for fault description. Check inverter fan. Check ambient temperature. Check inverter fan. Check ambient temperature. Check liquid cooling system. Check motor and motor cable. If the motor is disconnected, this fault is activated. Check thermal relay (if used). Check MOTOR PHASE Fault Function parameters. Disable this protection. If the cable and motor is ok, this fault can appear with small motors (<30 kW) in low speed. Deactivate protection in this case.
Overtemperature in AINT board of inverter module.
Overtemperature in choke of liquid cooled R8i inverter module.
Fault in the motor circuit. One of the motor phases is lost. This can be caused by a fault in the motor, the motor cable, a thermal relay (if used), or an internal fault. (Programmable fault or alarm, see parameter 30.19).
MOTOR STALL Fault code: 7121 9.02 FW_2 bit 14
Check motor load and the inverter ratings. Motor or process stall. Motor is operating in the stall region. This can Check MOTOR STALL Fault Function parameters (30.13 ... 30.15). be caused by excessive load or insufficient motor power. (Programmable fault or alarm, see parameter 30.13)
MOTOR TEMP Fault code: 4310 9.01 FW_1 bit 6
Overtemperature fault (thermal model). Temperature has exceeded the tripping level of the thermal model. (Programmable fault or alarm, see parameter 30.02)
Check motor ratings, load and cooling. Check start-up data. Check MOTOR TEMP Fault Function parameters.
8 - 18
FAULT MESSAGES
Alarm / Fault Text Cause
NO MOTOR DATA Motor data is not given or motor data Check the motor data given by Parameters does not match with inverter data. 99.02...99.06. Fault code: FF52 9.02 FW_2 bit 1 NVOS ERROR 9.03 SFW bit 2 OVER SWFREQ Fault code: FF55 9.02 FW_2 bit 9 OVERCURRENT Fault code: 2310 9.01 FW_1 bit 1 Over switching frequency fault. This may be due to a hardware fault in the electronics boards. Overcurrent has been detected. Replace the RMIO board. Replace the NINT / AINT / RINT board. On units with parallel connected inverters, replace the branching unit board. If the drive tripped during flying start, check that Parameter 21.01 START FUNCTION is set to AUTO. (Other modes do not support flying start). Check motor load. Check acceleration time. Check motor and motor cable (including phasing). Check pulse encoder and pulse encoder cable. Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in the motor cable. Check the nominal motor values from Group 99 to confirm that the motor model is correct. OVERCURR x Fault code: 2310 9.01 FW_1 bit 1 9.11 OVERCURRENT WORD Overcurrent has been detected in the inverter module x. This diagnostics is valid with parallel connected inverters. (x = 112) If the drive tripped during flying start, check that Parameter 21.01 START FUNCTION is set to AUTO. (Other modes do not support flying start). Check motor load. Check acceleration time. Check motor and motor cable (including phasing). Check pulse encoder and pulse encoder cable. Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in the motor cable. Check the nominal motor values from group 99 to confirm that the motor model is correct. OVERFREQ Fault code: 7123 9.01 FW_1 bit 9 Motor is turning faster than the highest allowed speed. This can be caused by an incorrect setting of parameters, insufficient braking torque or changes in the load when using torque reference. Check the minimum and maximum speed settings. Check the adequacy of motor braking torque. Check the applicability of torque control. Check the need for a Braking Chopper and Braking Resistor if the drive has a Diode Supply Unit. Check Parameter 20.11 FREQ TRIP MARGIN. Non-volatile operating system error. Replace the RMIO board.
8 - 19
FAULT MESSAGES
Alarm / Fault Text
PANEL LOSS Fault code: 5300 9.02 FW_2 bit 13
Cause
A Local Control device (CDP312R or Check Control Panel connector. Replace Control Panel in the mounting platform. Check DriveWindow) has ceased communicating. This can be caused PANEL LOST Fault Function parameters. by the disconnection of the selected local control device during local control or an internal fault in the local controlling device. (Programmable fault or alarm, see parameter 30.21)
POWER FAIL x Fault code: PPCC LINK Fault code: 5210 9.02 FW_2 bit 11
Power failure detected in the auxiliary supply circuits of APBU or ACS800 R8i modules (AINT-1x) This diagnostics is valid with parallel connected inverters. (x = 112) xINT board current measurement or communication fault between the RMIO and boards. (This fault can be masked, if the DC intermediate circuit voltage has been disconnected, but the RMIO board has an external power supply and fault indication is not needed. The Fault appears only if the motor is start. See Parameter 30.24)
Check the auxiliary power supply circuits.
Check the fibre optic cables connected between the RMIO and xINT boards. In parallel connected inverters, also check the cabling on the branching unit. If the fault is still active, replace the branching unit (only with parallel connected inverters), RMIO and xINT board until the fault disappears. Test with new fibre optic cables in the PPCC link. Check that there is no short circuit in the power stage. The short circuit or over current can cause this message due to the possible faulty power plate. It can causes possible overloading for auxiliary power and as a result PPCC link communication failure. Check the fibre optic cables connected between the inverter module x and APBU branching unit. If the fault is still active, replace the branching unit (only with parallel connected inverters). Check that there is no short circuit in the power stage. The short circuit or over current can cause this message due to the possible faulty power plate. It can causes possible overloading for auxiliary power and as a result PPCC link communication failure. If the fault is still active, replace the inverter module.
(xINT can be NINT, AINT or RINT)
PPCC LINK x Fault code: 5210 9.02 FW_2 bit 11
AINT board current measurement or communication fault between the AINT board in inverter module and APBU branching unit. (This fault can be masked, if the DC intermediate circuit voltage has been disconnected, but the RMIO board has an external power supply and fault indication is not needed. The Fault appears only if the motor is start. See Parameter 30.24).
x = (112)
PP OVERLOAD Fault code: 5482 8.07 LW_INV bit 5
Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature. This can be caused by excessive load at low frequencies (e.g. fast direction change with excessive load and inertia).
Check cooling. Check inverter dimensioning Increase speed reference ramp time. Reduce load
8 - 20
FAULT MESSAGES
Alarm / Fault Text
SHORT CIRC Fault code: 2340 9.01 FW_1 bit 0

Check the motor and motor cable. Measure the resistances of the power plate(s). If a faulty power plate is detected, replace the power plate and the NINT and NGDR boards or the whole inverter phase module. Check that the prevention of unexpected startup circuit has not opened during the run.
Cause
Short circuit has been detected. The output current is excessive.
SC INV x y Fault code: 2340 9.01 FW_1 bit 0 9.12 SHORT CIRC FAULT
Short circuit has been detected in the inverter module x phase y. The output current is excessive. This diagnostics is valid with parallel connected inverters. (x = 112, y = U, V and W)
Check the motor and motor cable. Measure the resistances of the power plate(s). If a faulty IGBT module is detected in ACS800, replace the inverter module. If a faulty power plate is detected in ACS600, replace the power plate and the NINT and NGDR boards or the whole inverter phase module. Check that the prevention of unexpected startup circuit has not opened during the run.
START INHIBI Fault code: FF7A
Prevention of unexpected start-up activated during the motor run or motor start command has been given at the prevention of unexpected start-up.
The Operator must close the prevention of unexpected start-up switch before motor start command. If the switch is closed and the alarm is still active, check that the Power On LED is lit on the NGPS (ACS600) or AGPS (ACS800) board. If the LED is off but there is a voltage at the input terminals of the NGPS or AGPS, replace the board. Check for mains supply imbalance. Check the mains fuses.
SUPPLY PHASE Fault code: 3130 9.02 FW_2 bit 0
Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high. This can be caused by a missing mains phase in the diode rectifier bridge, or DC voltage oscillation by a thyristor rectifying bridge (if used in the incoming section).
TEMP DIF x y Fault code: 4380 9.06 FW_3 bit 15 9.14 TEMP DIF FLT WORD UNDERLOAD Fault code: FF6A 9.01 FW_1 bit 8
A temperature difference trip limit of Check the cooling fan. Replace fan if out of inverter module has been reached in order. ACS800 R8i inverter module x Check the air filters if exists. compared to other parallel connected module(s). (x = 112) Process underload situation detected. Motor load is too low. This can be caused by a release mechanism in the driven equipment. (Programmable fault or alarm, see parameter 30.16.) Check the driven equipment. Check UNDERLOAD Fault Function parameters.
USER MACRO Fault code: FFA1 9.03 SFW bit 1
User Macro parameter file error. There is no User Macro saved or the file is defective.
Create the User Macro again.
8 - 21
Alarm Message Table
ALARM MESSAGES
Alarm Message
ACS 800 TEMP Warning code: 4210 9.04 AW_1 bit 4 ANALOG IO Warning: 5441 9.04 AW_1 bit 8 ALM (xx) 8.01 MSW bit 7 AP STOPPED APPL PROG1 ERROR 9.07 AW_3 bit 1 APPL PROG2 ERROR 9.07 AW_3 bit 2 APPL PROG3 ERROR 9.07 AW_3 bit 3 APPL SW OVERLOAD 9.07 AW_3 bit 0 Adaptive programme (AP) has detected internal fault on the slowest time level (500 ms). Application (AP) software overload. There is no enough processor capacity to execute blocks. There is an internal alarm in the drive. Analogue I/O error detected on the Standard I/O board RMIO.
(in alphabetical order) Action

Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against unit power. Replace the RMIO board. Test with new fibre optic cables on CH1, if AIMA-01 I/O Module Adapter is used. Check for loose connections inside of frequency converter cabinet. Write down the Alarm code (in brackets). Contact ABB Service. Start all the time levels (Drive AP or CDP). Replace the RMIO board.
Cause
Drive IGBT temperature is excessive.
At least one of the tasks is in stop state in drive function block programme. Adaptive programme (AP) has detected internal fault on the fastest time level (20 ms). Adaptive programme (AP) has detected internal fault on the time level 100 ms.
Replace the RMIO board.
Reduce application software load e.g.:+ - change the fastest time level from 10 ms to 20 ms. - move some blocks to slower time level - disable point to point communication - disable some extension IO modules Activate actuator 6 of S3. Change battery. Note: Actuator 6 is normally activated (ON) during the commissioning. Note: Do not keep actuator 6 of S3 ON when stored as spare part.
BATT FAILURE Fault code: 5581 9.5 AW2 bit 12
An actuator 6 of S3 is off or voltage level of backup battery is low in the APBU-44 branching unit.
BR OVERHEAT Warning code: 7112
Brake resistor overload.
Stop drive. Let resistor cool down. Check parameter settings of resistor overload protection function (see parameter group 34 BRAKE CHOPPER). Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits.
CABLE TEMP Fault code: 4080 8.05 AW_2 bit 3
Motor cable overtemperature alarm. Thermal model of the cable has reached 90% temperature level.
Check the motor load. Check the motor cable and its type and verify the cable thermal model parameters from the parameter group 36.
8 - 22
ALARM MESSAGES
Alarm Message Cause
CH2 NODE2 ERROR Communication break detected on CH2 node 2 point to point communication. 9.07 AW_3, bit 5

Check CH2 settings: 70.7 CH2 NODE ADDR = 2 70.8 M/F MODE = MASTER/FOLLOWER Check the optical fibres between the RMIO boards. Check that the optical fibre loop is closed. Test with new optical fibres.
CH2 NODE3 ERROR Communication break detected on CH2 node 3 point to point communication. 9.07 AW_3, bit 6
Check CH2 settings: 70.7 CH2 NODE ADDR = 3 70.8 M/F MODE = MASTER/FOLLOWER Check the optical fibres between the RMIO boards. Check that the optical fibre loop is closed. Test with new optical fibres.
COMM MODULE Warning code: 7510 9.05 AW_2 bit 11
Fieldbus communication break detected on fieldbus module or on communication channel CH0 receive. (Programmable fault, see parameter 70.04).
Check the connections of fieldbus adapter module. With an ABB Advant overriding system check channel CH0 optical fibres between the RMIO board and overriding system (or Nxxx type of fieldbus adapter). Test with new optical fibres. Check that the node address is correct in the drive. Check the earthings of the fieldbus cables. Check the status of the fieldbus adapter. See appropriate fieldbus adapter manual. Check parameter settings of Group 51 if a fieldbus adapter is present. Check the connections between the fieldbus and the adapter. Check that the bus master is communicating and correctly configured.
M/F COM LOSS Warning code: 7520 9.04 AW_1 bit 11
Communication break detected in Follower drive. (Programmable fault or alarm; see parameter 70.14)
Check the fibre optic cables on CH2 between the RMIO boards. Check that the fibre optic loop is closed. Test with new fibre optic cables on CH2. Check that there is one master drive and the remainder are followers in the M/F link. See parameter 70.08 M/F MODE.
DC UNDERVOLT Warning code: 3220 9.05 AW_2 bit 14 DIGITAL IO 9.04 AW_1 bit 7 Warning code: 5442
An undervoltage trip has been detected with the Auto Restart function. This is indicated to the AW2 diagnostics. Digital input malfunction detected in the RMIO board.
n.a. Only indication.
8 - 23
ALARM MESSAGES
Alarm Message
EARTH FAULT Warning code: 2330 9.04 AW_1 bit 14

Check motor. Check motor cable. Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in the motor cable.
Cause
The load on the incoming mains system is out of balance. This can be caused by a fault in the motor, motor cable or an internal malfunction. (Programmable fault or alarm; see parameter 30.20) Tripping level setting is too sensitive in the R8iR12i inverters. See parameter 30.25.
EM STOP 9.04 AW_1 bit 1
Emergency Stop has been activated either by digital input (if block programmed) or MAIN CONTROL WORD 7.01 bit 1 or 2 (= 0).
Emergency stop push buttons must be returned to their normal position after the emergency stop situation is over. Check that the overriding system keeps sending the MAIN CONTROL WORD to drive. See bit 1 and 2 of MCW or CW block. To get drive to ready status, the MCW bit 0 must be set to state FALSE and back to TRUE.
ENCODER1 ERR Warning code: 7301 9.04 AW_1 bit 5
Speed measurement 1 alarm detected. This can be caused by a loose cable connection or faulty pulse encoder. (Programmable fault or alarm, see parameter 50.05)
Check settings of parameter group 50. Check the pulse encoder and its cabling (including CH A and CH B phasing). The sign of signal 1.03 SPEED MEASURED 1 must be the same as internal actual speed 1.02 SPEED ESTIMATED. If it is not, reverse the channels A and B. Check connection between the RMIO board and the RTAC pulse encoder module. Check the proper earthing of equipment. Check for highly emissive components nearby.
ENCODER2 ERR Warning code: 7301 9.04 AW_1 bit 6
Speed measurement 2 alarm detected. This can be caused by a loose cable connection or faulty pulse encoder. (Programmable fault or alarm, see parameter 50.17)
Check settings of parameter group 50. Check the pulse encoder and its cabling (including CH A and CH B phasing). Check connection between the RMIO board and the NTAC-02 pulse encoder module. Check the proper earthing of equipment. Check for highly emissive components nearby.
EXT ANALOG IO 9.04 AW_1 bit 10 Warning code: 7081 EXT DIGITAL IO 9.04 AW_1 bit 9 Warning code 7082
Analogue I/O error detected in the RAIO I/O Extension module
If the alarm is continuously active, replace the RAIO module.
Digital input error detected in the RDIO I/O Extension module.
If the alarm is continuously active, replace the RDIO module.
8 - 24
ALARM MESSAGES
Alarm Message
INV DISABLED Warning code: 3200 8.20 INV ENABLED WORD

Close the DC switch. A DC switch status of each parallel connected inverter module can be seen from the signal 8.20 INV ENABLED WORD. If a DC switch is not included to the HW configuration, deactivate this function by parameter 98.12 FUSE SWITCH CNTR. Load is too high. Check the dimensioning and process.
Cause
DC switch has been opened at stop state. This diagnostics is valid only in ACS800 R8i modules with AFSC-0x Fuse Switch Controller unit.
INV OVERLOAD Warning code: 5481 9.05 AW2_ bit 2 M/F CONNECT
Forced cooling cycle for ACS800 / ACS600 inverter is active after the overloading cycle. Incompatible parameter type selected in master drive. (see data type of parameters 70.0970.11). Overtemperature in AINT board of inverter module.
Change correct value for parameter 70.0970.11. Check inverter fan. Check ambient temperature. Check inverter fan. Check ambient temperature. Check liquid cooling system.
MOD BOARD T Warning code: FF88 9.08 AW_3 bit 14 MOD CHOKE T Warning code: FF89 9.08 AW_3 bit 13 MOTOR STALL Warning code: 7121 9.05 AW_2 bit 9
Overtemperature in choke of liquid cooled R8i inverter module.
Motor or process stall. Motor operating in Check motor load and the drive ratings. the stall region. This can be caused by Check MOTOR STALL Fault Function excessive load or insufficient motor parameters. power. (Programmable fault or alarm; see Parameter 30.13)
MOTOR STARTS MOTOR TEMP Warning code: 4310 9.04 AW_1 bit 3 PANEL LOST 9.05 AW_2 bit 13
Motor ID Run has been selected and the drive started in the Local control mode. Overtemperature alarm (thermal model). Temperature has exceeded the alarm level of the thermal model. (Programmable fault or alarm; see Parameter 30.02) A Local Control device (CDP312R or DriveWindow) has ceased communicating. This can be caused by the disconnection of the selected local control device during local control or an internal fault in the local controlling device. (Programmable fault or alarm, see parameter 30.21) Error in restoring powerdown.ddf file Error in restoring powerfail.ddf file. Running time of the inverter cooling fan has exceeded its estimated life time.
Wait until the Motor ID Run is complete. Check motor ratings, load and cooling. Check parameter 30.28 THERM MOD ALM L. If USER MODE is selected, check that parameters 30.0930.12 are set correctly. Check Control Panel connector. Replace Control Panel in the mounting platform. Check PANEL LOST Fault Function parameters.
POWDOWN FILE 9.05 AW_2 bit 8 POWFAIL FILE 9.05 AW_2 bit 7 REPLACE FAN
If the alarm keeps reappearing, replace the RMIO board. If the alarm keeps reappearing, replace the RMIO board. Change the fan. Reset fan run time counter parameter 1.31.
8 - 25
ALARM MESSAGES
Alarm Message
RUN DISABLED Fault code: FF54 9.05 AW2 bit 14 START INHIBI Warning code: FF7A 9.04 AW_1 bit 0 Prevention of unexpected start-up activated from the hardware typically by operator for equipment maintenance.

Check the interlocking of RUN ENA block in the Drive AP program.
Cause
The drive is not allowed to RUN (Drive AP application block).
The Operator must close the prevention of unexpected start-up switch. ACS 600: If the switch is closed and the alarm is still active, check that the Power On LED is lit on the NGPS board. If the LED is off but there is a voltage at the input terminals of the NGPS, replace the board. Check nominal speed from motor rating plate and set parameter 99.05 exactly accordingly.
SYNCRO SPEED
The value of the motor nominal speed set to parameter 99.05 is not correct: The value is too near the synchronous speed of the motor. Tolerance is 0.1%.
TEMPD INV x Warning code: 4314 9.08 AW_3 bit 15 9.15 TEMP DIF ALM WORD UNDERLOAD Warning code: FF6A 9.05 AW_2 bit 1
Check the cooling fan. Replace fan if A temperature difference alarm limit of out of order. inverter module has been reached in ACS800 R8i inverter module x compared Check the air filters if exists. to other parallel connected module(s). (x = 112) Process underload situation detected. Motor load is too low. This can be caused by a release mechanism in the driven equipment. (Programmable fault or alarm; see parameter 30.16) Check for a problem in the driven equipment. Check UNDERLOAD Fault Function parameters.
SYSTEM START
If this message appears during the Inverter software has been started. This indicates normally an auxiliary voltage on normal operation of drive, check the power supply for RMIO board. connection. Check the connections of +24 VDC supply circuit. Check possible short cuts in the +24 VDC circuit.
8 - 26
Other Messages
OTHER MESSAGES
Alarm Message
SWC ON INHIB 8.01 MSW bit 6 ID N CHANGED

Set MAIN CONTROL WORD bit 0 first to 0, and then back to 1 to proceed into the next state. To change the Modbus ID number back to 1 go to Drive Selection Mode by pressing DRIVE. Press ENTER. Set the ID number to 1. Press ENTER. Please wait. This warning belongs to the normal start-up procedure. Press PAR and check parameter 99.07. Please wait 20 to 60 seconds. -
Cause
Drive is in the ON INHIBIT state. See ABB Drive Profile description. Modbus ID number of the drive has been changed from 1 in Drive Selection Mode of CDP312R panel (the change is not shown on the display). A Macro is being restored or a user Macro is being saved. The drive is ready to start identification magnetisation. The drive is performing identification magnetisation. The drive has performed the identification magnetisation and is ready to start.
MACRO CHANGE ID MAGN REG
ID MAGN ID DONE
Alarm messages generated by the control panel
CONTROL PANEL MESSAGES

Alarm Message
DOWNLOADING FAILED

Make sure the panel is in local mode. Retry (there might be interference on the link). Contact ABB representative. Check program versions (see parameter group 4 INFORMATION).
Cause
Download function of the panel has failed. No data has been copied from panel to drive.
DRIVE INCOMPATIBLE DOWNLOADING NOT POSSIBLE DRIVE IS RUNNING DOWNLOADING NOT POSSIBLE
Program versions in the panel and drive do not match. It is not possible to copy data from panel to drive. Downloading is not possible while the motor is running.
Stop motor. Perform downloading.
NO COMMUNICATION Control Panel CDP312R message. The selected drive is not present on the link. The link does not work because of a hardware malfunction or problem in the cabling. Panel type not compatible with version of the drive application program.
Check the fibre optic cable connections in the I/O-link.
Check panel type and version of the drive application program. The panel type is printed on the cover of the panel. The application program version is stored in parameter 4.03.
8 - 27
CONTROL PANEL MESSAGES

Alarm Message
NO FREE ID NUMBERS ID NUMBER SETTING NOT POSSIBLE NOT UPLOADED DOWNLOADING NOT POSSIBLE UPLOADING FAILED

Disconnect another station from the link to free an ID number.
Cause
The Panel Link already includes 31 stations.
No upload function has been performed.
Perform the upload function before downloading. See the Chapter Control Panel. Retry (there might be interference on the link). Contact ABB representative. Stop motor, and then change parameter value. Open the parameter lock (see parameter 16.02).
Upload function of the panel has failed. No data has been copied from the drive to the panel. Certain parameters do not allow changes while motor is running. If tried, no change is accepted, and a warning is displayed. Parameter lock is on.
WRITE ACCESS DENIED PARAMETER SETTING NOT POSSIBLE
8 - 28
Chapter 9 - Terms
TERM ACS ACS 600 ACS800 ACS 600 MultiDrive ACS800 MultiDrive ACU AI AIMA AINT NAMC NAMC Control Board AO APC2 AC 80 AC 800M ASIC BJT CAD CDC CDP 311 CDP312R CE Marking CMOS DC Busbar DDC FULL NAME AC Standard DESCRIPTION ABB standard frequency converter family. E.g. ACS800 and ACS 600. ACS 600 frequency converter family. ACS800 frequency converter family. System drive; a member of ACS 600 product family. System drive; a member of ACS800 product family. Interface for analogue input signal. Extension unit for mounting of I/O extension modules. Interface for RMIO/NAMC and main circuit. E.g. NAMC table. The interface between application SW and motor control SW in ACS 600. Control board for ACS 600 and ACS 600 MultiDrive. Interface for analogue output signal.
Auxiliary Control Unit Analogue Input I/O Module Adapter Main Circuit Interface Board Application and Motor Control Application and Motor Controller board Analogue Output Application Program Controller Advant Controller 80 Advant Controller 800M Application Specific Integrated Circuit Bipolar Junction Transistor Computer Aided Design Common Drive Control Common Drives Panel 311 Common Drives Panel 312 Communaut Europenne Marking Complementary MOS Digital Drive Controller
Non-standard IC circuits. Allow more compact and cheaper PCB design than using standard circuits. Semiconductor type. APC 2, DDC and optional boards. Control panel is used for setting drive parameters and monitoring the drive. Control panel uses the CDI-protocol. Control panel is used for setting drive parameters and monitoring the drive. Control panel uses the Modbus-protocol. CE marking: The product complies with the requirements of relevant European Directives. Semiconductor type. Direct Current supply for inverter units. Standard control functions, torque and speed control loops, internal start/stop logic, internal fault diagnostic, motor and cable protection.
ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual System Application Program 7.x
9-1
TERM DDCC DDCS DDCTool
FULL NAME Distributed Drives Communication Circuit Distributed Drives Communication System Digital Drive Controller Tool
DESCRIPTION Communication ASIC Communication protocol used with drive products. Windows based PC tool. Optically connected to the DDC, setting/monitoring DDCs parameters local control of DDC, monitoring actual values, testing DDC I/Os. Interface for a digital input signal. Interface for a digital output signal. Windows based tool program for Adaptive Proramming. Dimensioning PC tool for optional selection of ACS 600 and motors. PC tool for operating, controlling, parametrising and monitoring ABB drives. Processor type used in RMIO and NAMC board. Diode rectifying type of incoming supply. Revolutionary motor and inverter control method utilised first in ACS 600 product family. Non-volatile memory. The ability of electrical equipment to operate problem-free in electromagnetic environment. Likewise, the equipment must not disturb other products/systems. See: ROM. Semiconductor type. Non volatile memory type. E.g. the error is 0.01% FSR (from maximum value). Semiconductor type. Physical device or equipment. Control Input/Output signal (E.g. DI, DO, AI, AO). International cooling standard. Motor and inverter control ASIC used in ACS 600. Section through which the ACS 600 MultiDrive connects to the mains. E.g. ID run of ACS 600 to get initial motor parameters.
DI DO DriveAP DriveSize DriveWindow DSP DSU DTC EEPROM EMC
Digital Input Digital Output
Digital Signal Processor Diode Supply Unit Direct Torque Control Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI EPROM ESD FET Flash EEPROM FSR GTO HW I/O IC IC ICMC ICU ID
Electromagnetic Interference Erasable Programmable ROM ElectroStatic Discharge Field Effect Transistor Electrically Sector erasable EEPROM memory Full Scale Range Gate Turn-Off Thyristor Hardware Input/Output Integrated Circuit International Cooling Integrated Control Motor Circuit Incoming Unit Identification
9-2
TERM ID-run IEC IEEE IGBT IM IOCC IP IR ISO KLIXON KTY-84-1 LCD LCI LED LMD-0X Modbus MultiDrive NAC NAFA NAIO NAMC NBRA NBRC NCPC NCSA
FULL NAME Identification run
DESCRIPTION Start-up run to identify characteristics of a motor for optimum motor control. International Electrotechnical Organisation for Electrical and Electronic Commission Engineering Standards. Institute of Electrical and US professional society that takes part in Electronic Engineers standardisation. E.g. IEEE Conference Reviews. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor Power semiconductor used widely in frequency converters. International Mounting International mounting standard. Input Output Control Circuit I/O ASIC used in ACS 600 products. International Protection Degree of protection provided by enclosures. IR stands for voltage. I(Current)x E.g. IR compensation: An extra voltage R(Resistance) = U(Voltage)) (torque) boost for a motor at low speeds. International Organisation for E.g. ISO 9000 series quality standards. Standardisation Thermal switch Silicon type of temperature Temperature dependent silicon temperature sensor. sensor used e.g. in AC-motors to indicate motor temperature. Liquid Crystal Display Electronic display type used e.g. in CDP312R control panel. Load Commutated Inverter Some ABB Megadrive products are equipped with LCI (large synchronous motor drives). Light Emitting Diode Semiconductor type. Led Monitoring Display Led display for monitoring ACS 600 / ACS800 Drive status and one signal. Fieldbus communication protocol.
Drive consisting of several inverter modules connected to same DC link.

Next AC drive Common platform or basis for drives R&D projects. ACS 600, MultiDrive, XT are based on NAC for example. NAC AF100 Adapter Fieldbus option module of ACS 600. NAC Analogue Input/Output Option module for ACS 600 / ACS800 to extend analogue I/O channels. NAC NAMC Board Motor and inverter control board of ACS 600. NAC Braking Chopper Option device of ACS 600 for efficient braking with no regenerative input bridge. NAC Braking Chopper Controller Board controlling the operation of braking Board chopper NBRA. NAC Control Panel Cable Option cable for remote connection of the CDP312R control panel. NAC CS 31 Adapter Fieldbus option module of ACS 600 / ACS800.
9-3
TERM NDIO NDNA NDSC NECG NGDR NIBA NINP NINT NIOC NISA NLWC NMBA NMFA NPBA NPBU NPMP NPOW NPSM NSNA NTAC NTC NVAR OSI PCB PCMCIA PE PFC
DESCRIPTION Option module for ACS 600 to replace or extend digital I/O channels. NAC DeviceNet Adapter Fieldbus option module of ACS 600 / ACS800. NAC Diode Supply Unit Control board for half controlled Controller diode/thyristor input bridge. NAC EMC Cable Glands Optional add-on kit of ACS 601 (R3 to R6) for 360 cable shield earthing. NAC Gate Driver Board PCB of ACS 600 for controlling the inverter IGBTs. NAC Interbus-S Adapter Fieldbus option module of ACS 600. NAC Input Bridge Board PCB of ACS 600 for controlling the rectifier. NAC Interface Electronics Board PCB of ACS 600 for interfacing RMIO or NAMC and Main Circuit. NAC Input Output Control Board PCB of ACS 600 for connecting I/O and CDP312R control panel to the drive. NAC ISA/DDCS Adapter Optional device of ACS 600. Placed to a PC's ISA board slot. Connects via fibres to NAMC. NAC Ligth Wave Cable Optional add-on kit of ACS 600 (2 additional fibre optic cables). NAC Modbus Adapter Fieldbus option module of ACS 600 / ACS800. NAC Master Fieldbus Adapter Fieldbus option module of ACS 600. NAC Profibus Adapter Fieldbus option module of ACS 600 / ACS800. NAC PPCS Branching Unit Optical PPCS branching unit used when paralleling inverter modules. NAC Panel Mounting Platform Optional add-on kit of ACS 600: A base onto which the control panel can be attached. NAC Power Supply Board PCB of ACS 600 for powering other boards and option modules. NAC Power Supply Option Option module of ACS 600 to power external devices. NAC SucoNet Adapter Fieldbus option module of ACS 600. NAC Tacho (Encoder) Option pulse encoder interface for ACS 600. Negative Temperature Coefficient resistor NAC Varistor Board PCB of ACS 600 for input bridge protection. Open System Interconnection A standard layer model for open telecommunication systems. Printed Circuit Board Wiring boards used in electronic devices. Personal Computer Memory Card DDCS/PCMCIA interface enables connecting International Association PC and Drives Window tool to ACS 600 series drive. Protective Earth Terminal for grounding e.g. ACS 600. Pump and Fan Control (Macro) The macro of ACS 600 for controlling pump or fan sections.
FULL NAME NAC Digital Input/Output
9-4
TERM PI PID PLC PP PPCC PPCS ppm ppr PROM PT100 PTC PWM R&D R2R9 RAM RAIO RDCO RDCU RDIO RMIO RFI RMS RO ROM RS 232 RS 485
FULL NAME Proportional, Integral Proportional, Integral and Derivate Programmable Logic Controller Power Plate Power Plate Control Circuit Power Plate Communication System parts per million pulses per revolution
DESCRIPTION Controller type. Controller type which allows to control customers process.(e.g. used in ACS 600 speed controller). Inverter IGBTs, sensors and control circuits integrated into one component. ASIC of NINT board used for controlling PPs. Optical serial link for inverter control.
1/10-6 Number of pulses given by incremental encoder per one revolution. Programmable ROM See: ROM. Platinum Wire Resistance Temperature dependent resistor used e.g. in Element 100 AC-motors to indicate motor temperature. R = 100 ohm at 0. Positive Temperature Coefficient PTC thermistor is a semi-conductor used to resistor indicate exceeded temperature limit. Pulse Width Modulation The traditional control method of inverter. Research and Development Frame size 29 ACS 600/500 series: Size of the frame inside which the converter unit is assembled. Random Access Memory Volatile memory. Analogue Input/Output I/O option module for ACS 600 / ACS800 to replace or extend analogue I/O channels. DDCS communication option I/O option module for DDCS communication for ACS600 / ACS800. Includes CH0CH3. Drive controller unit DIN rail installable drive controller unit which include RMIO board, bottom plate and plastic cover. Digital Input/Output I/O option module for ACS 600/ACS 800 to replace or extend digital I/O channels. RMIO Board Motor, I/O and Inverter control board of ACS 600/ACS800. Radio Frequency Interference Root Mean Square For sine wave the RMS value is obtained by dividing the maximum by the square root of 2. Relay Output Interface for a digital output signal. Implemented with a relay. Read Only Memory Non-volatile memory Standard for data transmission physical interface (signal usage & other electrical parameters). Standard for data transmission physical interface (signal levels & other electrical parameters).
9-5
TERM RTAC SCR SDCS UCM-1 SDCS-COM-1 SDCS-CON-1 SDCS-IOB-22 SDCS-IOB-23 SDCS-IOE-2 SDCS-PIN-41 SDCS-PIN-51 SDCS-POW-1 SW TSU UART UPS UR fuse VSD XT YPQ112A/B
FULL NAME Tacho (Encoder) Silicon Controlled Rectifier UC-resistor board Communication board Control board Digital connection card (115V) Digital connection card (230V) UC-measurement board Pulse transformer board Measurement board Power supply board Software Thyristor Supply Unit Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter Uninterrupted Power Supply Ultra Rapid fuse Variable Speed Drives Extension
DESCRIPTION Option pulse encoder interface for ACS 600/ ACS 800. Semiconductor type similar to thyristor. Used in TSU. Used in TSU. Used in TSU. Used in TSU. Used in TSU. Used in TSU. Used in TSU. Used in TSU. Used in TSU. Computer programs. Full controlled thyristor input bridge. Communication controlled circuit used in asynchronous communication protocols. Power supply equipment with battery to maintain output voltage during power failure. Fuse type used to protect semiconductors. Speed controlled electrical motor. R&E project name. It stands for power range extension of ACS 600 product family by paralleling inverter modules. DDCS Interface board for CDC system.
9-6
ABB Oy AC Drives P.O. Box 184 FI-00381 HELSINKI FINLAND Telephone +358 10 22 11 Fax +358 10 22 22681 Internet http://www.abb.com
ABB Inc. Automation Technologies Drives & Motors 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin, WI 53151 USA Telephone 262 785-3200 800-HELP-365 Fax 262 780-5135
ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co. Ltd No. 1, Block D, A-10 Jiuxianqiao Beilu Chaoyang District Beijing, P.R. China, 100015 Telephone +86 10 5821 7788 Fax +86 10 5821 7618 Internet http://www.abb.com
3AFE64773984 Rev C EFFECTIVE: 23.08.2006

En MultiBlockProgApplFW C

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

En MultiBlockProgApplFW C

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

En MultiBlockProgApplFW C

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ACS 600 ACS800

Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

ACS 600/ACS800 Code: 3AFE64773984 Rev C EFFECTIVE: 23.08.2006

2006 ABB Oy. All rights reserved.

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

Chapter 1 Introduction to This Manual

Compatibility Safety Instructions

Before You Start

What This Manual Contains

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

Chapter 1 Introduction to This Manual

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

General Start-up Instructions

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

Cat. no. 6312/C3

3GAA 202 001 - ADA 6210/C3 180 kg IEC 34-1

Field Weakening Point Values!

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

Where p = number of pole pairs (= motor pole number / 2)

= motor nominal frequency [Hz] = motor nominal speed [rpm]

s = motor slip [%]

Download the parameters.

Activating the Optional Modules

Checking the I/O

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

Checking the Inverter Fan Speed Control

Checking the Motor Fan Circuit (if exists).

Checking the DC switch option in multidrive.

Checking the Auxiliary Power Supply for control board (RMIO).

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

MOTOR ID RUN = MOTOR IDENTIFICATION RUN

With a pulse encoder (Encoder 1)

Without a pulse encoder

The Alarm Message "ID MAGN REQ" is displayed.

The Alarm Message "ID DONE" is displayed.

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

Changing the direction:

An input channel connection of the NTAC-02.

50.03 SPEED FB SEL

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

Select the Motor ID Run.

99.07 MOTOR ID RUN

99.07 MOTOR ID RUN

Start the motor.

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

Settings of Second Pulse Encoder on DDCS Channel CH2

50.18 ENC2 FILT TIME 1.28 SPEED MEASURED 2

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x

Set the limit parameters according to process requirements.

Parameter group 20 LIMITS

ACS 600/ACS800 Firmware Manual Multi Block Programming Application 7.x